Multi Tech Systems Network Router GPRS MTMMC G User Manual

Wireless GSM/GPRS Modems  
MultiModem® GPRS (MTCBA-G)  
MMCModemGPRS (MTMMC-G)  
SocketModem® GPRS (MTSMC-G)  
AT Commands  
Reference Guide  
 
Table of Contents  
Contents  
Chapter 1 – Introduction................................................................................................................................................9  
Scope of This Document............................................................................................................................................9  
Related Documents....................................................................................................................................................9  
Definitions ..................................................................................................................................................................9  
Chapter 2 – AT Command Features ...........................................................................................................................10  
Line Settings ............................................................................................................................................................10  
Command Line.........................................................................................................................................................10  
Information Responses and Result Codes...............................................................................................................10  
Chapter 3 – General Behaviors...................................................................................................................................11  
SIM Card Insertion and Removal Procedures..........................................................................................................11  
Background Initialization ..........................................................................................................................................11  
About the Length of Phone Numbers .......................................................................................................................11  
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands...........................................................................................................................13  
Manufacturer Identification +CGMI.........................................................................................................................13  
Request Model Identification +CGMM....................................................................................................................13  
Request Revision Identification +CGMR................................................................................................................13  
Product Serial Number +CGSN..............................................................................................................................14  
Select TE Character Set +CSCS............................................................................................................................14  
Phonebook Character Set +WPCS ........................................................................................................................14  
Request IMSI +CIMI...............................................................................................................................................15  
Card Identification +CCID.......................................................................................................................................15  
Capabilities List +GCAP.........................................................................................................................................15  
Repeat Last Command A/.......................................................................................................................................15  
Power Off +CPOF ...................................................................................................................................................16  
Set Phone Functionality +CFUN ............................................................................................................................16  
Phone Activity Status +CPAS.................................................................................................................................17  
Report Mobile Equipment Errors +CMEE...............................................................................................................17  
Keypad Control +CKPD .........................................................................................................................................17  
Clock Management +CCLK....................................................................................................................................18  
Alarm Management +CALA....................................................................................................................................18  
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands..........................................................................................................................19  
Dial Command D....................................................................................................................................................19  
Hang-Up Command H............................................................................................................................................20  
Answer a Call A......................................................................................................................................................21  
Remote Disconnection .............................................................................................................................................21  
Extended Error Report +CEER ..............................................................................................................................21  
DTMF Signals +VTD, +VTS ...................................................................................................................................21  
Redial Last Telephone Number DL ........................................................................................................................22  
Automatic Dialing with DTR %D.............................................................................................................................23  
Automatic Answer S0.............................................................................................................................................23  
Incoming Call Bearer +CICB ..................................................................................................................................24  
Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS........................................................................................................................24  
Gain Control +VGR, +VGT.....................................................................................................................................24  
Microphone Mute Control +CMUT..........................................................................................................................26  
Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER .......................................................................................................26  
Echo Cancellation +ECHO.....................................................................................................................................27  
SideTone Modification +SIDET ..............................................................................................................................30  
Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP............................................................................................................................30  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
3
 
Table of Contents  
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands ..................................................................................................................31  
Signal Quality +CSQ ...............................................................................................................................................31  
Operator Selection +COPS ....................................................................................................................................31  
Network Registration +CREG.................................................................................................................................33  
Operator List Management +WOLM ......................................................................................................................33  
Read Operator Name +WOPN................................................................................................................................34  
Selection of Preferred PLMN List +CPLS...............................................................................................................36  
Preferred Operator List +CPOL..............................................................................................................................37  
Read Operator Name +COPN................................................................................................................................39  
Chapter 7 – Security Commands................................................................................................................................40  
Enter PIN +CPIN....................................................................................................................................................40  
Enter PIN2 +CPIN2................................................................................................................................................42  
PIN Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC..............................................................................................................42  
Facility Lock +CLCK...............................................................................................................................................43  
Change Password +CPWD....................................................................................................................................44  
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands ..........................................................................................................................45  
Introduction to Phonebook Commands ....................................................................................................................45  
About the Parameters ..............................................................................................................................................45  
Select Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS...........................................................................................................46  
Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR ..........................................................................................................................47  
Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW.............................................................................................................................49  
Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF ............................................................................................................................52  
Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP.........................................................................................................................53  
Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN........................................................................................................................54  
Subscriber Number +CNUM...................................................................................................................................55  
Avoid Phonebook Initialization +WAIP ...................................................................................................................56  
Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP...........................................................................................................................56  
Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM ..............................................................................................................................56  
Contact Selector +WCOS........................................................................................................................................57  
Create and Delete a Phonebook Group +WPGW ...................................................................................................57  
Read a Phonebook Group +WPGR ........................................................................................................................58  
Settings of a Phonebook Group +WPGS ................................................................................................................59  
Chapter 9 – Short Messages.......................................................................................................................................60  
Parameters Definition...............................................................................................................................................60  
Select Message Service +CSMS ............................................................................................................................61  
New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA.............................................................................................................61  
Preferred Message Storage +CPMS......................................................................................................................63  
Preferred Message Format +CMGF.......................................................................................................................64  
Save Settings +CSAS ............................................................................................................................................65  
Restore Settings +CRES........................................................................................................................................65  
Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH.....................................................................................................................65  
New Message Indication +CNMI............................................................................................................................66  
Read Message +CMGR.........................................................................................................................................68  
List Message +CMGL.............................................................................................................................................69  
Send Message +CMGS .........................................................................................................................................70  
Write Message to Memory +CMGW.......................................................................................................................71  
Send Message from Storage +CMSS ....................................................................................................................72  
Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP........................................................................................................................72  
Delete Message +CMGD .......................................................................................................................................73  
Service Center Address +CSCA ............................................................................................................................74  
Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB......................................................................................................74  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
4
 
Table of Contents  
Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM..........................................................................................................75  
Message Status Modification +WMSC...................................................................................................................75  
Message Overwriting +WMGO...............................................................................................................................76  
Change or Do Not Change SMS Status +WUSS ...................................................................................................77  
Copy Messages +WMCP .......................................................................................................................................78  
More Messages to Send +CMMS ..........................................................................................................................79  
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands ..................................................................................................80  
Call Forwarding +CCFC ..........................................................................................................................................80  
Call Barring +CLCK................................................................................................................................................81  
Modify SS Password +CPWD ................................................................................................................................81  
Call Waiting +CCWA..............................................................................................................................................82  
Calling Line Identification Restriction +CLIR ..........................................................................................................83  
Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP .......................................................................................................83  
Connected Line Identification Presentation +COLP ...............................................................................................84  
Advice of Charge +CAOC ......................................................................................................................................85  
Accumulated Call Meter +CACM............................................................................................................................85  
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum +CAMM...........................................................................................................86  
Price Per Unit and Currency Table +CPUC............................................................................................................86  
Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD .......................................................................................................87  
List Current Calls +CLCC.......................................................................................................................................88  
Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN.........................................................................................................89  
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data +CUSD...............................................................................................90  
Closed User Group +CCUG....................................................................................................................................91  
Chapter 11 – Data Commands ....................................................................................................................................92  
Using AT Commands During a Data Connection.....................................................................................................92  
Bearer Type Selection +CBST ...............................................................................................................................93  
Select Mode +FCLASS ..........................................................................................................................................94  
Service Reporting Control +CR...............................................................................................................................94  
Cellular Result Codes +CRC..................................................................................................................................95  
DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR..................................................................................................................95  
Radio Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP................................................................................................................96  
Other Radio Link Parameters +DOPT.....................................................................................................................96  
Select Data Compression %C.................................................................................................................................97  
V42bis Data Compression +DS..............................................................................................................................97  
V42bis Data Compression Report +DR..................................................................................................................98  
Select Data Error Correcting Mode \N....................................................................................................................98  
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands.....................................................................................................................99  
Fixed DTE Rate +IPR.............................................................................................................................................99  
DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF......................................................................................................................100  
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control +IFC......................................................................................................................101  
Set DCD Signal &C ..............................................................................................................................................101  
Set DTR Signal &D...............................................................................................................................................102  
Set DSR Signal &S...............................................................................................................................................102  
Back to Online Mode O .........................................................................................................................................102  
Result Code Suppression Q.................................................................................................................................102  
DCE Response Format V.....................................................................................................................................103  
Default Configuration Z ........................................................................................................................................103  
Save Configuration &W.........................................................................................................................................103  
Auto-Tests &T ......................................................................................................................................................104  
Echo E..................................................................................................................................................................104  
Restore Factory Settings &F ................................................................................................................................104  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
5
 
Table of Contents  
Display Configuration &V .....................................................................................................................................105  
Request Identification Information I......................................................................................................................105  
Multiplexing Mode +WMUX...................................................................................................................................106  
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands ......................................................................................................................107  
Cell Environment Description +CCED..................................................................................................................107  
General Indications +WIND..................................................................................................................................109  
Analog Digital Converter Measurements +ADC ....................................................................................................111  
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER ........................................................................................................112  
Read Language Preference +WLPR....................................................................................................................113  
Write Language Preference +WLPW ...................................................................................................................113  
Read GPIO Value +WIOR.....................................................................................................................................114  
Write GPIO Value +WIOW ...................................................................................................................................114  
Input/Output Management +WIOM ......................................................................................................................115  
Abort Command +WAC........................................................................................................................................116  
Play Tone +WTONE.............................................................................................................................................117  
Play DTMF Tone +WDTMF..................................................................................................................................118  
Downloading +WDWL..........................................................................................................................................118  
Voice Rate +WVR .................................................................................................................................................119  
Data Rate +WDR .................................................................................................................................................120  
Select Voice Gain +WSVG...................................................................................................................................121  
Status Request +WSTR.......................................................................................................................................121  
Scan +WSCAN.....................................................................................................................................................122  
Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM ................................................................................................................................122  
32kHz Power Down Mode +W32K.......................................................................................................................123  
Change Default Melody +WCDM .........................................................................................................................123  
Custom Character Set +WCCS............................................................................................................................124  
Lock +WLCK ........................................................................................................................................................125  
CPHS Command +CPHS.....................................................................................................................................126  
Unsolicited Result: Voice Mail Indicator +WVMI...................................................................................................128  
Unsolicited Result: Diverted Call Indicator +WDCI...............................................................................................128  
Network Operator Name +WNON........................................................................................................................129  
CPHS Information +WCPI....................................................................................................................................129  
Customer Service Profile +WCSP.........................................................................................................................130  
Customer Storage Mirror +WMIR.........................................................................................................................130  
Change Default Player +WCDP ............................................................................................................................130  
CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN ........................................................................................................................131  
Alternate Line Service +WALS.............................................................................................................................132  
Wavecom Open AT Control Command +WOPEN ...............................................................................................133  
Reset +WRST ......................................................................................................................................................135  
Set Standard Tone +WSST..................................................................................................................................135  
Hang-up +WATH..................................................................................................................................................136  
Multi-Band Selection +WMBS ..............................................................................................................................137  
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit ...........................................................................................................................................138  
Overview of SIM Application Toolkit.......................................................................................................................138  
Messages Exchanged During a SIM Toolkit Operation..........................................................................................139  
SIM Toolkit Commands..........................................................................................................................................140  
SIM Toolkit Set Facilities +STSF..........................................................................................................................140  
SIM Toolkit Indication +STIN or +STRIL ..............................................................................................................142  
SIM Toolkit Get Information +STGI ......................................................................................................................143  
Unsolicited Result: SIM Toolkit Control Response +STCR ..................................................................................146  
SIM Toolkit Give Response +STGR.....................................................................................................................146  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
6
 
Table of Contents  
Chapter 15 – GPRS commands ................................................................................................................................149  
Define PDP Context +CGDCONT........................................................................................................................149  
Quality of Service Profile Requested +CGQREQ..................................................................................................151  
Quality of Service Profile Minimum Acceptable +CGQMIN..................................................................................154  
GPRS Attach or Detach +CGATT ........................................................................................................................155  
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT .....................................................................................................156  
Enter Data State +CGDATA.................................................................................................................................157  
GPRS Mobile Station Class +CGCLASS .............................................................................................................158  
Select Service for MO SMS Messages +CGSMS ................................................................................................159  
GPRS Event Reporting +CGEREP ......................................................................................................................160  
GPRS Network Registration Status +CGREG......................................................................................................161  
Request GPRS IP Service D................................................................................................................................162  
Network Requested PDP Context Activation..........................................................................................................163  
Automatic Response to a Network Request for PDP Context Activation +CGAUTO ...........................................164  
Manual Response to a Network Request for PDP Context Activation +CGANS..................................................165  
Show PDP Address +CGPADDR.........................................................................................................................166  
Cellular Result Codes +CRC................................................................................................................................166  
Service Reporting Control +CR............................................................................................................................167  
Extended Error Report +CEER ............................................................................................................................167  
GPRS Parameters Customization +WGPRS .......................................................................................................168  
Examples of Full GPRS AT Commands.................................................................................................................170  
Chapter 16 – Other AT Commands...........................................................................................................................171  
V.25ter Recommendation.......................................................................................................................................171  
GSM 07.05 Recommendation................................................................................................................................171  
GSM 07.07 Recommendation...............................................................................................................................171  
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables...................................................................................172  
Chapter Summary..................................................................................................................................................172  
ME Error Result Code: +CME ERROR: <error>...................................................................................................173  
Message Service Failure Result Code +CMS ERROR .........................................................................................174  
Specific Error Result Codes ...................................................................................................................................174  
Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 Recommendation +CEER...................................................................................176  
Specific Failure Cause for +CEER .........................................................................................................................177  
GSM 04.11 Annex E-2: Mobile Originating SM-Transfer.......................................................................................178  
Unsolicited Result Codes .......................................................................................................................................179  
Final Result Codes.................................................................................................................................................179  
Intermediate Result Codes.....................................................................................................................................179  
Parameter Storage Mode.......................................................................................................................................180  
GSM Sequences List..............................................................................................................................................182  
CPHS Information Field..........................................................................................................................................184  
CSP Constants.......................................................................................................................................................185  
Appendix B - ME SIM Toolkit Support......................................................................................................................187  
Appendix C – Structure of the Terminal Profile ......................................................................................................188  
Appendix D – Command Type and Next Action Indicator.....................................................................................190  
Appendix E – Coding of Alpha fields in the SIM for UCS2.....................................................................................191  
Appendix F – Command Execution and Dependence on SIM................................................................................193  
General Commands ...............................................................................................................................................193  
Call Control Commands .........................................................................................................................................193  
Network Service Commands..................................................................................................................................194  
Security Commands...............................................................................................................................................194  
Phonebook Commands..........................................................................................................................................194  
Short Messages Commands..................................................................................................................................194  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
7
 
Table of Contents  
Supplementary Services Commands .....................................................................................................................195  
Data Commands ....................................................................................................................................................195  
V24-V25 Commands..............................................................................................................................................195  
Specific AT Commands..........................................................................................................................................196  
SIM Toolkit Commands..........................................................................................................................................196  
GPRS Commands..................................................................................................................................................197  
Index ...........................................................................................................................................................................198  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
8
 
Chapter 1 – Introduction  
Chapter 1 – Introduction  
Scope of This Document  
This document describes the AT-command based messages exchanged between an application and the Multi-Tech Systems,  
Inc. products in order to manage GSM-related events or services.  
Related Documents  
This interface specification is based on the following recommendations:  
[1] ETSI GSM 07.05: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2);  
Use of DTE-DCE interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)  
[2] ETSI GSM 07.07: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2);  
AT command set for GSM Mobile Equipment (ME)  
[3] ITU-T Recommendation V.25 ter: Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control  
[4] ETSI GSM 03.40: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2);  
Technical implementation of the Short Message Service (SMS) Point-to-Point (PP)  
[5] ETSI GSM 03.38: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2);  
Alphabets and language-specific information  
[6] ETSI GSM 04.80: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2):  
Mobile radio interface layer 3, Supplementary service specification, Formats and coding  
Definitions  
The words, “Mobile Station” (MS) or “Mobile Equipment” (ME) are used for mobile terminals supporting GSM services.  
Terminal Equipment (TE) is the Man-Machine Interface of a GSM device (modem or handset). A TE can be a hanset  
MMI or the AT Command interface.  
A call from a GSM mobile station to the PSTN is called a “mobile originated call” (MOC) or “outgoing call”, and a call  
from a fixed network to a GSM mobile station is called a “mobile terminated call” (MTC) or “incoming call”.  
In this document, the word “product” refers to any Multi-Tech product supporting the AT commands interface.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
9
 
       
Chapter 2 – AT Command Features  
Chapter 2 – AT Command  
Features  
Line Settings  
A serial link handler is set with the following default values (factory settings):  
Autobaud  
8 bits data  
1 stop bit  
no parity  
RTS/CTS flow control  
Please use the +IPR, +IFC and +ICF commands to change these settings.  
Command Line  
Commands always start with AT (which means ATtention) and finish with a <CR> character.  
Information Responses and Result Codes  
Responses start and end with <CR><LF>, except for the ATV0 DCE response format and the ATQ1 (result code  
suppression) commands.  
If the command syntax is incorrect, an ERROR string is returned.  
If the command syntax is correct but transmitted with the wrong parameters, the +CME ERROR: <Err> or +CMS  
ERROR: <SmsErr> strings are returned with adequate error codes if the CMEE was previously set to 1. By  
default, CMEE us set to 0, and the error message is only “ERROR”.  
If the command line has been performed successfully, an OK string is returned.  
In some cases, such as “AT+CPIN?” or (unsolicited) incoming events, the product does not return the OK string as a  
response.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
10  
 
       
Chapter 3 – General Behaviors  
Chapter 3 – General Behaviors  
SIM Card Insertion and Removal Procedures  
SIM card Insertion and Removal procedures are supported. Software functions rely on positive reading of the hardware  
SIM detect pin. This pin state (open/closed) is permanently monitored.  
When the SIM detect pin indicates that a card is present in the SIM connector, the product tries to set up a logical SIM  
session. The logical SIM session will be set up or not depending on whether the detected card is a SIM Card or not. The  
AT+CPIN? command delivers the following responses:  
If the SIM detect pin indicates “absent”, the response to AT+CPIN? is “+CME ERROR 10” (SIM not inserted).  
If the SIM detect pin indicates “present”, and the inserted Card is a SIM Card, the response to AT+CPIN? is  
“+CPIN: xxx” depending on SIM PIN state.  
If the SIM detect pin indicates “present”, and the inserted Card is not a SIM Card, the response to AT+CPIN? is  
CME ERROR 10.  
These last two states are not given immediately due to background initialization. Between the hardware SIM  
detect pin indicating “present” and the previous results the AT+CPIN? sends “+CME ERROR: 515” (Please wait,  
init in progress).  
When the SIM-detect pin indicates card absence, and if a SIM Card was previously inserted, an IMSI detach procedure is  
performed, all user data is removed from the product (Phonebooks, SMS etc.). The product then switches to emergency  
mode.  
When the hardware SIM detect pin is not managed, the software cannot know the state of the SIM (SIM inserted or SIM  
removed) except for the initialization of the modem. In this case, the SIM must be present in the rack before the  
initialization of the modem can be taken into account.  
If the SIM is removed and it had been detected at the time of initialization of the modem, the following message is  
displayed: +CME ERROR: 13. If the SIM is inserted in the rack and it was not present at the time of the initialization of the  
modem, the state of the SIM remains unchanged (SIM removed). It will have to initialize the modem again so that it is  
detected.  
Background Initialization  
After entering the PIN (Personal Identification Number), some SIM user data files are loaded into the product  
(Phonebooks, SMS status, etc.). Please be aware that it might take some time to read a large phonebook.  
The AT+CPIN? command response comes just after the PIN is checked. After this response user data is loaded (in  
background). This means that some data may not be available just after PIN entry is confirmed by ’OK’. The reading of  
phonebooks will then be refused by “+CME ERROR: 515” or “+CMS ERROR: 515” meaning, “Please wait, service is not  
available, init in progress”.  
This type of answer may be sent by the product at several points:  
When trying to execute another AT command before the previous one is completed (before response),  
When switching from ADN to FDN (or FDN to ADN) and trying to read the relevant phonebook immediately,  
When asking for +CPIN? status immediately after SIM insertion and before the product has determined if the  
inserted card is a valid SIM Card.  
About the Length of Phone Numbers  
Phone numbers can consist of up to 60 digits. The first 20 digits are stored in the SIM in the phonebook file (EFADN, EFFDN  
or EFLND) corresponding to the selected phonebook. The next digits are stored in other extension SIM files (EFEXT1 or  
EFEXT2).  
Example:  
Number of Digits Nb of Records in EFADN  
Nb of Records in EFEXT1  
1 to 20  
21 to 40  
41 to 60  
1
1
1
0
1
2
If there are no more free records in the EFEXT1, the behavior is:  
if the user tries to store an entry that exceeds 20 digits: +CME: 20  
if the user tries to dial an number that exceeds 20 digits: +CME: 20  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
11  
 
       
Chapter 3 – General Behaviors  
Since the maximum length for the numbers in the ADN, FDN, and LND phonebooks is 60 digits:  
if the user tries to dial a number that exceeds 60 digits: +CME: 3  
Before the user can perform a call, the number of free records in the EFEXT1 is checked for availability of free space to  
store this number.  
If there are free records left, the call is setup.  
Otherwise, +CME: 20 error is returned (Memory Full).  
See Recommendation 3GPP 11.11 for more details.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
12  
 
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands  
Chapter 4 – General AT  
Commands  
Manufacturer Identification +CGMI  
Description:  
Values:  
Syntax:  
Displays the manufacturer identification.  
No parameters  
AT+CGMI  
Command  
AT+CGMI  
Possible responses  
WAVECOM MODEM  
OK  
Note: Get manufacturer identification  
Note: Command valid, Wavecom modem  
Request Model Identification +CGMM  
Description:  
Displays the supported frequency bands. With multi-band products the response may be a combination  
of different bands.  
No parameters  
AT+CGMM  
Values:  
Syntax:  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CGMM  
MULTIBAND 900E 1800  
OK  
Note: Get hardware version  
Note: Multiband: GSM 900 MHz extended band and DCS  
1800 (default configuration)  
AT+CGMM  
900E  
Note: Get hardware version  
OK  
Note: 900 Extended  
AT+CGMM  
1800  
Note: Get hardware version  
OK  
Note: DCS  
AT+CGMM  
1900  
Note: Get hardware version  
OK  
Note: PCS  
AT+CGMM  
G850  
Note: Get hardware version  
OK  
Note: GSM 850  
AT+CGMM  
Note: Get hardware version  
MULTIBAND G850 1900  
OK  
Note: Multiband: GSM 850 and PCS  
Request Revision Identification +CGMR  
Description:  
Displays the revised software version.  
Values:  
No parameters  
Syntax:  
AT+CGMR  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CGMR  
657_09gg.Q2406B 2015268 100506 17:01  
OK  
Note: Get software version  
Note: Software release 6.57, generated on the 5th of October  
2006  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
13  
 
       
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands  
Product Serial Number +CGSN  
Description:  
Allows the user application to get the IMEI (Interrnational Mobile Equipment Identity, 15-digit number) of  
the product.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters  
AT+CGSN  
Command  
AT+CGSN  
Possible responses  
012345678901234  
OK  
Note: Get the IMEI  
AT+CGSN  
Note: IMEI read from EEPROM  
+CME ERROR: 22  
Note: Get the IMEI  
Note: IMEI not found in EEPROM  
Select TE Character Set +CSCS  
Description:  
Informs the modem which character set is used by the DTE. The modem can convert each character of  
entered or displayed strings. This is used to send, read or write short messages. See also +WPCS for  
the phonebooks’ character sets.  
Values:  
<Character Set>  
GSM  
GSM default alphabet.  
PCCP437  
CUSTOM  
HEX  
PC character set code page 437.  
User defined character set (cf. +WCCS command).  
Hexadecimal mode. No character set used; the user can read or write hexadecimal  
values.  
Default:  
Syntax:  
GSM alphabet  
AT+CSCS=<Character Set>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CSCS=”GSM”  
OK  
Note: GSM default alphabet  
AT+CSCS=”PCCP437”  
Note: PC character set code  
AT+CSCS=?  
Note: Command valid  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
+CSCS: ("GSM","PCCP437","CUSTOM","HEX")  
OK  
Note: Get possible values  
Note: Possible values  
Phonebook Character Set +WPCS  
Description:  
Informs the modem which character set is used by the DTE for the phonebooks. The modem can  
convert each character of entered or displayed strings. This is used to read or write phonebook entries.  
See also +CSCS for the short messages character sets.  
Values:  
<Character Set>  
TRANSPARENT Transparent mode. The strings are displayed and entered as they are stored in  
SIM or in ME.  
CUSTOM  
HEX  
User defined character set (cf. +WCCS command).  
Hexadecimal mode. No character set used; the user can read or write  
hexadecimal values.  
Syntax:  
AT+WPCS=<Character Set>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WPCS=”TRANSPARENT”  
Note: Transparent mode  
AT+WPCS=”CUSTOM”  
Note: Custom character set  
AT+WPCS=?  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
+WPCS: ("TRANSPARENT","HEX","CUSTOM")  
OK  
Note: Get possible values  
Note: Possible values  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
14  
 
     
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands  
Request IMSI +CIMI  
Description:  
Reads and identifies the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) of the SIM card. The PIN may  
need to be entered before reading the IMSI.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters  
AT+CIMI  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CIMI  
208200120320598  
Note: Read the IMSI  
OK  
Note: IMSI value (15 digits), starting with MCC (3 digits) / MNC (2 digits,  
3 for PCS 1900)  
Card Identification +CCID  
Description:  
Values:  
Orders the product to read the EF-CCID file on the SIM card.  
No parameters  
AT+CCID  
Syntax:  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CCID  
Note: Get card ID  
AT+CCID?  
Note: Get current value  
+CCID: “123456789AB111213141”  
Note: EF-CCID is present, hexadecimal format  
+ CCID: “123456789AB111213141”  
Note: Same result as +CCID  
AT+CCID= ?  
OK  
Note: Get possible value  
Note: No parameter but this command is valid  
Note: If there is no EF-CCID file present on the SIM, the +CCID answer will not be sent, but the OK message will  
be returned.  
Capabilities List +GCAP  
Description:  
Values:  
Displays the complete list of capabilities.  
No parameters  
Syntax:  
AT+GCAP  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+GCAP  
+GCAP: +CGSM +FCLASS  
OK  
Note: Get capabilities list  
Note: Supports GSM and FAX commands  
Repeat Last Command A/  
Description:  
Values:  
Repeats the previous command. Only the A/ command itself cannot be repeated.  
No parameters  
A/  
Syntax:  
Command  
Possible responses  
A/  
Note: Repeat last command  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
15  
 
       
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands  
Power Off +CPOF  
Description:  
Stops the GSM software stack as well as the hardware layer or modem activity. The AT+CFUN=0  
command is equivalent to +CPOF.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters  
AT+CPOF[=1]  
Command  
AT+CPOF  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: Stop GSM stack  
Note: Command valid  
AT+CPOF=1  
OK  
Note: Stop the modem  
Note: Command valid  
Note:  
After AT+CPOF[=1], the modem will not respond to AT commands. To reset it, use the hard  
reset.  
Note: I  
n autobaud mode, after an AT+CPOF, unsolicited information that wakes up the modem is  
sent at 9600 bps until an AT command is sent. When an AT command is sent, the modem  
will synchronize to the sender’s speed.  
Caution: When starting up, if autobauding is enabled and no AT command has yet been received, the  
product sends all unsolicited responses (like RING) at 9600 baud.  
Set Phone Functionality +CFUN  
Description:  
Selects the mobile station’s level of functionality. When the application wants to stop the product with a  
power off, or if the application wants to force the product to execute an IMSI DETACH procedure, then it  
must send: AT+CFUN=0 (equivalent to AT+CPOF).  
This command executes an IMSI DETACH and makes a backup copy of some internal parameters in  
SIM and in EEPROM. The SIM card cannot then be accessed.  
If the mobile equipment is not powered off by the application after this command has been sent, a re-  
start command (AT+CFUN=1) will have to issued to restart the whole GSM registration process.  
If the mobile equipment is turned off after this command, then a power on will automatically restart the  
whole GSM process.  
The AT+CFUN=1 command restarts the entire GSM stack and GSM functionality: a complete software  
reset is performed. All parameters are reset to their previous values if AT&W was not used.  
If you write entries in the phonebook (+CPBW) and then reset the product directly (AT+CFUN=1, with  
no previous AT+CFUN=0 command), some entries may not be written (the SIM task does not have  
enough time to write entries in the SIM card).  
In addition, the OK response will be sent at the last baud rate defined by the +IPR command. With the  
autobauding mode the response can be at a different baud rate, it is therefore preferable to save the  
defined baud rate with AT&W before directly sending the AT+CFUN=1 command.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<functionality level>  
0 Set minimum funtionality; IMSI detach procedure  
1 Set the full functionality mode with a complete software reset  
AT+CFUN=<functionality level>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CFUN?  
+CFUN: 1  
Note: Ask for current functionality level  
OK  
Note: Full functionality  
AT+CFUN=0  
OK  
Note: Set minimum functionality, IMSI detach procedure  
Note: Command valid  
AT+CFUN=1  
OK  
Note: Set the full functionality mode with a complete software reset Note: Command valid  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
16  
 
   
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands  
Phone Activity Status +CPAS  
Description:  
Returns the activity status of the mobile equipment.  
Values:  
<pas>  
0
1
2
3
4
5
ready (allow commands from TA/TE)  
unavailable (does not allow commands)  
unknown  
ringing (ringer is active)  
call in progress  
asleep (low functionality)  
Syntax:  
AT+CPAS  
Command  
AT+CPAS  
Note: Current activity status  
Possible responses  
+CPAS: <pas>  
OK  
Report Mobile Equipment Errors +CMEE  
Description:  
Disables or enables the use of the “+CME ERROR: <xxx>” or “+CMS ERROR:<xxx>” result code  
instead of simply “ERROR”. See the Appendix for +CME ERROR Result Codes description and +CMS  
ERROR result codes.  
Values:  
<error reporting flag>  
0
1
Disable ME error reports; use only << ERROR >>  
Enable <<+CME ERROR: <xxx> >> or  
<< +CMS ERROR: <xxx> >>  
Syntax:  
AT+CMEE=<error reporting flag>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CMEE=?  
+CMEE: (0,1)  
OK  
AT+CMEE=0  
OK  
Note: Disable ME error reports, use only << ERROR >>  
AT+CMEE=1  
OK  
Note: Enable << +CME ERROR: <xxx> << or  
<< +CMS ERROR: <xxx> >>  
Keypad Control +CKPD  
Description:  
Emulates the modem keypad by sending each keystroke as a character in a <keys> string.  
The supported GSM sequences are listed in the Appendix A.  
If emulation fails, a +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.  
If emulation succeeds, the result depends on the GSM sequence activated.  
Note: In the case where the FDN phonebook is activated, the sequences concerning “call forwarding”  
are allowed only if the entire sequence is written in the FDN.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<keys>  
Keyboard sequence; string of the following characters (0-9, *, #)  
AT+CKPD=<keys>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CKPD=”*#21#”  
+CCFC: 0,7  
Note: Check every call forwarding status  
AT+CKPD=”1234”  
+CME ERROR 3  
Note: Sequence not allowed  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
17  
 
     
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands  
Clock Management +CCLK  
Description:  
Sets or gets the current date and time of the ME real-time clock.  
Values:  
<date and time string>  
String format for date/time is “yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss”  
Note: Valid years are 98 (for 1998) to 97 (for 2097). The second field is not mandatory. Default  
date/time is “98/01/01,00:00:00” (January 1st, 1998 / midnight).  
Syntax:  
AT+CCLK=<date and time string>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CCLK=”00/06/09,17:33:00”  
Note: set date to June 9th, 2000, and  
time to 5:33pm  
OK  
Note: Date/Time stored  
AT+CCLK=”00/13/13,12:00:00”  
Note: Incorrect month entered  
+CME ERROR 3  
AT+CCLK?  
Note: Get current date and time  
+CCLK: “00/06/09,17:34:23”  
OK  
Note: current date is June 9th, 2000  
current time is 5:34:23 pm  
Alarm Management +CALA  
Description:  
Sets the alarm date/time in the modem. The maximum number of alarms is 16.  
Note: The date/time should be set with the AT+CCLK command prior to using AT+CALA.  
Values:  
<date and time string> String format for alarms: “yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss” (see +CCLK)  
Note: Seconds are taken into account.  
<index> Offset in the alarm list, range 1 to 16  
Syntax:  
AT+CALA=<date and time string> (set alarm)  
AT+CALA=””,<index> (delete alarm)  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CALA=”00/06/09,07:30”  
Note: set an alarm for June 9th, 2000 at 7:30 am  
AT+CALA=”99/03/05,13:00:00”  
Note: set an alarm for March 5th, 1999 at 1:00 pm  
AT+CALA?  
OK  
Note: Alarm stored  
+CME ERROR 3  
Note: Invalid alarm (date/time expired)  
+CALA: “00/06/08,15:25:00”,1  
+CALA: “00/06/09,07:30:00”,2  
+CALA: “00/06/10,23:59:00”,3  
Note: three alarms are set (index 1, 2, 3)  
+CALA: “00/06/08,15:25:00”,1  
Note: an alarm occurs (index 1)  
OK  
Note: list all alarms  
AT+CALA=””,3  
Note: delete alarm index 3  
AT+CALA?  
Note: list all alarms  
Note: Alarm index 3 deleted  
+CALA: “00/06/09,07:30:00”,2  
Note: Only one alarm (index 2)  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
18  
 
   
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands  
Chapter 5 – Call Control  
Commands  
Dial Command D  
Description:  
The ATD command sets a voice or data call. As per GSM 02.30, the dial command also controls  
supplementary services.  
Data Calls  
For a data call, the application sends the following ASCII string to the product (the bearer must be  
previously selected with the +CBST command):  
ATD<nb> where <nb> is the destination phone number. Note: If a GPRS PPP session is already  
running, the setting of CSD (GSM data call) is not supported.  
Voice Calls  
For a voice call, the application sends the following ASCII string to the product: (the bearer may be  
selected previously, if not a default bearer is used).  
ATD<nb>; where <nb> is the destination phone number.  
Emergency Calls  
For emergency calls:  
These Emergency Numbers are available without a SIM card:  
000, 08, 110, 112, 118, 119, 911 and 999.  
These Emergency Numbers are available with a SIM card:  
When EF_ECC file is missing from SIM: 112 and 911.  
When SIM includes an EF_ECC file: 112, 911 and any emergency numbers available in the  
EF_ECC file.  
International Numbers  
For an international number, the local international prefix does not need to be set (usually 00) but does  
need to be replaced by the ‘+’ character.  
Example: to set up a voice call to Multi-Tech offices from another country, the AT command is:  
“ATD+17637853600;”  
Some countries/regions may have specific numbering rules for their GSM handset numbering.  
Values:  
<nb>  
<I>  
Destination phone number  
Optional parameter.  
<I> means “invocation” (restrict CLI presentation)  
<i> means “suppresssion” (allow CLI presentation)  
Phonebook (one of SM, LD, MC, ON, ME, RC, MT or SN). A default value can be selected  
by using the +CPBS command.  
<mem>  
<index>  
<name>  
Call number at indicated offset from the phonebook selected by the +CPBS command.  
Call number corresponding to given name from the phonebook selected by the +CPBS  
command.  
The response to the ATD command is one of the following:  
Verbose result code Numeric code  
(with ATV0 set)  
Description  
OK  
0
if the call succeeds, for voice call only  
CONNECT <speed> 10,11,12,13,14,15 if the call succeeds, for data calls only, <speed> takes  
the value negotiated by the product.  
BUSY  
NO ANSWER  
NO CARRIER  
7
8
3
If the called party is already in communication  
If no hang up is detected after a fixed network time-out  
Call setup failed or remote user release. Use the  
AT+CEER command to know the failure cause  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
19  
 
   
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands  
Direct Dialing from a Phonebook (stored in the SIM card) can be performed with the following commands:  
ATD> <index>;  
to call <index> from the selected phonebook (by the +CPBS command)  
ATD> “BILL”;  
to call “BILL” from the selected phonebook  
ATD> mem <index> allows direct dialing from a phonebook number  
<mem> is SM, LD, MC, ME, RC, MT or SN.  
See +CPBS command  
Syntax:  
ATD<nb>[<I>][;]  
ATD>[<mem>]<index>[<I>][;]  
ATD>[<mem>]<name>[<I>][;]  
Command  
AT+CPBS?  
Possible responses  
+CPBS:”SM”,8,10  
Note: Which phonebook is selected ?  
Note: ADN phonebook is selected, 8  
locations are used and 10 locations are  
available  
ATD>SM6;  
OK  
Note: Call index 6 from AND phonebook  
Note: Call succeeds  
When the FDN phonebook has been locked, only numbers beginning with the digits of FDN  
phonebook entries can be called.  
For example, if “014629” is entered in the FDN phonebook all the phone numbers beginning with these  
6 digits can be called.  
The CLIR supplementary service subscription can be overridden for this call only.  
“I” means “invocation” (restrict CLI presentation).  
“i” means “suppression” (allow CLI presentation).  
Control of CUG supplementary service information by “G” or “g” is allowed for this call only. The  
index and info values set with the +CCUG command are used.  
An outgoing call attempt could be refused if the AOC service is active and credit has expired (NO  
CARRIER).  
When trying to set up an outgoing call while there is an active call, the active call is first put on hold,  
then the call set up is carried out.  
As per GSM 02.30, GSM sequences may be controlled using dial commands. These sequences can  
contain “*”, “#”, but “;” is forbidden.  
If the sequence is not supported or fails, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. In the case, where the FDN  
phonebook is activated, the sequences concerning call forwarding are allowed only if they are written in  
the FDN. See Codes and Values Appendix for the list of supported sequences.  
Command  
ATD*#21#  
Possible responses  
+CCFC: 0,7  
Note: Check any call forwarding status  
Note: No call forwarding  
ATD**61*+33146290800**25#  
OK  
Note: Register call forwarding on no reply, with no reply Note: done  
timer fixed at 25 s.  
ATD*2#  
+CME ERROR 3  
Note: Bad sequence  
Hang-Up Command H  
Description:  
The ATH (or ATH0) command disconnects the remote user. In the case of multiple calls, all calls are  
released (active, on-hold and waiting calls). The specific ATH1 command has been appended to  
disconnect the current outgoing call, only in dialing or alerting state (i.e., ATH1 can be used only after  
the ATD command, and before its terminal response (OK, NO CARRIER, ...)  
It can be useful in the case of multiple calls.  
<n>  
0 Ask for disconnection (default value)  
1 Ask for outgoing call disconnection  
ATH<n>  
Values:  
Syntax:  
Command  
Possible responses  
ATH  
OK  
Note: Ask for disconnection  
Note: Every call, if any, is released  
ATH1  
OK  
Note: Ask for outgoing call disconnection Note: Outgoing call, if any, is released  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
20  
 
 
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands  
Answer a Call A  
Description:  
When the product receives a call, it sets the RingInd signal and sends the ASCII “RING” or “+CRING:  
<type>” string to the application (+CRING if the cellular result code +CRC is enabled). Then it waits for  
the application to accept the call with the ATA command.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters.  
ATA  
Command  
Possible responses  
RING  
Note: Incoming call  
ATA  
OK  
Note: Answer to this incoming call  
ATH  
Note: Call accepted  
OK  
Note: Disconnect call  
Note: Call disconnected  
Remote Disconnection  
This message is used by the product to inform the application that an active call has been released by the remote user.  
The product sends “NO CARRIER” to the application and sets the DCD signal.  
In addition, for AOC, the product can release the call if credit has expired (release cause 68 with +CEER command).  
Extended Error Report +CEER  
Description:  
This command gives the cause of call release when the last call set up (originating or answering) failed.  
Values:  
No parameters  
AT+CEER  
Syntax:  
Command  
ATD123456789;  
Note: Outgoing voice call  
Possible responses  
NO CARRIER  
Note: Call setup failure  
AT+CEER  
+CEER: Error <xxx>  
OK  
Note: Ask for reason of release  
Note: <xxx>is the cause information element values  
from GSM recommendation 04.08 or specific Call  
accepted  
Note: “NO CARRIER” indicates that the AT+CEER information is available for failure diagnosis.  
DTMF Signals +VTD, +VTS  
+VTD  
Description:  
The product enables the user application to send DTMF tones over the GSM network. This command is  
used to define tone duration (the default value is 70 ms 5 ms according to 3GPP 23.014).  
Values:  
<n> tone duration.  
This refers to an integer <n> that defines the length of tones emitted as a result of the +VTS  
command. This does not affect the D command.  
A value different than zero causes a tone of duration <n> *100 milliseconds.  
A value of zero (default value) causes a tone duration of 70 ms 5 ms.  
Note: The value is used modulo 256.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
21  
 
       
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands  
Syntax:  
AT+VTD=<n>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+VTD=6  
OK  
Note: To define 600 ms tone duration  
Note: Command valid  
AT+VTD=0  
OK  
Note: To set the default value (70 ms 5 ms)  
AT+VTD?  
AT+VTD: <n>  
Note: Query current tone duration  
OK  
AT+VTD=?  
AT+VTD: <0-255>  
OK  
+VTDS  
Description:  
The product enables the user application to send DTMF tones over the GSM network. This command  
enables tones to be transmitted only when there is an active call.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<Tone> DTMF tone to transmit.  
Tone is in {0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D}  
Command Syntax: AT+VTS=<Tone>  
Command  
AT+VTS=A  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
AT+VTS=11  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: To set the default value  
AT+VTS=4  
Note: If the <Tone> is wrong  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: If there is no communication  
AT+VTS=”1”;+VTS=”3”;+VTS=”#”  
OK  
Note: Sed tone sequence 13#  
Redial Last Telephone Number DL  
Description:  
This command redials the last number used in the ATD command. The last number dialed is displayed  
followed by “;” for voice calls only.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters  
ATDL  
Command  
Possible responses  
ATDL  
0146290800;  
Note: Redial last number  
OK  
Note: Last call was a voice call. Command valid  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
22  
 
 
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands  
Automatic Dialing with DTR %D  
Description:  
This command enables and disables:  
Automatic dialing of the phone number stored in the first location of the ADN phonebook, (or  
FDN phonebook, if it is activated using the +CLCK command).  
Automatic sending of the short message (SMS) stored in the first location of the SIM.  
The number is dialed when the DTR OFF switches ON.  
The short message is sent when DTR OFF switches ON.  
Values:  
<n> (0-2)  
Enables or disables automatic message transmission or number dialing. Informs the  
product that the number is a voice number rather than a data number.  
Disables automatic DTR number dialing / message transmission.  
Enables automatic DTR dialing if DTR switches from OFF to ON. Dials the phone number  
in the first location of the ADN phonebook (or FDN phonebook, if it is activated using the  
+CLCK command). Voice call with semicolon.  
%D0  
%D1;  
%D1  
%D2  
Activates automatic DTR dialing if DTR switches from OFF to ON. Dials the phone  
number in the first location of the ADN phonebook (or FDN phonebook, if it is activated  
using the +CLCK command). Data call without semicolon.  
Activates automatic DTR message transmission if DTR switches from OFF to ON. Sends  
the short message in the first location of the SIM.  
Note: If the first location is empty:  
AT%D1 and AT%D2 commands will receive an OK response.  
The DTR ON event will trigger a CME ERROR: 21 or a CMS ERROR: 321  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT%D<n>[;]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT%D1;  
OK  
Note: Activates DTR number dialing  
Note: Command has been executed  
DTR is OFF  
DTR switches ON  
OK  
Note: Number in the ADN’s first location is dialed automatically  
DTR switches OFF  
Note: The product goes on-hook  
AT%D2  
OK  
Note: Activates DTR short message sending  
Note: Command has been executed  
DTR is OFF  
DTR switches ON  
Note: The first short message is being sent  
AT%D1;  
+CMSS: x  
OK  
DTR is OFF  
DTR switches ON  
+CME ERROR: 21  
Note: No phone number in the ADN phonebook’s first location  
(or FDN phonebook if it’s activated using the +CLCK command)  
AT%D2;  
OK  
DTR is OFF  
DTR switches ON  
+CME ERROR: 321  
Note: No short message in the first location of the SIM  
Automatic Answer S0  
Description:  
This S0 parameter determines and controls the product automatic answering mode.  
Values:  
<value> The number of rings before an automatic answer (3 characters padded with zeros)  
Range of values is 0 to 255.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: ATS0=<value>  
Command  
Possible responses  
ATS0=2  
OK  
Note: Automatic answer after 2 rings  
ATS0?  
002  
OK  
Note: Current value  
ATS0=0  
Note: always 3 characters padded with zeros  
OK  
Note: No automatic answer  
Note: Command valid  
All others S-parameters (S6,S7,S8 …) are not implemented.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
23  
 
   
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands  
Incoming Call Bearer +CICB  
Description:  
This command sets the type of incoming calls when no incoming bearer is given (see +CSNS).  
Note: Setting the +CICB command affects the current value of +CSNS.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
Data  
Speech  
2
Syntax:  
AT+CICB=<mode>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CICB=2  
OK  
Note: If no incoming bearer, force a voice call Note: Command accepted  
AT+CICB?  
+CICB: 2  
Note: Interrogate value  
OK  
Note: Default incoming bearer: voice call  
AT+CICB=?  
+CICB: (0-2)  
Note: Test command  
OK  
Note: Speech or data default incoming bearer  
Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS  
Description:  
Selects the bearer to be used when an modem single numbering scheme call is set up (see +CICB).  
Note: Setting the +CSNS command affects the current value of +CICB.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0 Voice  
4 Data  
Syntax:  
AT+CSNS  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CSNS=0 Note: force a voice call OK  
Note: Command accepted  
AT+CSNS?  
Note: Interrogate value +CSNS: 0  
Note: Default incoming bearer: voice call  
AT+CSNS=? Note: Test command  
+CSNS: (0,2,4) Note: Voice or data default incoming  
bearer  
Gain Control +VGR, +VGT  
Description:  
This command is used by the application to tune the receive gain of the speaker and the transmit gain  
of the microphone.  
Values:  
<Rgain> is the reception gain  
<Tgain> is the transmission gain  
Syntax:  
AT+VGR=<Rgain> and AT+VGT=<Tgain>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+VGR=25  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
Note: Command valid  
Note: Default receive gain  
Note: Possible values  
Note: Default transmit gain  
Note: Possible values  
AT+VGT=45  
AT+VGR?  
Note: Interrogate value OK  
AT+VGR=?  
Note: Test command  
AT+VGT?  
Note: Interrogate value OK  
AT+VGT=?  
Note: Test command  
OK  
+VGR: 128  
+VGR: (0-255)  
OK  
+VGT: 32  
+VGT: (0-255)  
OK  
Note: For the AT+VGT? command with controller 1, the value is the lower value of range; whereas,  
with controller 2, the value corresponds to the entered value using AT+VGT=xx.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
24  
 
     
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands  
The application sends the following:  
AT+VGR=<val> for receive gain AT+VGT=<val>  
for transmit gain  
Controller 1  
+30 db  
+33 db  
+36 db  
+39 db  
+42 db  
+45 db  
+48 db  
AT+VGT=<val>  
Controller 2  
0
1
2
3
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
58  
59  
60  
for transmit gain  
Controller 2  
+0 db  
+0,5 db  
+1 db  
+1,5 db  
+9,5 db  
+10 db  
Controller 1  
0 to 15  
16 to 31  
32 to 47  
48 to 63  
64 to 79  
80 to 95  
96 to 111  
112 to 127  
128 to 143  
144 to 159  
160 to 175  
176 to 191  
192 to 207  
208 to 223  
224 to 255  
+6 db  
+4 db  
+2 db  
+0 db  
-2 db  
-4 db  
-6 db  
-8 db  
-10 db  
-12 db  
-14 db  
-16 db  
-18 db  
-20 db  
-22 db  
0 to 31  
32 to 63  
64 to 95  
96 to 127  
128 to 159  
160 to 191  
192 to 223  
224 to 255  
+51 db  
+10.5 db  
+11 db  
+11.5 db  
+29 db  
+29.5 db  
+30 db  
+30,5 db  
+31 db  
61  
62  
101  
+50,5 db  
+51 db  
-6,5 db  
-6 db  
102 to 127  
128 to 243  
244  
245  
246  
-5,5 db  
-5 db  
255  
-0,5 db  
The gain values listed here are relative, for absolute (electrical) values please refer to the specific hardware  
documentation of the module used in the application.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
25  
 
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands  
Microphone Mute Control +CMUT  
Description:  
This command mutes the microphone input on the product (for the active microphone set with the  
+SPEAKER command). This command is only allowed during a call.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
microphone mute off (default value).  
microphone mute on.  
Syntax:  
AT+CMUT=<mode>  
Command  
Possible responses  
+CMUT: (0,1)  
AT+CMUT=?  
OK  
Note: Test command  
AT+CMUT?  
Note: Enable / disable mute  
+CMUT: 0  
OK  
Note: Ask for current value  
AT+CMUT=1  
Note: Current value is OFF  
OK  
Note: Mute ON (call active)  
AT+CMUT?  
Note: Command valid  
+CMUT: 1  
OK  
Note: Ask for current value  
AT+CMUT=0  
Note: Mute OFF (call not active)  
Note: Mute is active (call active)  
+CME ERROR:3  
Note: Command not valid  
Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER  
Description:  
This specific command selects the speaker and the microphone set.  
Values:  
<ActiveSpkMic>  
0
Speaker One, Micro One  
1
Speaker Two, Micro Two  
Syntax:  
AT+SPEAKER=<ActiveSpkMic>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+SPEAKER=0  
OK  
Note: Speaker ONE and Micro ONE  
Note: Command valid  
AT+SPEAKER?  
+SPEAKER: 0  
OK  
Note: Speaker ONE and Micro ONE are active  
AT+SPEAKER=?  
+SPEAKER: (0,1)  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
26  
 
   
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands  
Echo Cancellation +ECHO  
Description:  
This command enables, disables or configures the Echo Cancellation functions for voice calls (in rooms,  
in cars, etc.).  
It is necessary to tune the Microphone gain (AT+VGT) and the Speaker gain (AT+VGR) before  
activating the Echo Cancellation.  
Notes:  
You can activate/deactivate the echo cancellation during a call without resetting the product if  
the <Algold> parameter is not changed, but have to used the syntax with all parameters:  
AT+ECHO=1,6,30,8000,256 for instance.  
To use Echo Cancellation 6, the ECHO feature must be activated.  
Note that Echo Cancellation algorithms may not be available on some modems:  
Modem  
Q24 Plus (AMR)  
Algorithm 6 Support Algorithm 3 Support  
Yes No  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
Deactivate Echo  
Activate Echo  
When mode = 1 is choosen, AlgoId is mandatory.  
<status>  
0
1
2
3
Echo Deactivated  
Echo Activated for Mic/Spk One  
Echo Activated for Mic/Spk Two  
Reset the product  
Note: <Status> does not indicate the currently selected speaker. If Echo is activated, it indicates  
the speaker for which Echo parameters are set. Echo can be activated on a non-selected speaker.  
<AlgoId>  
Echo cancellation 1  
Echo cancellation 6: AEC algorithm  
1
6
Note that Echo Cancellation algorithms may not be available on some modems. Refer to the  
description above.  
Echo Cancellation 1 (4 parameters):  
<Volout> Specifies the maximum attenuation of the switch  
0
31 db (default)  
29 db  
1
2
27 db  
3
25 db  
14  
15  
3 db  
1 db  
<Step> Specifies the attenuation step between attenuation and no attenuation.  
0
1
2
3
1 db  
2 db  
3 db  
4 db (default)  
<PcmThRel> Specifies the relative threshold between max and min energy information.  
The allowed range is [0 - 31]. Default = 10.  
<PcmThMax> Specifies threshold of max energy information.  
The allowed range is [0 - 31]. Default = 7.  
Echo Cancellation 6 (12 parameters):  
<AlgoParam> High value leads to high echo attenuation but the full-duplex quality will be  
less efficient.  
The allowed range is [ 0 - 63 ]. (30 by default)  
<NoiseThres> indicates the noise threshold. Low value leads to high noise attenuation.  
The threshold 32767 indicates no noise attenuation. The allowed range is [0 - 32767].  
The default is 50. The values above 512 have no effect (noise reduction will be disabled)  
<NmbTaps>indicates the Number of Taps of the Adaptive Filter. The allowed range is [2 -  
256].  
The default is 256.  
64 taps = short Echo  
256 taps = long Echo  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
27  
 
 
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands  
<ConvergenceTime1> Convergence time in quiet condition:  
This parameter expresses duration as the number of GSM speech frames (20 ms each)  
containing far end speech, upon which the switch only mechanism must run in quiet  
conditions. The allowed range is [162 - 32767].  
The default is 200.  
<ConvergenceTime2> Convergence time in noise condition:  
This parameter is the same as ConvergenceTime1 but for the noise condition. The  
allowed range is [162 - 32767].  
The default is 550.  
Important Note: <ConvergenceTime2> must be greater than or equal to  
<ConvergenceTime1>  
<NoiseLevelMAX> Upper bound of the noise floor estimate:  
This parameter is expressed as an integer of 16 bits and corresponds to the rounded  
value of the noise floor estimate expressed in dB (log2). The allowed range is  
[NOISE_LEVEL_MIN+1 - 31] with NOISE_LEVEL_MIN being a constant  
(NOISE_LEVEL_MIN=4 in the current implementation).  
The default is 15.  
<DetectionThreshold> Far-end speech detection threshold:  
In order to detect far end speech on the loudspeaker's signal, the SNR is computed  
regarding the far end signal power and the far end signal noise floor level. This parameter  
specifies a threshold on the SNR above which the switch mechanism will be activated.  
This parameter is expressed as an integer of 16 bits and must be in the range [0 - 32767].  
The default is 32767.  
<CNGAdjust> Comfort noise volume gain:  
Although the comfort noise volume will self adjust to the estimated ambient noise level, it  
is possible to artificially reduce its level. This parameter is expressed in fixed point as a  
signed Q15, meaning that 32767 stands for 1.0, and 0 for 0.0. It ranges fro 0 to 32767.  
Setting this value to 0 means no comfort noise.  
The default is 32767.  
<CNGParam1>, <CNGParam2>: 16 bits comfort noise AR2 coefficients:  
The user will set the AR2 coefficients for a specific car. Their value will be estimated on a  
recorded noise sequence by means of a tool provided by Wavecom (C or Matlab source  
code) The recorded sequence shall be made in the noisy conditions and contain noise  
only.  
The allowed range is [0 - 65535].  
The default for CNGParam1 is 27484.  
The default for CNGParam2 is 38697.  
<CNGGain>: 16 bits comfort noise AR2 gain coefficients:  
This specifies the gain of the AR2 filter used for comfort noise generation. It will be  
estimated by the same tools use to estimate <CNGParam1> and <CNGParam2>.  
It is represented as a Q15 of 16 bits. The allowed range is [0 - 32767].  
The default is 7311.  
<SOMValue>: Switch attenuation value at the beginning of the call:  
This parameter will range from 1 to 16 and set the depth of the attenuation of the transmit  
audio signal when speech is detected on the distant side.  
The default is 4.  
<NoiseEstimate>: Value of the noise floor estimate written by the DSP (only in case  
of active communication):  
The allowed range is [0 - 32] when a communication is active. Otherwise, the returned  
value is 65535.  
Notes:  
The field <NoiseEstimate> is present only for Algold 6 and only in the response to  
AT+ECHO?  
When a new algoid is selected, AT+ECHO? returns 3 for the mode. The changes will  
be taken into account after a reset.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
28  
 
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax:  
For Algold=1:  
AT+ECHO=<mode>[,<Algold>[,<VolOut>,<Step>,<PcmThRel>,<PcmThMax>]]  
For Algold=6:  
AT+ECHO=<mode>[,<Algold>[,<AlgoParam>,<NoiseThres>,<NmbTaps>,<ConvergenceTime  
1>,<ConvergenceTime2>,<NoiseLevelMAX>,<DetectionThreshold>,<CNGAdjust>,<CNGPara  
m1>,<CNGParam2>,<CNGGain>,<NmbDelay>]]  
Response Syntax:  
For Algold=1:  
ECHO: <status>,<Algold>,<VolOut>,<Step>,<PcmThRel>,<PcmThMax>  
For Algold=6:  
ECHO: <status>,<Algold>,<AlgoParam>,<NoiseThres>,<NmbTaps>,<ConvergenceTime1>,  
<ConvergenceTime2>,<NoiseLevelMAX>,<DetectionThreshold>,<CNGAdjust>,<CNGParam1  
>,<CNGParam2>,<CNGGain>,<NmbDelay>,<NoiseEstimate>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CMEE=1  
OK  
Note: Enables the use of result code  
AT+SPEAKER?  
+ SPEAKER: 0  
OK  
Note: Speaker ONE and Micro ONE are active  
AT+SIDET=0  
OK  
Note: Deactivate the Sidetone  
AT+SIDET?  
+SIDET: 0,0  
AT+ECHO?  
+ECHO: 0,1,0,6,10,7  
Note: Read current settings  
AT+ECHO=1,1,0,6,10,7  
Note: Active Echo cancellation 1 for Mic/Spk one.  
AT+ECHO?  
OK  
OK  
+ECHO: 1,1,0,3,10,7  
Note: Read current settings  
AT+ECHO=1,6,30,8000,256  
Note: Activate the Echo cancellation 6  
OK  
+CME ERROR: 519  
Note: The new algorithm will be activated after a  
reset of the product  
AT+ECHO?  
+ECHO: 6,30,8000,256  
Note: Read the Echo cancellation settings  
OK  
AT+CFUN=1  
OK  
Note: Reset the product  
AT+ECHO?  
+ECHO: 1,6,30,8000,256  
Note: Read current settings  
OK  
AT+ECHO=0  
OK  
Note: Deactivate the Echo Cancellation  
AT+ECHO=0  
OK  
Note: Deactivate the Echo Cancellation  
AT+ECHO=1,6,30,50,256,200,  
550,15,32767,27484,38697,7311,2  
Note: Activate the Echo Cancellation 6  
AT+ECHO?  
+CME ERROR:519  
Note: The new algorithm will be activated after a  
reset of the product  
+ECHO: 6,30,50,256,200,550,15,32767,32767,  
Note: Read the Echo Cancellation settings  
27484,38697,7311,2,65535  
OK  
AT+CFUN=1  
OK  
Note: Reset the product  
AT+ECHO?  
+ECHO: 1,6,30,50,256,200,550,15,32767,32767,  
Note: Read the Echo Cancellation settings  
27484,38697,7311,2,65535  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
29  
 
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands  
SideTone Modification +SIDET  
Description:  
This command sets the level of audio feedback in the speaker (microphone feedback in the speaker).  
Values:  
<val1>  
0
1
SideTone is disabled  
SideTone is enabled  
<val2> (default value 0 will be used if this parameter is not given)  
0
1
2
3
0 db  
- 6 db  
- 12 db  
- 18 db  
Syntax:  
AT+SIDET=<val1>,<val2>  
Command  
Possible responses  
OK  
AT+SIDET=1,0  
Note: Command valid  
+SIDET: 1,0  
OK  
AT+SIDET?  
Note: Current value  
Note: Command valid  
+SIDET: (0-1),(0-3)  
OK  
AT+SIDET=?  
Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP  
Description:  
This command allows factory settings for voice parameters to be restored from EEPROM.  
These voice parameters include:  
Gain control (+VGR & +VGT commands)  
Gain controller (+WSVG command)  
Microphone mute control (+CMUT command)  
Speaker & Microphone selection (+SPEAKER command)  
Echo cancellation (+ECHO command)  
Side tone modification (+SIDET command)  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<n>  
1
Restore all voice parameters.  
Other values are not supported.  
AT+VIP=<n>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+VIP?  
+VIP: 1  
OK  
AT+VIP=2  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Syntax error  
AT+VIP=1  
OK  
Note: Restore the factory settings from EEPROM  
Note: The command has been executed  
AT+VIP=1  
CME ERROR: 519  
Note: Restore the factory settings from EEPROM  
with the current Echo cancellation algorithm  
(different of the default algorithm).  
AT+VIP=?  
Note: Reset the product to accept the new  
algorithm.  
+VIP: (1)  
OK  
Note: List of supported <n>s  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
30  
 
   
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands  
Chapter 6 – Network Service  
Commands  
Signal Quality +CSQ  
Description:  
Values:  
This command determines the received signal strength indication (<rssi>) and the channel bit error rate  
(<ber>) with or without a SIM card inserted.  
<rssi>:  
0
1
-113 dBm or less  
-111 dBm  
2 to 30 -109 to –53 dBm  
31  
99  
-51dBm or greater  
not known or not detectable  
<ber>:  
0…7:  
99  
as RXQUAL values in the table GSM 05.08  
not known or not detectable  
Syntax:  
AT+CSQ  
Command Possible responses  
AT+CSQ  
+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>  
OK  
(Note: <rssi> and <ber> as defined below)  
Operator Selection +COPS  
Description:  
There are three possible ways of selecting a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) operator:  
The product is in manual mode. It then tries to find the operator specified by the application  
and if found, tries to register.  
The product is in automatic mode. It then tries to find the home operator and if found, tries to  
register. If not found, the product automatically searches for another network.  
The product enters into manual/automatic mode, and then tries to find an operator as  
specified by the application (as in manual mode). If this attempt fails, it enters automatic  
mode. If this is successful, the operator specified by the application is selected. The mobile  
equipment then enters into automatic mode.  
Note: The read command returns the current mode and the currently selected operator. In manual  
mode, this PLMN may not be the one set by the application (as it is in the search phase).  
These commands are not allowed during communication.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
2
3
4
automatic (default value)  
manual  
deregistration; ME will be unregistered until <mode>=0 or 1 is selected.  
set only <format> (for read command AT+COPS?)  
manual / automatic (<oper> shall be present), if manual selection fails, automatic mode is  
entered.  
<format> <format>: format of <oper> field  
0
1
2
long alphanumeric format <oper>  
short alphanumeric format <oper>  
numeric <oper> (default value)  
<stat> Status of operator  
0
1
2
3
unknown  
available  
current  
forbidden  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
31  
 
     
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands  
<oper> Operator identifier (MCC/MNC in numeric format only for operator selection)  
The long alphanumeric format can be up to 16 characters long (see Codes and Values Appendix  
for operator names description, field is “Name”). The short alphanumeric format can be up to 8  
characters long.  
Syntax:  
To force an attempt to select and register on a network, the application must send this command:  
Command Syntax: AT+COPS=<mode>, [<format> [ , <oper> ] ]  
Possible Responses for AT+COPS=<mode>  
Possible Responses  
OK  
Meaning  
Network is selected with full service  
No network service  
+CME ERROR: 30  
+CME ERROR: 32  
+CME ERROR: 3  
+CME ERROR: 4  
+CME ERROR: 527  
+CME ERROR: 528  
+CME ERROR: 529  
+CME ERROR: 546  
+CME ERROR: 547  
Network not allowed – emergency calls only  
Not allowed during communication  
Incorrect parameters  
Please wait, and retry your selection later  
Location update failure – emergency calls only  
Selection failure – emergency calls only  
Emergency call is not allowed without SIM  
Emergency call is allowed without SIM  
Note: The error codes +CME ERROR: 546 and +CME ERROR: 547 are only returned if the SIM is not  
present. The fact that network support emergency call (+CME ERROR: 547) does not imply that  
emergency call without the SIM is working. To find out if it is working is to use the ATD112 command.  
Response Syntax for AT+COPS?:  
+COPS: <mode> [, <format>, <oper> ]  
Response Syntax for AT+COPS=?: +COPS: [list of supported (<stat>, long alphanumeric <oper>,  
short alphanumeric <oper>s, numeric <oper>) s]  
Notes:  
If an incoming call occurs during a PLMN list request, the operation is aborted  
(+CME ERROR: 520) and the unsolicited RING appears.  
If SPN (Service Provider Name) is present in the SIM, it will be returned in both long and short  
alphanumeric <oper> fields. The string in the “short” field will be the SPN truncated to the  
appropriate character number.  
The following operations are allowed with the SIM inserted or the PIN activated:  
AT+COPS?  
AT+COPS=?  
Get Current PLMN  
List allowed PLMN  
AT+COPS=1,2,<plmn> Manually set current PLMN  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+COPS?  
+COPS: 0,2,20801  
Note: Ask for current PLMN  
OK  
Note: Home PLMN is France Telecom Orange  
+COPS: (2,”F SFR”,”SFR”,”20801”), (3,”F-BOUYGUES  
TELECOM”,”BYTEL”,”20820”),(3,”Orange  
F”,”Orange”,”20801”  
AT+COPS=?  
Note: Ask for PLMN list  
OK  
Note: Home PLMN is France Telecom SFR, BYTEL and  
Orange networks have been detected  
+CME ERROR: 32  
AT+COPS=1,2,20810  
Note: Ask for registration on SFR network  
Note: Network not allowed – emergency calls only  
AT+COPS=1,2,23433  
+CME ERROR: 529  
Note: Ask for registration on UK Orange  
network  
Note: Selection failed – emergency calls only  
AT+COPS=0  
OK  
Note: Ask for registration in automatic mode Note: Succeeded  
AT+COPS=3,0  
OK  
Note: Set <format> to long alphanumeric  
AT+COPS?  
+COPS: 0,0,”Orange F”  
OK  
Note: Ask for current PLMN  
AT+COPS=2  
Note: Home PLMN is France Telecom Orange  
OK  
Note: Ask for deregistration from network  
Note: Succeeded  
AT+COPS?  
+COPS: 2  
Note: Ask for current PLMN  
Note: ME is unregistered until <mode>=0 or 1 is selected  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
32  
 
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands  
Network Registration +CREG  
Description:  
This command is used by the application to ascertain the registration status of the product.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
2
Disable network registration unsolicited result code (default)  
Enable network registration code result code +CREG: <stat>  
Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code +CREG:  
<stat>,<lac>,<ci> if there is a change of network cell.  
<stat>  
0
1
2
3
4
5
Not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new operator.  
Registered, home network.  
Not registered, ME currently searching for a new operator to register to.  
Registration denied.  
Unknown.  
Registered, roaming.  
<lac>: String type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g., “00C3” equals 195 in  
decimal).  
<ci>: String type; two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CREG= <mode>  
Response syntax: +CREG: <mode>, <stat> [ ,<lac>,<ci> ] for AT+CREG? Command only  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CREG?  
+CREG: <mode>,<stat>  
OK  
Note: As defined here-above  
AT+CREG=0  
OK  
Note: Disable network registration unsolicited result code Note: Command valid  
AT+CREG=1 OK  
Note: Enable network registration unsolicited result code Note: Command valid  
AT+CREG=2  
OK  
Note: Enable network registration and location  
information unsolicited result code  
AT+CREG=?  
Note: Command valid  
+CREG: (0-2)  
Note: 0,1,2 <mode> values are supported  
Operator List Management +WOLM  
Description:  
This command allows a new or modified operator to be added to the PLMN list. Up to 10 PLMNs can be  
created and stored in the flash memory.  
Please note that if two entries with the same network (MCC+MNC), but have different names, are  
entered, the first entry will be used.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
2
Delete  
Write  
Read  
<loc>  
Location. If this parameter is not filled with <mode>=1, the location will be the first emply one.  
<NumOper>  
Operator in numeric format.  
<short name>  
The short name of the PLMN.  
<long name>  
The long name of the PLMN.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
33  
 
   
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+WOLM=<mode>,<loc>,[,<NumOper>,<short name>,<long name>  
Response Syntax for AT+WOLM=? OK  
Response Syntax for AT+WOLM?  
(lists all the available PLMN)  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WOLM=1,1,20812,”WM”,”WM PLMN”  
Note: Add a new PLMN at location 1  
AT+WOLM=2,1  
OK  
+WOLM: 1,20812,”WM”,”WM PLMN”  
Note: Read the PLMN at location 1  
OK  
AT+WOLM=2,11  
+CME ERROR: 21  
Note: Read the PLMN at location 11  
AT+WOLM=1,1,20812,”WM1”,”WM1 PLMN”  
Note: Modify and existing PLMN  
AT+WOLM=?  
Note: Invalid index  
OK  
Done  
OK  
Note: Test command  
AT+WOLM?  
+WOLM: 1,20812,”WM1”,”WM1 PLMN”  
Note: Display current list  
OK  
Note: List the created PLMN in flash  
AT+WOLM=1,,20813,”PLMN2”,PLMN2 LONG”  
Note: Add a new PLMN at available location  
OK  
Or  
+CME ERROR: 20  
Note: Error returns if no more PLMN can be created  
AT+WOLM=0,1  
OK  
Note: Delete an entry at location 1  
AT+WOLM=0,11  
Note: Delete an entry at location 11  
+CME ERROR: 21  
Note: Invalid index  
Read Operator Name +WOPN  
Description:  
This command returns the operator name in alphanumeric format when given the numeric format being  
given.  
With the E-ONS (Enhanced Operator Name Service) feature, <lac> is an optional parameter to read  
names from OPL/PNN sim files. If it is not entered, name will be given with current <lac>. Note that in  
limited service, current <lac> is set to 0.  
It also allows the erasing of NITZ PLMN names stored in the flash memory by using AT+WOPN=3,0”.  
When the modem receives a NITZ (Network Information and Time Zone) message with Long Name or  
Short Name information, an entry with registered PLMN and names in the message is created in the  
flash memory. These names will then be used with +COPS, +COPN, +WOPN and +CPOL with the  
priority order defined in 3GPP TS 22.101. The modem supports only network names with the GSM  
default alphabet coding schemes.  
The user can choose which of the following methods will be used for getting PLMN names using the  
command: AT+WOPN=4,<PlmnOns>.  
The priority order is:  
1
2
E-ONS  
CPHS  
First entry if on Home PLMN or matching entry if existing in OPL/PNN SIM files.  
If on Home PLMN, use SIM file CPHS ONS (0x6F14) for Long Name if present and SIM  
file CPHS SONS (0x6F18) for Short Name if present; if not present, reuse SIM file  
CPHS ONS.  
3
4
SPN  
NITZ  
If on Home PLMN, use SIM file SPN (0x6F46) if present.  
If there is a matching entry in the list of names received so far, use it. Note that in  
France, for example, all the operators use the NITZ message for the Date and Time  
feature, but not for PLMN names, so the list is always empty. In France, the NITZ  
message is sent on a GPRS attachment.  
FLASH  
If there is a matching entry in the flash PLMN list (created by +WOLM), use it.  
5
ROM  
PLMN names in the ROM defined according to MoU SE.13 and NAPRD Operator  
Names documents.  
Note:  
Once a long name is found following this priority order, it is given as a response to the  
AT command.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
34  
 
 
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
2
3
4
Use long alphanumeric format  
Use short alphanumeric format  
Reserved for future use  
Erase NITZ PLMN list if <NumOper> = 0  
Access to EEPROM to read or write the method to use for getting PLMN names  
Read access if <NumOper> omitted  
Write access if <NumOper>(=<PlmnOns>) provided.  
<NumOper> is the operator in numeric format.  
<AlphaOper> is the operator in long or short alphanumeric format (see Codes and Values for Operator  
Names in the Appendix).  
<lac> is the two byte Location Area Code to be used to get the PLMN name. If it is not entered, the  
current lac will be used (0 if limited service). It is provided as an integer value.  
<PlmnOns> is a bit-field with the following coding:  
Bit 0  
Bit 1  
Bit 2  
Bit 3  
Bit 4  
E-ONS  
CPHS  
SPN  
NITZ  
FLASH  
Bit 4 (FLASH) Bit 3 (NITZ)  
Bit 2 (SPN) Bit 1 (CPHS)  
Bit 0 (E-ONS)  
Bit value is 1 for Activate and 0 for Deactivate the method. <PlmnOns> value should be provided  
as a decimal value.  
1
1
1
1
1
Example: <PlmnOns>=31 means that the four methods will be used for PLMN names (bit-field  
value is 1111 or 0x1F).  
Operation Flow for Field PlmnOns  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
35  
 
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WOPN=<format>,<NumOper>[,<lac>]  
Response syntax: +WOPN: <format>,<AlphaOper>  
Command  
AT+WOPN=?  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: Test command  
AT+WOPN=0,20801  
Note: Give an operator in numeric format  
+WOPN: 0,”Orange F”  
OK  
Note: Alphanumeric answer  
+CME ERROR: 22  
Note: Not found  
AT+WOPN=0,99999  
Note: Give a wrong operator  
AT+WOPN=0,2081,36  
+WOPN: 0, “OrangeF”  
Note: Give an operator in numeric format for lac 36 OK  
Note: Alphanumeric answer  
OK  
AT+WOPN=3,0  
Note: Erase NITZ PLMN names stored in flash  
memory.  
AT+WOPN=4  
Note: Read from EEPROM which method will be  
used for PLMN names.  
+WOPN:31  
OK  
AT+WOPN=4,<PlmnOns>  
Note: Write to EEPROM which method will be used  
for PLMN names.  
OK  
Selection of Preferred PLMN List +CPLS  
Description:  
This command selects one PLMN selector with access technology list in the SIM card that is used by  
AT+CPOL command.  
Values:  
<List>:  
0
User controlled PLMN selector with access technology EF_PLMNwAct  
Note: if this file is not found EF_PLMNSel will be selected  
1
2
Operator controlled PLMN selector with access technology EF_OPLMNwAct  
Home PLMN selector with access technology EF_HPLMNwAct  
Syntax:  
AT+CPLS= <List>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPLS?  
+CPLS: 1  
OK  
Note: Ask for selection of the SIM file Note: EF_OPLMNwAct is selected  
AT+CPLS=0  
Note: if EF_PLMNwAct is not present, EF_PLMNsel will be  
Note: selection of EF_PLMNwAct  
selected  
AT+CPLS=1  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: selection of EF_OPLMNwAct  
AT+CPLS=?  
Note: EF_OPLMNwAct is not present  
+CPLS: (0,1,2)  
Note: Get possible values  
OK  
Note: The 3 files with Acces technology are present and can  
be selected  
AT+CPLS=?  
+CPLS: (0)  
OK  
Note: Get possible values  
Note: Only EF_PLMNwAct or EF_PLMNsel can be selected  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
36  
 
 
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands  
Preferred Operator List +CPOL  
Description:  
This command edits (or updates) the SIM preferred list of networks.  
This list is read in the SIM file selected by the command AT+CPLS.  
Values:  
<index>: position of the operator record in the Sim preferred operator list. Use AT+CPOL=? to view the  
maximum index of the selected EF.  
<format>  
0
1
2
long alphanumeric format for <oper>  
short alphanumeric format for <oper>  
numeric format for <oper>  
<oper>: characterstring or integer (see <format>) indicating operator identifier.  
<GSM_AcT>: GSM access technology  
<GSMcomp_Act>: GSM compact access technology  
<Utran_Act>: UTRA access technology  
0
1
access technology not selected  
access technology selected  
Syntax:  
AT+CPOL= [<index>] [,<format>[,<oper>[,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcomp_Act>,<Utran_Act>]]]  
The different possibilities are:  
AT+CPOL = <index> to delete an entry.  
AT+CPOL = , <format> to set the format used by the read command (AT+CPOL?).  
AT+CPOL = , <format>, <oper> to put <oper> in the next free location.  
AT+CPOL = <index> , <format> , <oper> to write <oper> in the <format> at the <index>.  
AT+CPOL = <index>,<format>,<oper>,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcp_Act>,<Utran_Act>  
To write <oper> in the <format> at the <index> precising the access technology (in the case of  
EF_PLMNwact, EF_HPLMNwact or EF_OPLMNwact is present).  
Note: Per default if Acces technology parameters are not given, the GSM access technology will be  
chosen.  
The supported format are those of the +COPS command.  
The length of this list is limited to 85 entries for EF_PLMNsel, and 51 for EF_PLMNwAct,  
EF_OPLMNwAct, EF_HPLMNwAct.  
(See table on next page)  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
37  
 
 
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands  
Command  
AT+CPOL?  
Possible responses  
+CPOL:1,2,26201  
+CPOL: 6,2,20810  
OK  
Note: Preferred list of networks in numeric format (read in  
EF_PLMNsel)  
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks  
With only EF_PLMNsel present  
AT+CPOL?  
+CPOL:1,2,26201,1,0,0  
+CPOL: 6,2,20810,1,0,0  
OK  
Note: Preferred list of networks in numeric format (read in  
EF_PLMNwAct)  
GSM acces technology selected  
GSM compact acces technology not selected  
Utran acces technology not selected  
OK  
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks  
With EF_PLMNwAct selected and present  
AT+CPOL=,0  
Note: Select long alphanumeric format  
AT+CPOL?  
+CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”  
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”  
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks  
With only EF_PLMNsel present  
AT+CPOL=7,2,20801  
OK  
Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format  
OK  
Note: Add a network to the list  
AT+CPOL?  
+CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”  
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”  
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks  
With only EF_PLMNsel present  
+CPOL: 7,0,”Orange F”  
OK  
Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format  
AT+CPOL=7  
OK  
Note: Delete 7th location  
AT+CPOL?  
+CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”  
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”  
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks  
With only EF_PLMNsel present  
AT+CPOL=8,2,77777  
OK  
Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format  
OK  
Note: Add a new network to the list  
With only EF_PLMNsel present  
AT+CPOL=8,2,77777,0,0,1  
Note: Add a new network to the list  
With EF_PLMNwact present  
AT+CPOL=8,2,77777  
OK  
Note: Acces technology UTRAN is selected  
OK  
Note: Add a new network to the list  
With EF_PLMNwact present  
AT+CPOL?  
Note: Per default Acces technology GSM is selected  
+CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”  
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”  
+CPOL: 8,2,77777”  
OK  
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks  
With only EF_PLMNsel present  
AT+CPOL=9,0,”Orange F”  
Note: Preferred networks list in long alphanumeric format; 8th  
entry is unknown so the product edits it in the numeric format  
Note: Add a new network to the list (text format)  
AT+CPOL?  
+CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”  
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”  
+CPOL: 8,2,77777”  
+CPOL: 9,0,”Orange F”  
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks  
With only EF_PLMNsel present  
AT+CPOL=?  
OK  
Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format  
+CPOL: (1-16),(0-2)  
OK  
Note: The EF can accept 16 records. Supported formats are  
0, 1, or 2.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
38  
 
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands  
Read Operator Name +COPN  
Description:  
This command returns the list of all operator names (in numeric and alphanumeric format) stored in the  
module.  
Values:  
<NumOper>: is the operator in numeric format  
<AlphaOper>: is the operator in long alphanumeric format  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+COPN  
Response Syntax: +COPN: <NumOper>,<AlphaOper>  
Command  
AT+COPN  
Possible responses  
+COPN: 23201,”A1”  
+COPN: 23203,”Amax.”  
+COPN: 23207,”A tele.ring”  
+COPN: 23205,”one”  
Note: Ask for list of operators  
OK  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
OK  
AT+COPN=?  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
39  
 
 
Chapter 7 – Security Commands  
Chapter 7 – Security  
Commands  
Enter PIN +CPIN  
Description:  
This command enters the ME passwords (CHV1 / CHV2 / PUK1 / PUK2, etc.), that are required before  
any ME functionality can be used. CHV1/CHV2 is between 4 and 8 digits long, PUK1/PUK2 is only 8  
digits long.  
If the user application tries to make an outgoing call before the SIM PIN code (CHV1) has been  
confirmed, then the product will refuse the “ATD” command with a “+CME ERROR: 11” (SIM PIN  
required).  
The application is responsible for checking the PIN after each reset or power on - if the PIN was  
enabled.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<pin> is the Personal Identification Number. A four-digit number.  
<puk> is the Personal Unblocking Key needed to change the PIN. An eight-digit number.  
AT+CPIN=<pin>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPIN=1234  
Note: Enter PIN  
AT+CPIN=5678  
Note: Enter PIN  
OK  
Note: PIN code is correct  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Operation not allowed, PIN previously entered  
After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the PIN (Personal Identification Number), the PUK (Personal  
Unblocking Key) will be required.  
PUK validation forces the user to enter a new PIN code as a second parameter and this will be the new  
PIN code if PUK validation succeeds. CHV1 is then enabled if PUK1 is correct. The application  
therefore uses this command:  
AT+CPIN=<Puk>,<NewPin>  
Command  
Possible responses  
+CME ERROR: 16  
Note: Incorrect PUK  
OK  
AT+CPIN=00000000,1234  
Note: Enter PUK and new PIN  
AT+CPIN=12345678,1234  
Note: Enter PUK and new PIN, 2nd attempt  
Note: PUK correct, new PIN stored  
To determine which code must be entered (or not), the following query command can be used:  
AT+CPIN? The possible responses are:  
+CPIN: READY  
+CPIN: SIM PIN  
ME is not pending for any password  
CHV1 is required  
+CPIN: SIM PUK  
+CPIN: SIM PIN2  
+CPIN: SIM PUK2  
+CPIN: PH-SIM PIN  
+CPIN: PH-NET PIN  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
PUK1 is required  
CHV2 is required  
PUK2 is required  
SIM lock (phone-to-SIM) is required  
Network personnalisation is required  
SIM failure (13) absent (10) etc.  
Please note that in this case the mobile equipment does not end its response with the OK string.  
The response +CME ERROR: 13 (SIM failure) is returned after 10 unsuccessful PUK attempts. The SIM  
card is then out of order and must be replaced by a new one.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
40  
 
   
Chapter 7 – Security Commands  
Example:  
Three failed PIN validations + one successful PUK validation  
AT+CPIN?  
Read the PIN status  
+CPIN: SIM PIN  
The product requires SIM PIN  
AT+CPIN=1235  
+CME ERROR: 16  
First attempt to enter a SIM PIN  
Wrong PIN  
AT+CPIN=1236  
+CME ERROR: 16  
Second attempt  
Wrong PIN  
AT+CPIN=1237  
+CME ERROR: 16  
Third attempt  
Wrong PIN  
AT+CPIN?  
Read PIN state  
+CPIN: SIM PUK  
The product requires PUK  
AT+CPIN=99999999,5678  
OK  
The PUK is entered, the new PIN shall be 5678 PUK validation is OK. New Pin  
is 5678  
AT+CPIN?  
+CPIN: READY  
Read PIN state  
The product is ready  
If the user tries to do something which requires PIN2 (CHV2), the product will refuse the action with a “+CME  
ERROR: 17” (SIM PIN2 required). The product then waits for SIM PIN2 to be given.  
Of course, if SIM PIN2 is blocked, SIM PUK2 is required instead of SIM PIN2.  
For example, the product needs PIN2 to write in the fixed dialing phonebook (FDN) , so if SIM PIN2 authentication  
has not been performed during the current session, SIM PIN2 is required  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPBS=”FD”  
OK  
Note: Choose FDN  
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”  
Note: Write in FDN at location 5  
AT+CPIN?  
+CME ERROR: 17  
Note: SIM PIN2 is required  
SIM PIN2  
Note: SIM PIN2 is required  
AT+CPIN=5678  
OK  
Note: Enter SIM PIN2  
AT+CPBW=2,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”  
Note: Write in FDN at location 5  
OK  
Note: Now writing in FDN is allowed  
Please note that the product only requests PIN2 or PUK2 once. Therefore, if they are not entered properly, the next  
+CPIN? command will return “+CPIN: READY”.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
41  
 
Chapter 7 – Security Commands  
Enter PIN2 +CPIN2  
Description:  
This command validates the PIN2 code (CHV2) or the PUK2 code (UNBLOCK CHV2) and defines a  
new PIN2 code.  
Of course, the +CPIN command allows PIN2 or PUK2 codes to be validated, but only when the last  
command executed resulted in PIN2 authentication failure.  
PIN2 length is between 4 and 8 digits; PUK2 length is 8 digits only.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<pin2> is the personal identification number 2  
<puk2> is the personal unblocking key 2 needed to change the PIN 2  
<newpin2>  
Note: PIN2 length is between 4 and 8 digits; PUK2 length is 8 digits only.  
AT+CPIN2=<pin2>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPIN2=1234 OK  
Note: Enter PIN2 Note: PIN2 code is correct  
AT+CPIN2=5678 +CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Enter PIN2 Note: Operation not allowed, PIN2 previously entered  
After 3 unsuccessful attempts, PUK2 will be required. PUK2 validation forces the user to enter a new PIN2  
code as a second parameter and this will be the new PIN2 code if PUK1 validation succeeds. The  
application uses this command:  
AT+CPIN2=<puk2>,<NewPin2>  
Command  
Possible responses  
+CME ERROR: 16  
Note: Incorrect Password (PUK2)  
AT+CPIN2=00000000,1234  
Note: Enter PUK2 and new PIN2  
AT+CPIN2=12345678,1234  
Note: Enter PUK2 and new PIN2, 2nd attempt  
OK  
Note: PUK2 correct, new PIN2 stored  
To determine which code must be entered (or not), the following query command can be used:  
AT+CPIN2?  
The possible responses are:  
+CPIN2: READY  
No PIN2 is needed  
PIN2 is required  
PUK2 is required  
Absent (10) etc…  
+CPIN2: SIM PIN2  
+CPIN2: SIM PUK2  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
PIN Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC  
Description:  
This command gets the number of valid attempts for PIN1 (CHV1), PIN2 (CHV2), PUK1 (UNBLOCK  
CHV1) and PUK2 (UNBLOCK CHV2) identifiers.  
Values  
<n1>, <n2> are the attempts left for PIN1, PIN2 (0 = blocked, 3 max)  
<k1>, <k2> are the attempts left for PUK1, PUK2 (0 = blocked, 10 max)  
For this to work, the card should be present at the time of initialization; otherwise, an error will be sent  
(+CME ERROR: 10).  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax:  
AT+CPINC  
Response syntax: +CPINC: <n1>,<n2>,<k1>,<k2>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPINC  
+CPINC: 2,3,10,10  
Note: Get the number of attempts left  
OK  
Note: First CHV1 attempt was a failure  
AT+CPINC?  
+CPINC: 2,3,10,10  
Note: Get current values  
OK  
Note: First attempt was a failure  
AT+CPINC=?  
OK  
Note: Get possible values  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
42  
 
   
Chapter 7 – Security Commands  
Facility Lock +CLCK  
Description:  
This command locks, unlocks or interrogates an ME or network facility <fac>.  
Note: Test SIM cards (with MCC=001 & MNC=01) do not check “PS”, “PN”, “PU”, “PP” and “PC” locks.  
Values:  
<fac> supported facilities:  
“PS”: SIM lock facility with an 8-digit password.  
“SC“: PIN enabled (<mode> = 1) / disabled (<mode> = 0)  
“AO”: BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls)  
“OI”: BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls)  
“OX”: BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing. International Calls except to Home Country)  
“AI”: BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls)  
“IR”: BIC-Roam (Barr Inc. When Roaming outside Home Country)  
“AB”: All Barring services  
“AG”: All outGoing barring services  
“AC”: All inComing barring services  
“PN”: Network lock with an 8-digit password (NCK).  
“PU”: Network Subset lock with an 8-digit password (NSCK).  
“PP”: Service Provider lock with an 8-digit password (SPCK).  
“PC”: Corporate lock with an 8-digit password (CCK).  
“FD”: SIM Fixed Dialing Numbers (FDN) memory feature (PIN2 is required as <password>)  
<mode>  
0 unlock the facility  
1 lock the facility  
2 query status  
<class> A facility status can be changed for only one class, or for all classes (7 or omitted).  
1 Voice (telephony)  
2
Data (apply to all bearer services)  
4 Fax (facsimile services)  
8 Short Message service  
7 Equal to all classes (Default value)  
Any attempt to combine different classes will result in activation / deactivation / interrogation of Voice  
and Data.  
If <class> is omitted, the default value 7 will be used.  
Password maximum length is given with the AT+CPWD=? Command.  
Note:  
It will not possible to lock the FDN phonebook if this one is not loaded.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+CLCK= <fac>,<mode>[,<passwd>[,<class>] ]  
Response syntax: +CLCK: <status> [ ,<class1> ]<CR><LF>+CLCK: <status>,<class2> [ … ] ]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CLCK=”SC”,1,1234  
Note: Enable PIN  
AT+CLCK?  
OK  
Note: PIN was correct  
+CLCK:(“PS”,0),(“SC”,0),(“FD”,0),(“PN“,0),(“PU“,0),(“PP“,0),(“PC“,0)  
Note: Read PIN status  
OK  
Note: PIN is enabled, no SIM lock, no network lock, no information  
on Call barring (no longer supported in GSM Technical  
Specification 07.07)  
AT+CLCK=”SC”,0,5555  
Note: Disable PIN  
+CME ERROR: 16  
Note: PIN was wrong  
AT+CPIN=1234  
OK  
Note: Enter PIN  
Note: PIN was good  
AT+CLCK=?  
Note: Request supported  
facilities  
+CLCK: (“PS”,”SC”,”AO”,”OI”,”OX”,”AI”,”IR”,”AB”,”AC”,  
”FD”,"PN","PU","PP",”PN”)  
OK  
Note: Supported facilities  
AT+CLCK=”PN”,1,12345678  
Note: Activate network lock  
AR+CLCK=”AO”,1,1234,2  
OK  
Network lock activated  
OK  
Note: Activate all outgoing calls Note: Call barring is activate  
except data calls  
AT+CLCK=”AO”,2  
+CLCK: 1,2  
OK  
+CME ERROR: 521  
Note: Query BAOC status  
AT+CLCK=”SC”,0,0000  
Note: Disable PIN  
Note: BAOC activate for data calls only  
Note: PIN deactivation is forbidden with this SIM card  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
43  
 
 
Chapter 7 – Security Commands  
Change Password +CPWD  
Description:  
This command changes a password (PIN, call barring, NCK, etc.). The facility values (<fac>) are the  
same as for the +CLCK command with a “P2” facility to manage SIM PIN2.  
For the network lock (“PN”), unlocking is forbidden after 10 failed attempts to disable (unlock) the  
network lock with an incorrect password.  
Values:  
<fac> supported facilities:  
“PS”: SIM lock facility with an 8-digit password.  
“SC“: PIN enabled (<mode> = 1) / disabled (<mode> = 0)  
“AO”: BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls)  
“OI” : BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls)  
“OX”: BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing. International Calls except to Home Country)  
“AI” : BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls)  
“IR” : BIC-Roam (Barr Inc. When Roaming outside Home Country)  
“AB”: All Barring services  
“AG”: All outGoing barring services  
“AC”: All inComing barring services  
“P2”:  
“FD”: SIM Fixed Dialing Numbers (FDN) memory feature (PIN2 is required as <password>)  
“N”  
“U”  
“P”  
“C”  
<oldpwd>,<newpwd> 4 or up to 8 or 16 digits according to the facility.  
Syntax:  
AT+CPWD= <fac>, <oldpwd>, <newpwd>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPWD=?  
+CPWD: (“PS”,8),(“SC”,8),(“AO”,4),(“OI”,4),(“OX”,4),  
Note: Possible values  
(“AI”,4),(“IR,4),(“AB”,4),(“AG”,4),(“AC”,4),  
(“P2”,8),(“FD”,8),("PN",8),("PU",8),("PP",8), ("PC",8)  
OK  
Note: CHV1/CHV2 must be on 8 digits maximum  
(4minimum)  
For call barring, on 4 digits maximum  
AT+CPWD=”SC”,1234,5555  
Note: Change PIN  
AT+CPWD=”SC”,1234,5555  
Note: Change PIN  
OK  
Note: PIN was correct  
+CME ERROR: 16  
Note: PIN was wrong  
OK  
AT+CPIN=5555  
Note: Enter PIN  
Note: PIN was correct  
AT+CPWD=”PN”,12345678,00000000 OK  
Note: Change NCK Note: NCK changed for net lock  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
44  
 
 
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
Chapter 8 – Phonebook  
Commands  
Introduction to Phonebook Commands  
A phonebook group can hold up to 100 entries. These entries can come from different phonebooks (SIM and/or Flash  
phonebook).  
When a SIM is inserted, the phonebook selected by default is set by the command +CPBS.  
About the Parameters  
SIM Contact Structure  
<num_Home>  
Home phone number  
Name  
<Name>  
Extended SIM Contact Structure  
<num_Home>  
Home phone number  
<Name>  
Name  
<Phb_Group>  
Phonebook group  
This structure can be used to write and read contacts in mode extended (+WCOS=1) and with ADN phonebook  
selected (+CPBS=”SM”).  
Extended Contact Structure  
<num_Home>  
Home phone number  
<Name>  
Name  
<num_Mobile>  
<num_Work>  
<num_Data>  
<Email>  
Mobile phone number  
Work phone number  
Data phone number  
E-Mail address  
<Address>  
Postal address  
<Phb_Group>  
Phonebook group  
The structure including <num_Mobile>,  
<num_Work>, <num_Data>, <Email>, and <Address> will be  
represented by <Contact> in the rest of the document.  
Phonebook Groups Parameter Definition  
<index>  
Group index  
<name>  
Group name  
<phb_entry_index>  
<restrict call>  
Phonebook entry index  
Restrict call mode for incoming calls  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
45  
 
     
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
Select Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS  
Description:  
This command selects phonebook memory storage.  
Note on ADN and FDN activation: When FDN has been activated with the +CLCK command, the  
selection of ADN phonebook is possible only if ADN staus bit3 is set to 1 (EF file “is readable and can  
be updated when invalidated”). Please refer to Recommendation 3GPP 11.11 for more details.  
Note: The previously selected phonebook remains the same when the modem is switched on or reset,  
even if the new SIM card is inserted. However, in the case when the replacemnet SIM card does not  
contain any slected phonebook, the ADN phonebook is selected.  
Values:  
<pb> Phonebook  
“SM”  
“FD”  
“ON”  
“EN”  
“LD”  
“MC”  
“ME”  
“MT”  
“RC”  
“SN”  
ADN Abbreviated Dialing Numbers (SIM phonebook)  
FDN Fixed Dialing Numbers (SIM restricted phonebook)  
MSISDN (SIM own numbers)  
ECC Emergency Call Codes (SIM or Mobile Equipment)  
LND Last Number Dial  
Mobile Equipment missed (unanswered received) calls list  
Mobile Equipment phonebook  
Combined Moblile Equipment and SIM phonebook (ME + SM)  
Mobile Equipment received calls list  
SDN Services Dialing Numbers (SIM special service numbers)  
Notes: “EN” will be available even if ECC SIM file is not present.  
When the SIM is not present, the following emergency numbers are available:  
000, 08, 112, 110, 118, 119, 911, 999  
When the SIM is present, the following emergency numbers are available:  
112, 911, emergency number from ECC SIM files (if existing)  
<pin2> Personal Identification Number 2  
Notes: The following emergency numbers are stored in E2P:  
112, 911, 999, 08  
<EN> will be available even if ECC SIM file is not present.  
Maximum Entries: The maximum number of entries for the Mobile Equipment phonebook is 500.  
Syntax:  
AT+CPBS=<pb>[,<pin2>]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPBS=”SM”  
OK  
Note: Select ADN phonebook Note: ADN phonebook is selected  
AT+CPBS=?  
+CPBS: ("SM","LD","MC","ON","ME","RC","MT","SN","EN”)  
Note: Possible values  
OK  
Note: only “EN” phonebook is not supported with this SIM card.  
AT+CPBS?  
Note: Status  
+CPBS:”SM”,10,20  
OK  
Note: ADN phonebook selected, 10 locations used, 20 locations  
available  
Selection of the ADN phonebook when FDN is active is SIM dependent.  
Selection of the “FD” phonebook with <pin2>, when <pin2> is already verified, will give the error:  
CME ERROR:3  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
46  
 
 
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR  
Description:  
This command returns phonebook entries for a range of locations from the current phonebook memory  
storage selected with +CPBS.  
Note:  
For all phonebook read commands (+CPBR, +CPBF, +CPBN, +CPBP, +CNUM), the  
TON/NPI MSB of each number is set to 1 (ex: a TON/NPI stored as 17 is displayed as 145).  
If the AT+WCOS =1 command has been used, the response will include <Contact> structure.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<first_entry>,<last_entry> Location or range of locations of the phonebook entry or entries.  
<type (TON/NP)> Type of address byte in integer format. Value is 145 if the dialing string (<number>  
response value) includes the international access code character + ; otherwise, the  
value is 129.  
Command Syntx: AT+CPBR  
Response Syntax:  
The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0  
<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>  
[<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[...]]  
The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1  
<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>  
[<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>[...]]  
The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook and AT+WCOS=0  
<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>  
[<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[...]]  
The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook and AT+WCOS=1  
<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>,<Phb_group>  
[<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>, <Phb_group>[...]]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPBR=?  
+CPBR: (1-50),20,10  
Note: Test command  
OK  
Note: 50 locations (from 1 to 50), max length for phone number is 20  
digits, 10 characters max for the text  
AT+WCOS?  
+WCOS: 0  
Note: Test command  
OK  
Note: Contact not selected  
AT+CPBR=12,14  
+CPBR: 12,”112”,129,”Emergency”  
Note: Read entries from 12 +CPBR: 13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”  
to 14  
+CPBR: 14,”0146290808”,129,”Zazi”  
OK  
Note: Display locations 12,13,14 with location, number, type  
(TON/NPI), Text  
AT+CPBR=10  
Note: Read entry 10  
+CPBR:10,”0146290921”,129,”Rob”  
OK  
Note: Display location 10  
AT+CPBR=11  
+CPBR:11,”0146290921”,129,”8000010002FFFF”  
Note: Read entry 11 (UCS2 OK  
format)  
Note: Display location 11  
AT+CPBR=52  
+CME ERROR: 21  
Note: Read entry 52 (wrong) Note: Invalid index  
AT+CPBS=”ME”  
Note: Flash memory  
AT+WCOS=1  
OK  
OK  
Note: Contact selected  
AT+CPBR=13  
Note: Read entry  
+CPBR:13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,  
”0141284549”, 129, “0600003210”, 129, ”0141280000”, 129,  
“019876543210”, 129,  
fred@mail_address.com, “Becker Street London”,1  
OK  
Note: Display locations 13 with location, number, type (TON/NPI), Text  
and Contact and Phonebook Group n1  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
47  
 
 
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
CPBR Command Table Continued  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPBS=”SM”  
Note: ADN phonebook  
AT+CPBR=1  
OK  
+CPBR=1,”0123456”,129,”test”  
OK  
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456”,,  
”test”,1  
OK  
Note: Add an external entry  
in the SIM with group  
number (1)  
AT+CPBR=1  
+CPBR=1”0123456”,129,”test”,1  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
48  
 
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW  
Description:  
This command writes a phonebook entry in location number <index> in the current phonebook memory  
storage.  
Notes:  
“RC” and “MC” phonebooks could be erased only by +CPBW. Adding a field and/or modifying a  
field is not allowed for these phonebooks.  
This command is not allowed for “EN”, “LD”, “MC”, “RC”, “MT”, and “SN” phonebooks (they  
cannot be written).  
If the AT+WCOS=1 command was used, the request would include the “Contact” structure.  
Values:  
<index>  
<number>  
<type>  
Integer type value depending on the capacity of the phonebook memory.  
Phone number in ASCII format.  
TON/NPI (Type of address octet in integer format).  
Note: The value is 145 if the dialing string (<number> response value) includes the  
international access code character +; otherwise, the value is 129 (Example: a <type>  
value of 17 will be written as 145).  
<text>  
String type. Maximum length of <text> field is:  
For the Mobile Equipment phonebook, 30 ASCII characters.  
For the ADN phonebook, SIM dependent (use AT+CPBW=?)  
Notes:  
For the <text> parameter all strings starting with “80”, “81” or “81” are  
considered in UCS2 format.  
The +CSCS (Select Character Set) command does not affect the format for  
phonebook entries.  
Contact structure.  
<contact>  
<Phb_Group> Phonebook group number in which the entry should be saved.  
The range is 1 to 10. If the entry must not be saved in a group, <Phb_Group> = 0 or  
can be omitted.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax:  
For ADN phonebook with AT+WCOS=0  
AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>]]]  
For ADN phonebook with AT+WCOS=1  
AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text> [,Phb_group>]]]]  
For the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=0  
AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>]]]  
For the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=1  
AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text> [<contact> [,Phb_group>]]]]]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPBS=”SM”  
OK  
Note: ADN phonebook  
AT+CPBS?  
+CPBS:”SM”,1,10  
Note: Which phonebook is selected  
OK  
Note: ADN phonebook is selected, 1 location is  
used and 10 locations are available.  
OK  
AT+WCOS=0  
Note: phonebook not extended  
AT+CPBW=?  
Note: Test command  
+CPBW: (1-50),20,(129,145),10  
OK  
Note: 50 locations, phone number = 20 digits max,  
TON/NPI of 129 or 145, text length = 10  
OK  
Note: Location 5 written  
+CPBR=5,”112”,129,”SOS”  
Note: Location 5 written  
+CPBS:”SM”,2,10  
AT+CPBW=5,”112”,129,”SOS”  
Note: Write at location 5  
AT+CPBR=5  
Note: Read the entry at location 5  
AT+CPBS?  
Note: Which phonebook is selected  
OK  
Note: ADN phonebook is selected, 2 locations are  
used and 10 locations are available.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
49  
 
 
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
+CPBW Command Table Continued  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”  
Note: Overwrite location 5  
OK  
Note: Location 5 overwritten  
AT+CPBW=6,”01292349”,129,”8000410042”  
OK  
Note: write location 6 (UCS2 format for the <text> field) Note: Location 6 is written  
AT+CPBW=8,”01292349”,129,”80xyz”  
Note: write location  
OK  
Note: Location 8 is written. The string has a  
wrong UCS2 format. It is, therefore,  
considered as an ASCII string.  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Error because +WCOS: 0  
OK  
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”  
Note: write an extended entry  
AT+WCOS=1  
Note: Phonebook extended  
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”1  
Note: Write an extended entry  
AT+WCOS=0  
Note: Phonebook not extended  
AT+CPBS=”ME”  
OK  
OK  
OK  
Note: ME Phonebook  
AT+CPBS?  
+CPBS: “ME”,2,500  
Note: How many entries are used  
Note: in ME phonebook, 2 locations are used  
and 500 locations are available.  
OK  
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456798”,129,”first entry”  
Note: Write a not extended entry  
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456798”,129,”first  
entry”,”9876543210”,129  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Write an extended entry  
Note: Error because +WCOS: 0  
AT+CPBR=1  
+CPBR: 1,”0123456798”,129,”first entry”  
Note: Read the first entry  
AT+WCOS=1  
Note: Phonebook extended  
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456798”,129,”first entry”  
Note: Write an entry not extended  
AT+CPBW=2,”9876543210”,129,”second  
entry”,”6543210987”,129  
OK  
OK  
OK  
Note: Write an extended entry  
AT+CPBR=1,2  
+CPBR: 1,”0123456798”,129,”first entry”  
Note: Read entry 1 and 2  
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,  
”0141284549”,129,“0600003210”,129,”0141280000”,  
129,“019876543210”,129,  
OK  
Note: Location 13 is written  
fred@mail_address.com, “Becker Street London”,1  
Note: Write location with Contact and Phonebook  
Group n1  
AT+CPBW=,”+33145221100”,145,”SOS”  
Note: Write at the first location available  
AT+CPBW=,”+0345221100”,145,”SOS”  
Note: Write at the first location available  
AT+CPBW=57,”112”,129,”WM”  
Note: Write at location 57 (wrong)  
OK  
Note: First location available is written  
+CME ERROR: 20  
Note: Phonebook full  
+CME ERROR: 21  
Note: Invalid index  
AT+CPBW=7,”012345678901234567890”,129,”WAVE” +CME ERROR: 26  
Note: Write at location 7 a phone number exceeding  
the limit (21 digits)  
Note: Phone number too long  
AT+CPBW=7,”0122334455”,129,”WAVECOMTEL”  
Note: Write at location 7 along text (11 characters)  
AT+CPBS=”SM”  
+CME ERROR: 24  
Note: Text too long  
OK  
Note: ADN phonebook  
AT+WCOS?  
+WCOS: 1  
OK  
Note: Extended phonebook  
AT+CPBR=1  
+CPBR:1,”0123456”,129,”test”  
OK  
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456,,”test”,1  
Note: Add an extended entry in SIM with group  
number 1  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
50  
 
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
+CPBW Command Table Continued  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPBR=1  
+CPBR:1,”0123456,”129,”test”  
OK  
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456,,”test”,1  
Note: Add an extended entry in SIM with group  
number 1  
OK  
AT+CPBR=1  
+CPBR:1,”0123456,”129,”test”,1  
OK  
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,  
”0141284549”,129,“0600003210”,129,”0141280000”,  
129, “019876543210”,129,  
OK  
fred@mail_address.com, “Becker Street London”,1  
Note: Save the entry in the phonebook group #1  
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,  
”0141284549”,129,“0600003210”,129,”0141280000”,  
129, “019876543210”,129,  
fred@mail_address.com, “Becker Street London”  
Note: Save the entry in the phonebook without a  
group  
OK  
OK  
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,  
”0141284549”,129,“0600003210”,129,”0141280000”,  
129, “019876543210”,129,  
fred@mail_address.com, “Becker Street London”,0  
Note: Save the entry in the phonebook without a  
group  
This command is not allowed when the fixed dialing phonebook (FDN) is locked. Moreover, when the  
FDN is unlocked, PIN2 is required to write in the FDN phonebook.  
But if PIN2 authentication has been performed during the current session, the +CPBW command with  
FDN is allowed.  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPBS=”FD”  
Note: Choose FDN  
OK  
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky +CME ERROR: 17  
Note: SIM PIN2 is required  
Note: Write in FDN at location 5  
AT+CPIN?  
+CPIN: SIM PIN2  
Note: SIM PIN2 is required  
OK  
AT+CPIN=5678  
Note: Enter SIM PIN2  
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky OK  
Note: Writing in FDN is now allowed  
Note: Write in FDN at location 5  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
51  
 
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF  
Description:  
This command returns phonebook entries with alphanumeric fields starting with a given string. The  
AT+CPBF= “” command can be used to display all phonebook entries sorted in alphabetical order.  
This command is not allowed for "LD", "RC", "MC" phonebooks and for the “EN” phonebook, which  
does not contain alphanumeric fields.  
It is possible to use this command with UCS2 strings. If a wrong UCS2 format is entered, the string is  
considered as an ASCII string.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<string> Searched pattern string (depends on the format of the data stored in the phonebooks)  
<loc>  
<num>  
<type>  
Location number (20 digits maximum)  
Phone number (20 digits maximum)  
TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format)  
<contact> Extended contact structure  
Command Syntax: AT+CPBF=<string>  
Response Syntax:  
The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0  
<CR><LF> +CPBF=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>  
The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook with AT+WCOS=1  
<CR><LF> +CPBF=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>  
The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=0  
<CR><LF> +CPBF=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>  
The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=1  
<CR><LF> +CPBF=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>,<Phb_group>  
Command  
AT+CPBF=?  
Possible responses  
+CPBF: 20,10  
Note: Test command  
OK  
Note: Maximum length for a phone number is 20 digits; 14 characters for  
the text  
AT+CPBF=“E”  
+CPBF: 12,”112”,129,”Emergency”  
Note: Read entries with “E”  
+CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”  
OK  
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “E”  
AT+CPBF=”H”  
+CME ERROR: 22  
Note: Read entries with “H”  
AT+CPBF=”800001”  
Note: Read entries starting with  
0001 UCS2 character  
AT+CPBF=”8045C”  
Note: Entry not found  
+CPBF: 11, ”0146290921”,129,”8000010002FFFF”  
OK  
Note: Display locations with text field starting with 0001 UCS2 character  
+CME ERROR: 22  
Note: Read entries with “8045C” Note: Entry not found. The string has a wrong UCS2 format; it is therefore  
(ASCII format)  
considered as an ASCII string  
AT+CPBS=”SM”  
OK  
Note: ADN phonebook  
AT+WCOS=0  
OK  
Note: Phonebook not extended  
AT+CPBF=”Test”  
+CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ADN”  
Note: Read entries with “Test”  
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”  
AT+WCOS=1  
OK  
Note: Phonebook extended  
AT+CPBF=”Test”  
+CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ADN”,0  
Note: Read entries with “Test”  
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”, extended entry.  
AT+CPBS=”ME”  
OK  
Note: ADN phonebook  
AT+WCOS=0  
OK  
Note: Phonebook not extended  
AT+CPBF=”Test”  
+CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ME”  
Note: Read entries “Test”  
AT+WCOS=1  
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”  
OK  
Note: Phonebook extended  
AT+CPBF=”Test”  
+CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test  
Note: Read entries with “Test”  
ME”,”9876543210”,129,””,””,””,email@mail_address.com,  
”post address’,0  
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”, extended entry.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
52  
 
 
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP  
Description:  
This command orders the product to search the phonebook for an item with the same phone number as  
that defined in the parameter.  
The searched phone number is the FIRST one that the user can enter with AT+CPBW. For example,  
with this command strin, we can search only the phone number (+331290909):  
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,”0141284549”,129,“0600003210”,129,”0141280000”, 129,  
“019876543210”,129,fred@mail_address.com, “Becker Street London”,0  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<PhoneNumber> Phone number (coded according to any GSM 07.07 or GSM 07.05 phone number)  
<loc>  
Location number  
<num>  
<type>  
<contact>  
Phone number  
TON/NPI (type of address octet in integer format)  
Contact structure  
Command Syntax: AT+CPBP=<PhoneNumber>  
Response Syntax:  
The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0  
<CR><LF> +CPBP=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>  
The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook with AT+WCOS=1  
<CR><LF> +CPBP=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>  
The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=0  
<CR><LF> +CPBP=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>  
The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=1  
<CR><LF> +CPBP=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>,<Phb_group>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPBP=?  
+CPBP: (1-50),20,10  
Note: Test command  
OK  
Note: 50 locations (from 1 to 50), maximum length for phone  
number is 20 digits, 10 characters maximum for the text.  
AT+CPBP=”+331290101”  
Note: Search entries corresponding  
to this phone number  
+CPBP: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”  
OK  
Note: Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone number  
AT+CPBP=”+331290101”  
Note: Search entries corresponding  
to this phone number  
+CPBP: 15,”01290101”,129,”Eric”  
OK  
Note: Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone number  
AT+CPBP=”01290202”  
+CPBP: 15,”+331290202”,145,”David”  
Note: Search entries corresponding  
to this phone number  
OK  
Note: Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone number  
AT+CPBP=”+331288575”  
Note: Search entries corresponding  
to this phone number  
+CPBP: 15,”+331290101”,145,”8045682344FFFF”  
OK  
Note: Display entry corresponding to the specified phone number (UCS2 format)  
AT+CPBP=”0129”  
+CME ERROR: 22  
Note: Search entries corresponding  
to this phone number  
Note: Entry not found  
AT+CPBS=”SM”  
OK  
Note: ADN phonebook  
AT+WCOS=0  
OK  
Note: Phonebook not extended  
AT+CPBP=”0123456789”  
+CPBP: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ADN”  
Note: Search entries correspondeing Note: Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone number  
to this phone number  
AT+WCOS=1  
OK  
Note: Phonebook extended  
AT+CPBP=”0123456789”  
+CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ADN”,0  
Note: Search entries correspondeing Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”, extended entry.  
to this phone number  
AT+CPBS=”ME”  
OK  
Note: ADN phonebook  
AT+WCOS=0  
OK  
Note: Phonebook not extended  
AT+CPBP=”0123456789”  
+CPBP: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ME”  
Note: Search entries correspondeing Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”  
to this phone number  
Continued on next page  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
53  
 
 
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
AT+CPBP=<PhoneNumber> continued  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WCOS=1  
OK  
Note: Phonebook extended  
AT+CPBP=”Test”  
+CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test  
Note: Read entries with “Test”  
ME”,”9876543210”,129,””,””,””,email@mail_address.com,”post address’,0  
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”, extended entry.  
Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN  
Description:  
This specific command performs a forward or backward move in the phonebook (in alphabetical order).  
It is not allowed in the “EN” phonebook since it does not contain alphanumeric fields.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
2
3
4
First item  
Last item  
Next valid item in alphabetical order  
Previous valid item in alphabetical order  
Last item read (usable only if a read operation has been performed on the current  
phonebook since the end of initialization  
Last item written (usable only if a write operation has been performed on the current  
phonebook since the end of initialization  
5
<loc>  
Location number  
<num>  
<type>  
Phone number  
TON/NPI (Type of address octet in integer format)  
<contact> Contact structure  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CPBN=<mode>  
Response Syntax:  
The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0  
<CR><LF> +CPBN=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>  
The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook with AT+WCOS=1  
<CR><LF> +CPBN=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>  
The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=0  
<CR><LF> +CPBN=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>  
The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=1  
<CR><LF> +CPBN=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>,<Phb_group>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPBN=?  
+CPBN: (0-5)  
Note: Test command  
OK  
Note: Possible modes  
AT+CPBS=”SM”  
OK  
Note: ADN phonebook  
AT+WCOS=0  
OK  
Note: Phonebook not extended  
AT+CPBN=0  
+CPBN: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”  
Note: Read the first location  
AT+WCOS=1  
OK  
OK  
Note: Display the first location  
Note: Phonebook extended  
AT+CPBN=2  
Note: Read the next location  
+CPBN: 5,”+33147658987”,145,”Frank”,0  
OK  
Note: Display the second location, extended entry  
AT+CPBN=2  
+CPBN: 6,”+331290302”,145,”Marc”,0  
Note: Read the next location  
AT+WCOS=0  
OK  
OK  
Note: Display the third location, extended entry  
Note: Phonebook not extended  
AT+CPBN=3  
Note: Read the previous location  
AT+CPBN=1  
Note: Read the last location  
AT+CPBN=2  
+CPBN: 5,”+33147658987”,145,”Frank”  
OK Note: Display the second location  
+CPBN: 6,”+331290302”,145,”Marc”  
OK Note: Display the last location  
+CPBP: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”  
OK Note: Display the first location  
Note: Read the next location  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
54  
 
 
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
Using mode 4 and 5 with +CPBF command and CPBW:  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPBF=”Er”  
+CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”  
Note: Find ”Er” in phonebook  
OK  
Note: Display the location  
+CPBN: 5,”+33147658987”,145,”Frank”  
OK  
AT+CPBN=2  
Note: Read the next location  
Note: Display the following location  
+CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”  
OK  
AT+CPBF=”Er”  
Note: Find ”Er” in phonebook  
Note: Display the location  
+CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”  
OK  
AT+CPBN=4  
Note: Get the last location read  
Note: Display the last location read  
AT+CPBW=,”0146290800”,129,”WM”  
Note: Write an item at the first location  
available  
OK  
Note: No information about this location  
AT+CPBN=4  
Note: Get the last location read  
+CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”  
OK  
Note: Display the last location read  
AT+CPBN=38,”0146290800,129,”WM”  
Note: Display the last item written with its location  
AT+CPBN=5  
Note: Display the last item written with  
its location  
AT+CPBN=4  
AT+CPBN=38,”0146290800,129,”WM”  
Note: Now the last item read is the last written item too  
+CPBF: 15,”+3312345”,145,”8000414339FFFF”  
OK  
Note: Get the last item read  
AT+CPBF=”800041FFFF”  
Note: Find”800041” in phonebook  
Note: Display this location  
AT+CPBN=4  
Note: Get the last location read  
+CPBF: 15,”+3312345”,145,”8000414339FFFF”  
OK  
Note: Display the last location read  
Note: The AT+CPBN=5 command is useful after an AT+CPBW command is used without a location.  
Subscriber Number +CNUM  
Description:  
This command returns the subscriber MSISDN(s). If the subscriber has different MSISDNs for different  
services, each MSISDN is returned in a separate line.  
Values:  
<alphax>  
<numberx> string type phone number with format as specified by <typex>  
<typex> type of address byte in integer format  
optional alphanumeric string associated with <numberx>  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+CNUM  
Response syntax: +CNUM: <alpha1>, <number1>, <type1> <CR><LF> +CNUM: <alpha2>,  
<number2>, <type2> ….  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CNUM  
+CNUM:”Phone”, “0612345678”,129  
+CNUM:”Fax”, “0687654321”,129  
Note: Get MSISDN(s)  
+CNUM: “80001002FFFF”, “+0183773”, 145 (UCS2 format)  
OK  
Note: MSISDNs  
AT+CNUM=?  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
55  
 
 
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
Avoid Phonebook Initialization +WAIP  
Description:  
This specific command allows the initialization of all phonebooks to be inhibited during subsequent  
boots.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
Normal initialization (with phonebooks)  
No phonebook initialization  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+WAIP=<mode>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WAIP?  
+WAIP:0  
OK  
Note: Current values ?  
AT+WAIP=?  
Note: Default value (init phonebooks)  
+WAIP: (0,1)  
Note: Possible values ?  
OK  
Note: Disable / enable  
AT+WAIP =1  
OK  
Note: Inhibit initialization of phonebooks (next boot) Note: no answer  
AT&W  
Note: Save modifications in EEPROM  
Caution: The given value should be stored in EEPROM. Therefore, the AT&W command must be used to save the  
new <mode> value.  
Note: No phonebook commands are allowed if +WAIP=1 (after boot). If a phonebook command is entered, a “+CME  
ERROR: 3” is returned.  
Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP  
Description:  
This specific command deletes the calls listed in some phonebooks.  
Values:  
<calls phonebook>  
“LD” SIM (ME extended) Last dialing phonebook  
“MC” ME missed calls list phonebook  
“RC” ME received calls list phonebook  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: +WDCP=<calls phonebook>  
Command  
AT+WDCP?  
Possible responses  
OK  
AT+WDCP=?  
+WDCP: ("LD","MC","RC")  
OK  
Note: Possible values ?  
AT+WDCP=”LD”  
Note: Identifiers of the phonebooks supporting a list of calls  
OK  
Note: Delete all the content of Last Dialing phonebook. Note: Last Dialing phonebook is now empty.  
Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM  
Description:  
Values:  
This commands sets/gets and enables/disables the voice mail number in memory.  
<mode>  
0
1
Disable the voice mail number  
Enable the voice mail number  
<number> Phone number in ASCII format.  
<type> TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format).  
Note: The value is 145 if the dialing string includes the international access code character  
‘+’. Otherwise, the value is 129. Example: A <type> value of 17 will be written as 145.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CSVM=<mode>[,<number>[,<type>]]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CSVM?  
+CSVM: 1,”660”,129  
Note: Get mail number  
OK  
Note: Voice mail number “660” is activated  
AT+CSVM=?  
+CSVM: (0-1),(129,145)  
OK  
Note: Possible values ?  
Note: activation/deactivation and format 129 & 145 are supported  
AT+CSVM=0,”888”,129  
OK  
Note: Disable Voice Mail number and  
change value to “888”.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
56  
 
     
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
Contact Selector +WCOS  
Description:  
This commands enables/disables the displaying of extended contact.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
Select the SIM contacts  
1 Select the extended contacts for phonebook entries  
2 Internal use only.  
3
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+WCOS=<mode>  
Command  
AT+WCOS?  
Possible responses  
+WCOS: 1  
Note: Test command  
OK  
Note: Extended contact selected  
AT+WCOS=?  
+WCOS: (0-2)  
Note: List all possible values OK  
Note: Displays all possible responses  
OK  
AT+WCOS=0  
Note: Contact not selected  
AT+WCOS=3  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Mode not allowed  
Create and Delete a Phonebook Group +WPGW  
Description:  
This commands creates or deletes a phonebook group.  
Values:  
<index>  
<name>  
Index a new group  
Name of the group. It can be up to 30 ASCII characters or 13 UCS2 characters long  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+WPGW=<index>[,<name>]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WPGW=?  
Note: Test command  
+WPGW: (1-10),30  
OK  
Note: 10 possible groups, group name can be 30 characters  
maximum  
AT+WPGW=1,”group 1”  
Note: Create group #1  
AT+WPGW=1,”phb group 1”  
Note: Rename group #1  
AT+WPGW=1  
OK  
Note: Group 1 created  
OK  
Note: Group 1 created  
OK  
Note: Delete group #1  
Note: Group 1 deleted  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
57  
 
   
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
Read a Phonebook Group +WPGR  
Description:  
This commands reads the phonebook group entries, the phonebook group name or the number or used  
records in a group.  
Values:  
<mode>  
1
2
Read the name of one phonebook group  
Read the names of all phonebook groups  
3
4
List all entries of one phonebook group  
Read the number of used records in a phonebook group  
<index>  
Index of the group (for use with mode = 3 or mode = 4)  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+WPGR=<mode>,<index>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WPGR=?  
Note: Test command  
+WPGR: (1-4),(1-10)  
OK  
Note: 10 possible groups  
+WPGR: 1,”group 1”  
OK  
AT+WPGR=1,1  
Note: Read the name of phonebook group 1  
AT+WPGR=2  
+WPGR: 1,”group 1”  
Note: Read the name of all phonebook groups +WPGR: 2,”group 2”  
OK  
AT+WCOS=0  
OK  
Note: Phonebook not extended  
AT+WPGR=3,1  
Note: List all entries of phonebook group 1  
+WPGR: 1,”+33123456789”,145,”John”  
+WPGR: 2,”+33567891234”,145,”Elvis”  
+WPGR: 31,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”  
+WPGR: 32,”+0123456789”,129,”Test”  
OK  
Note: SIM entries: index 1 and 2; Flash entries; index 31  
and 32 (The SIM supports 30 entries in this example)  
OK  
AT+WCOS=1  
Note: Phonebook extended  
AT+WPGR=3,1  
Note: List all extended entries of phonebook  
group 1  
+WPGR: 1,”+33123456789”,145,”John”, 1  
+WPGR: 2,”+33567891234”,145,”Elvis”,1  
+WPGR: 31,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,”0141284549”,  
129,”060003210”,129,”0141280000”,129,  
”019876543210”,129,fred@mail_address.com,  
”Becker Street London”,1  
+WPGR: 32,”+0123456789”,129,”Test”,0141284549”,  
129,”0600003210”,129,0141280000”,129,  
”6549873210”,129,test@mail_address.com,””,1  
OK  
Note: SIM entries: index 1 and 2; Flash entries; index 31  
and 32 (The SIM supports 30 entries in this example)  
Note: The entries list displayed with AT+WPGR=3,1 contains records from both the Mobile Equipment and  
the SIM phonebooks (MT phonebook).  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
58  
 
 
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands  
Settings of a Phonebook Group +WPGS  
Description:  
This commands sets the parameters of a phonebook group.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
Read group settings  
Write group settings  
<index>  
Index of the group  
<restrict call>  
Parameter is optional if <mode.=0. It is mandatory if <mode>=1.  
0
1
All refused. Incoming call is forwarded to the voice mailbox  
All accepted. Incoming call is received (RING message is displayed)  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+WPGS=<mode>,<index>[,<restrict call>]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WPGS=1,1,1  
OK  
Note: Set restrict call to “All Accepted”  
AT+WPGS=0,1  
+WPGS: 1,  
Note: Read group 1 settings  
OK  
Note: Group1: all accepted  
+WPGS: (0-1),(1-10),(0-1)  
OK  
AT+WPGS=?  
Note: Test command  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
59  
 
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Chapter 9 – Short Messages  
Parameters Definition  
<da>  
<dcs>  
<dt>  
Destination Address, coded according to the GSM Technical Specification 03.40 TP-DA  
Data Coding Scheme, coded according to document [5]  
Discharge Time in string format:  
“yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss zz”(Year [00-99], Month [01-12],  
Day [01-31], Hour, Minute, Second and Time Zone [quarters of an hour] )  
<fo>  
First Byte, coded according to SMS-SUBMIT first byte in document [4], default value is 17 for SMS-  
SUBMIT  
<index>  
Place of storage in memory  
<length>  
Text mode (+CMGF=1): number of characters PDU mode (+CMGF=0): length of the TP data unit in  
bytes  
<mem1>  
<mem2>  
<mem3>  
<mid>  
<mr>  
Memory used to list, read and delete messages (+CMGL, +CMGR and +CMGD)  
Memory used to write and send messages (+CMGW, +CMSS)  
Preferred memory to which received SMS are to be stored  
CBM Message Identifier  
Message Reference  
<oa>  
Originator Address  
<pid>  
Protocol Identifier  
<pdu>  
For SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM Technical Specification 03.40 TPDU in  
hexadecimal format, coded as specified in doc [4] For CBS: GSM Technical Specification 03.41 TPDU  
in hexadecimal format  
<ra>  
Recipient Address  
<sca>  
<scts>  
Service Center Address  
Service Center Time Stamp in string format: “yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss zz”  
(Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:Seconds TimeZone)  
<sn>  
CBM Serial Number  
<st>  
Status of a SMS-STATUS-REPORT  
Status of message in memory  
<stat>  
<tooa>  
<tora>  
<tosca>  
<total1>  
<total2>  
<total3>  
<used1>  
<used2>  
<used3>  
<vp>  
Type-of-Address of <oa>  
Type-of-Address of <ra>  
Type-of-Address of <sca>  
Number of locations for messages in <mem1>  
Number of locations for messages in <mem2>  
Number of locations for messages in <mem3>  
Total number of messages in <mem1>  
Total number of messages in <mem2>  
Total number of messages in <mem3>  
Validity Period of the short message, default value is 167  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
60  
 
   
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Select Message Service +CSMS  
Description:  
The Supported Services include originated (SMS-MO) and terminated short messages (SMS-MT) as  
well as Cell Broadcast Message (SMS-CB) services.  
Values:  
<service>  
0
SMS AT commands are compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 version 4.7.0.  
1
SMS AT commands are compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 + version .  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CSMS=<service>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CSMS=0  
+CSMS: 1,1,1  
Note: SMS AT command Phase 2  
version 4.7.0  
OK  
Note: SMS-MO, SMS-MT and SMS-CB supported  
AT+CSMS=1  
+CSMS: 1,1,1  
Note: SMS AT command Phase 2 +  
Note: SMS-MO, SMS-MT and SMS-CB supported  
AT+CSMS?  
+CSMS: 0,1,1,1  
Note: Current values ?  
OK  
Note: GSM 03.40 and 03.41 (SMS AT command Phase 2  
version 4.7.0  
+CSMS: (0,1)  
OK  
AT+CSMS=?  
Note: Possible services  
New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA  
Description:  
This command allows reception of a new message routed directly to the DTE to be acknowledged.  
In TEXT mode, only positive acknowledgement to the network (RP-ACK) is possible.  
In PDU mode, either positive (RP-ACK) or negative (RP-ERROR) acknowledgement to the  
network is possible.  
Acknowledgement with +CNMA is possible only if the +CSMS parameter is set to 1 (+CSMS=1) when a  
+CMT or +CDS indication is shown (see +CNMI command).  
If no acknowledgement occurs within the network timeout, an RP-ERROR is sent to the network. The  
<mt> and <ds> parameters of the +CNMI command are then reset to zero (do not show new message  
indication).  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<n>: Type of acknowledgement in PDU mode  
0
1
2
send RP-ACK without PDU (same as TEXT mode)  
send RP-ACK with optional PDU message  
send RP-ERROR with optional PDU message  
<length>: Length of the PDU message  
Command syntax in text mode: AT+CNMA  
Command syntax in PDU mode: AT+CNMA [ = <n> [ , <length> [ <CR>  
Note: PDU is entered using <ackpdu> format instead of <pdu> format (e.g., SMSC address field is not  
present). PDU is entered <ctrl-Z / ESC> ] ] ]  
Example of New Message Acknowledgement in TEXT Mode  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CSMS=1  
OK  
Note: SMS AT Commands compatible with  
GSM 07.05 Phase 2 + version  
AT+CMGF=1  
OK  
Note: Set TEXT mode  
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0  
Note: <mt>=2  
Note: TEXT mode valid  
OK  
+CMT: “123456”,”98/10/01,12:30 00+00”,129,4  
,32,240, “15379”,129,5<CR><LF>  
Received message  
Note: message received  
AT+CNMA  
OK  
Note: acknowledge the message received  
Note: send positive acknowledgement to the network  
AT+CNMA  
+CMS ERROR: 340  
Note: try to acknowledge again  
Note: no +CNMA acknowledgment expected  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
61  
 
   
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Example of New Message Acknowledgement in PDU Mode:  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CSMS=1  
OK  
Note: SMS AT Commands compatible with  
GSM 07.05 Phase 2 + version  
AT+CMGF=0  
OK  
Note: Set PDU mode  
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0  
Note: <mt>=2  
Note: PDU mode valid  
OK  
+CMT: ,29  
07913366003000F1240B913366920547F30000003003419404800  
B506215D42ECFE7E17319  
Note: message received  
OK  
AT+CNMA=2,2 <CR>  
>00D3 <Ctrl-Z>  
Note: Negative ACK to the SMS.  
Reason is: memory capacity exceeded  
AT+CNMA=2,2 <CR>  
OK  
OK  
OK  
>00D3 <Ctrl-Z>  
Note: Negative ACK to the SMS.  
Reason is: SIM memory storage is full  
AT+CNMA=2,2 <CR>  
>00D3 <Ctrl-Z>  
Note: Negative ACK to the SMS.  
Reason is: Error in modem  
AT+CNMA=2,2 <CR>  
>00FF <Ctrl-Z>  
Note: Negative ACK to the SMS.  
Unspecified error  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
62  
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Preferred Message Storage +CPMS  
Description:  
This command allows the message storage area to be selected (for reading, writing, etc).  
Values:  
<mem1>:  
SM  
Memory used to list, read and delete messages. It can be:  
SMS message storage in SIM (default)  
ME  
SMS message storage in Flash  
BM  
SR  
CBM message storage (in volatile memory).  
Status Report message storage (in SIM if the EF-SMR file exists, otherwise in the ME non  
volatile memory)  
Note: SR ME non-volatile memory is cleared when another SIM card is inserted. It is kept,  
even after a reset, while the same SIM card is used.  
<mem2>:  
SM  
Memory used to write and send messages  
SMS message storage in SIM (default)  
SMS message storage in Flash  
ME  
<mem3>:  
SM  
Memory to which received SMS are preferred to be stored  
SMS message storage in SIM (default)  
SMS message storage in Flash  
ME  
If the command is correct, the following message indication is sent:  
+CPMS: <used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>,<used3>,<total3>  
When <mem1> is selected, all following +CMGL, +CMGR and +CMGD commands are related to the  
type of SMS stored in this memory.  
The maximum number of SMS is Flash is 99.  
When the modem is switched on, <mem1>,<mem2>, and <mem3> are initialized to SM.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CPMS=<mem1>,[<mem2>],[<mem3>]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPMS=?  
+CPMS: ((“SM”,”ME”,”BM”,”SR”),(“SM”,”ME”),(“SM”,”ME”))  
OK  
Note: Possible message storages  
AT+CPMS?  
Note: Read, list, delete: SMS or SMS Status Report  
Write, send: SMS  
+CPMS: “SM”,3, 10,”SM”,3,10,”SM”,3,10  
OK  
Note: Read  
Note: Read, write…SMS from/to SIM  
3 SMS are stored in SIM. 10 is the total memory available in SIM  
AT+CPMS= “SM”,”ME”,“SM”  
Note: Select SM for reading, ME  
for writing and SM for storing  
AT+CPMS=”AM”  
+CPMS: 3,10,3,99,3,10  
OK  
+CMS ERROR: 302  
Note: Select false message storage  
AT+CPMS=”BM”  
+CPMS: 2,20,3,10  
OK  
Note: Select CBM message storage Note: Read, list, delete CBM from RAM 2 CBM are stored in RAM  
AT+CPMS?  
+CPMS: “SM”,3,10,”ME”,3,99,“SM”,3,10,  
OK  
Note: Read  
Note: Read, store...SMS from/to flash, write SMS to flash. 3SMS  
are stored in flash. 99 is the total memory available in flash  
CMTI: “SM”,4  
+CPMS: 3,99,3,99,3,99  
OK  
AT+CPMS= “ME”,”ME”,“ME”  
Note: Select ME for reading, ME  
for writing and ME for storing  
AT+CPMS?  
+CPMS: “ME”,3,99,”ME”,3,99,”ME”,3,99  
OK  
Note: Read  
Note: Read, write, store SMS from/to flash. 3 SMS are stored in  
flash. 99 is the total memory available in flash  
CMTI: “ME”,4  
Note: Receive an SMS stored in flash at location 4  
AT+CPMS= “AM”  
Note: Select wrong message  
storage  
+CMS ERROR: 302  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
63  
 
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Command Syntax: AT+CPMS=<mem1>,[<mem2>],[<mem3>] continued  
Command  
Possible responses  
+CPMS: “4,10,4,99,4,99  
OK  
AT+CPMS= “SM”  
Note: Selecting SM for reading,  
writing and storing has not  
changed  
AT+CPMS?  
+CPMS: “SM”,4,10,”ME”,4,99,”ME”,4,99  
OK  
Note: Read SMS from SIM. Write and store SMS from/to flash  
Preferred Message Format +CMGF  
Description:  
The message formats supported are text mode and PDU mode.  
In PDU mode, a complete SMS Message including all header information is given as a binary string (in  
hexadecimal format). Therefore, only the following set of characters is allowed:  
{‘0’,’1’,’2’,’3’,’4’,’5’,’6’,’7’,’8’,’9’, ‘A’, ‘B’,’C’,’D’,’E’,’F’}. Each pair of characters is  
converted to a byte (e.g., ‘41’ is converted to the ASCII character ‘A’, whose ASCII  
code is 0x41 or 65).  
In Text mode, all commands and responses are in ASCII characters.  
The format selected is stored in EEPROM by the +CSAS command.  
Values:  
<mode> PDU or Text Mode  
0
1
PDU mode  
Text mode  
The <pdu> message is composed of the SC address (00 means no SC address given, use default  
SC address, read with +CSCA command) and the TPDU message.  
In this example, the length of bytes of the TPDU buffer is 14, coded according to GSM Technical  
Specification 03.40.  
In this case, the TPDU is: 0x01 0x03 0x06 0x91 0x21 0x43 0x65 0x00 0x00 0x04 0xC9 0xE9 0x34  
0x0B, which is GSM 03.40:  
<fo>  
0x01 (SMS-SUBMIT, no validity period)  
0x03 (Message Reference)  
0x06 0x91 0x21 0x43 0x65 (destination address +123456)  
0x00 (Protocol Identifier)  
<mr> (TP-MR)  
<da> (TP-DA)  
<pid> (TP-PID)  
<dcs> (TP-DCS)  
0x00 (Data Coding Scheme: 7 bits alphabet)  
<length> (TP-UDL) 0x04 (User Data Length, 4 characters of text)  
TP-UD 0xC9 0xE9 0x34 0x0B (User Data: ISSY)  
TPDU in hexadecimal format must be converted into two ASCII characters; e.g., an byte with  
hexadecimal value 0x2A is presented to the ME as two characters ‘2’ (ASCII 50) and ‘A’ (ASCII 65).  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CMGF<mode>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CMGF ?  
+CMGF: 1  
OK  
Note: Current message format  
AT+CMGF=?  
Note: Text mode  
+CMGF: (0,1)  
OK  
Note: Possible message format  
Note: Text or PDU modes are available  
Example: Sending an SMS Message in PDU mode:  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CMGF=0  
OK  
Note: Set PDU mode  
AT+CMGS=14<CR>  
0001030691214365000004C9E9340B  
Note: PDU mode valid  
+CMGS: 4  
OK  
Note: Send complete MSG in PDU mode, no  
SC address  
Note: MSG correctly sent, <mr> is returned  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
64  
 
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Save Settings +CSAS  
Description:  
All settings specified by the +CSCA and +CSMP commands are stored in EEPROM if the SIM card is a  
Phase 1 card or in the SIM card if it is a Phase 2 SIM card.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters  
Command Syntax: AT+CSAS  
Command  
AT+CSAS  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: Store +CSCA and +CSMP parameters  
Note: Parameters saved  
Restore Settings +CRES  
Description:  
All settings specified in the +CSCA and +CSMP commands are restored from EEPROM if the SIM card  
is Phase 1 or from the SIM card if it is a Phase 2 SIM card.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters  
Command Syntax: AT+CRES  
Command  
AT+CRES  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: Restore +CSCA and +CSMP parameters  
Note: Parameters restored  
Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH  
Description:  
This command gives additional information about text mode result codes. This information can be found  
in the description of the +CMT, +CMGR, +CMGL commands.  
Values:  
<n>: show indicator  
0
1
do not show header values  
show the values in result codes  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CSDH  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CSDH=0  
OK  
Note: Set value to “do not how”  
AT+CSDH?  
+CSDH: 0  
Note: Current value  
OK  
Note: Do not show header values  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
65  
 
     
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
New Message Indication +CNMI  
Description:  
This command selects the procedure for message reception from the network.  
Values:  
<mode> Controls the processing of unsolicited result codes  
Important Note: Only <mode>=2 is supported.  
Any other value for <mode> (0,1 or 3) is accepted (return code will be OK), but  
the processing of unsolicited result codes will be the same as with <mode>=2.  
0
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA. If TA result code buffer is full, indications can be  
buffered in some other place, or the oldest indications may be discarded and replaced with the  
new received indications  
1
2
3
Discard indication and reject new received message unsolicited result codes when TA-TE link  
is reserved. Otherwise forward them directly to the TE  
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is reserved and flush them to the TE  
after reservation. Otherwise forward them directly to the TE  
Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE link specific inband used to embed  
result codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode  
<mt>  
Sets the result code indication routing for SMS-DELIVERs. Default is 1.  
No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed.  
0
1
2
SMS-DELIVERs are routed using unsolicited code: +CMTI: “SM”,<index>  
SMS-DELIVERs (except class 2 messages) are routed using unsolicited code:  
If PDU mode:  
+CMT: [<alpha>,] <length> <CR> <LF> <pdu>  
If text mode:  
+CMT: <oa>,[<alpha>,] <scts> [,<tooa>, <fo>, <pid>, <dcs>, <sca>, <tosca>, <length>]  
<CR><LF><data>  
3
Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly using code in <mt>=2 ; Message of other classes  
result in indication <mt>=1  
<bm> Sets the rules for storing the received CBMs (Cell Broadcast Message) types. They depend on  
the coding scheme (text or PDU) and the setting of Select CBM Types (+CSCB command).  
Default is 0.  
0
1
No CBM indications are routed to the TE. The CBMs are stored. Default.  
The CBM is stored and an indication of the memory location is routed to the customer  
application using unsolicited result code: +CBMI: “BM”, <index>  
2
New CBMs are routed directly to the DTE using an unsolicited result code.  
If PDU mode:  
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode)  
If text mode:  
+CBM:<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages>(Text mode) <CR><LF> <data>  
3
Class 3 CBMs: as <bm>=2. Other classes CBMs: as <bm>=1.  
<ds>  
Used for SMS-STATUS-REPORTs. Default is 0.  
No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed.  
0
1
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed using unsolicited code:  
If PDU mode:  
+CDS: <length> <CR> <LF> <pdu>  
If text mode:  
+CDS: <fo>,<mr>, [<ra>] , [<tora>], <scts>,<dt>,<st>  
2
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are stored and routed using the unsolicited result code: +CDSI:  
“SR”,<index>  
<bfr> Default is 0.  
0
TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the TE when  
<mode> 1…3 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes)  
1
TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when <mode>  
1…3 is entered.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
66  
 
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CNMI=<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CNMI=2,1,0,0,0  
Note: <mt>=1  
OK  
AT+CMTI: “SM”,1  
Note: message received  
OK  
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0  
Note: <mt>=2  
+CMT: “123456”,”98/10/01,12:30 00+00”,129,4,32,240,  
“15379”,129,5<CR><LF>  
Note: message received  
OK  
AT+CNMI=2,0,0,1,0  
Note: <ds>=1  
AT+CMGS=”+33146290800”<CR>  
Happy Birthday!<ctrl-Z>  
Note: Send a message in text mode  
+CMGS: 7  
OK  
Note: Successful transmission  
+CDS: 2, 116, ”+33146290800”, 145, “98/10/01,12:30:07+04”,  
“98/10/01  
12:30:08+04”, 0  
Note: message was correctly delivered  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
67  
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Read Message +CMGR  
Description:  
This command allows the application to read stored messages. The messages are read from the  
memory selected by the +CPMS command.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+CMGR=<index>  
Response syntax for text mode:  
For SMS-DELIVER only  
+CMGR: <stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>,] <scts> [,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]  
<CR><LF> <data>  
For SMS-SUBMIT only  
+CMGR: <stat>,<da>,[<alpha>,] [,<toda>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>, [<vp>], <sca>,  
<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF> <data>  
For SMS-STATUS-REPORT only)  
+CMGR: <stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>  
Response syntax for PDU mode:  
+CMGR: <stat>, [<alpha>] ,<length> <CR><LF> <pdu>  
Notes:  
A message read with status “REC UNREAD” will be updated in memory with the status “REC READ”.  
The <stat> parameter for the SMS Status Reports is always “READ”.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CMGR=<index>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CMTI: “SM”,1  
Note: New message received  
AT+CMGR=1  
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,  
Note: Read the message  
”98/10/01,18:22:11+00”,<CR><LF>  
ABCdefGHI  
OK  
AT+CMGR=1  
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,  
Note: Read the message again  
”98/10/01,18:22:11+00”,<CR><LF>  
ABCdefGHI  
OK  
Note: Message is read now  
AT+CMGR=2  
OK  
Note: Location empty  
AT+CMGF=0 ;+CMGR=1  
+CMGR: 2,,<length> <CR><LF><pdu>  
OK  
Note: In PDU mode  
Note: Message is stored but unsent, no <alpha>field  
AT+CMGF=1;+CPMS=”SR”;+CNMI=,,,2  
Reset to text mode, set read memory to  
“SR”, and allow storage of further SMS  
Status Report into “SR” memory  
AT+CMSS=3  
OK  
+CMSS: 160  
Send an SMS previously stored  
OK  
+CDSI: “SR”,1  
New SMS Status Report stored in “SR” memory at  
index 1  
AT+CMGR=1  
+CMGR: "REC UNREAD",6,160, "+33612345678",129,  
Read the SMS Status Report  
"01/05/31,15:15:09+00",  
"01/05/31,15:15:09+00",0  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
68  
 
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
List Message +CMGL  
Description:  
This command allows the application to read stored messages, by indicating the type of the message to  
read. The messages are read from the memory selected by the +CPMS command.  
Values:  
<stat> possible values (status of messages in memory):  
Text mode  
PDU mode  
Status of messages in  
possible values  
possible values memory  
“REC UNREAD”  
0
1
2
3
4
received unread messages  
“REC READ”  
“STO UNSENT”  
“STO SENT”  
“ALL”  
received read messages  
stored unsent messages  
stored sent messages  
all messages  
Note: For SMS Status Reports, only “ALL” / 4 and “READ” / 1 values of the <stat> parameter  
will list messages; other values will only return OK.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+CMGL=<stat>  
Response syntax for text mode:  
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<da/oa>[,<alpha>], [<scts>, <tooa/toda>, <length>] <CR><LF><data> (for  
SMS-DELIVER and SMS-SUBMIT. May be followed by other <CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>…)  
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (for SMS-STATUS-REPORT  
only. May be followed by other <CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>…)  
Response syntax for PDU mode:  
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>, [<alpha>], <length> <CR><LF> <pdu> (for SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT  
and SMS-STATUS-REPORT. May be followed by other <CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>…)  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CMGL=“REC UNREAD”  
Note: List unread messages in text  
mode  
+CMGL: 1,”REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,  
<CR><LF> I will be late  
+CMGL: 3,”REC UNREAD”, “46290800”,  
<CR><LF>See you tonight!  
OK  
Note: 2 messages are unread, these messages will then  
have their status changed to “REC READ”  
+CMGL: 2,”REC READ”,”0146290800”,<CR><LF>  
Keep cool  
AT+CMGL=”REC READ”  
Note: List read messages in text  
mode  
OK  
AT+CMGL=”STO SENT”  
OK  
Note: List stored and sent messages Note: No message found  
in text mode  
AT+CMGL=1  
+CMGL: 1,1,,26  
Note: List read messages in PDU  
mode  
<CR><LF>  
07913366003000F3040B913366920547F400130011904125  
30400741AA8E5A9C5201  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
69  
 
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Send Message +CMGS  
Description:  
The <address> field is the address of the terminal to which the message is sent. To send the message,  
simply type, <ctrl-Z> character (ASCII 26). The text can contain all existing characters except <ctrl-Z>  
and <ESC> (ASCII 27).  
This command can be aborted using the <ESC> character when entering text. In PDU mode, only  
hexadecimal characters are used (‘0’…’9’,’A’…’F’).  
Values:  
Syntax:  
See the Parameters Definition list at the beginning this chapter.  
Command syntax in text mode:  
AT+CMGS= <da> [ ,<toda> ] <CR>  
Text is entered: <ctrl-Z / ESC >  
Command syntax in PDU mode:  
AT+CMGS= <length> <CR>  
PDU is entered: <ctrl-Z / ESC >  
Command Syntax: AT+CMGS  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CMGS=”+33146290800”<CR>  
------------------------------------------------  
Please call me soon, Fred. <ctrl-Z>  
Note: Send a message in text mode  
------------------------------------------------  
>
---------------------------------------  
---------------------------------------  
+CMGS: <mr>  
OK  
Note: Successful transmission  
AT+CMGS=<length><CR>  
Note: Send a message in PDU mode (1/3)  
--------------------------------------------------------  
<pdu>  
>
---------------------------------------  
Note: Enter message in PDU mode (2/3)  
--------------------------------------------------------  
<ctrl-Z>  
-----------------------------------------  
+CMGS: <mr>  
Note: End the message (3/3)  
OK  
Note: Successful transmission  
The message reference <mr> is returned to the application and allocated by the product. This number  
begins with 0, is incremented by one for each outgoing message (successes and failures), and is cyclic  
on one byte (0 follows 255).  
Note: This number is not a storage number. Outgoing messages are not stored.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
70  
 
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Write Message to Memory +CMGW  
Description:  
This command stores a message in memory (either SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-DELIVERs).  
The memory location <index> is returned (no choice possible as with phonebooks +CPBW).  
Text or PDU is entered as described for the Send Message +CMGS command.  
<oa/da> Originating or Destination Address Value in string format  
<tooa/toda> Type of Originating / Destination Address  
<stat> Integer type in PDU mode (default 2 for +CMGW) or string type in text mode (default  
Values:  
STO UNSENTfor +CMGW). Indicates the status of message in memory. If <stat> is  
omitted, the stored message is considered as a message to send  
0
1
2
3
“REC UNREAD”  
“REC READ”  
“STO UNSENT”  
“STO SENT”  
<length>: Length of the actual data unit in bytes  
Syntax:  
Command syntax in text mode:(<index> is returned in both cases)  
AT+CMGW= <oa/da> [,<tooa/toda> [,<stat> ] ] <CR>  
Enter text: <ctrl-Z / ESC>  
Command syntax in PDU mode:  
AT+CMGW= <length> [,<stat>] <CR>  
Give PDU: <ctrl-Z / ESC>  
Response syntax:  
+CMGW: <index> or +CMS ERROR: <err> if writing fails  
Command Syntax: +CMGW  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CMGW=”+33146290800”<CR>  
------------------------------------------------  
Hello how are you ?<ctrl-Z>  
Note: Write a message in text mode  
---------------------------------------------------  
>
------------------------------------------  
-------------------------------------------  
+CMGW: 4  
OK  
Note: Message stored in index 4  
AT+CMGW=<length><CR><pdu><ctrl-Z>  
Note: Write a message in PDU mode (1/3)  
-----------------------------------------------------------  
<pdu>  
>
-----------------------------------------------  
Note: Enter message in PDU mode (2/3)  
------------------------------------------------------------  
<ctrl-Z>  
-----------------------------------------------  
+CMGW: <index>  
Note: End the message (3/3)  
OK  
Note: Message stored in <index>  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
71  
 
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Send Message from Storage +CMSS  
Description:  
This command sends a message stored at location value <index>.  
Values:  
<index>  
<da>  
Location of stored message  
Desination address  
<toda>  
<mr>  
Type of destination address  
Message reference  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+CMSS=<index>[,<da> [,<toda>] ]  
Response syntax: +CMSS: <mr> or +CMS ERROR: <err> if sending fails  
If a new recipient address <da> is given, it will be used instead of the one stored with the message.  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CMGW=0660123456<CR>  
Today is my birthday  
+CMGW: 5  
OK  
Note: Message stored with index 5  
AT+CMSS=5, 0680654321  
AT+CMSS:<mr>  
OK  
Note: Send the message 5 to a different destination number Note: Successful transmission  
Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP  
Description:  
This command selects values for <vp>, <pid>, and <dcs>.  
Values:  
<fo> byte comprises 6 different fields:  
b7  
RP  
b6  
UDHI  
b5  
SRR  
b4  
b3  
VPF  
b2  
RD  
b1  
b0  
MTI  
Note: <fo> must be entered in DECIMAL format. Hexadecimal format would lead to  
irrelevant results  
RP  
Reply Path, not used in text mode.  
UDHI  
User Data Header Information, b6=1 if the beginning of the User Data field contains a  
Header in addition to the short message. This option is not supported in +CSMP  
command, but can be used in PDU mode (+CMGS).  
SRR  
VPF  
Status Report Request, b5=1 if a status report is requested. This mode is supported.  
Validity Period Format  
b4=0 & b3=0 -> <vp> field is not present  
b4=1 & b3=0 -> <vp> field is present in relative format  
Others formats (absolute & enhanced) are not supported.  
RD  
Reject Duplicates, b2=1 to instruct the SC to reject an SMS-SUBMIT for an SM still  
held in the SC that has the same <mr> and <da> as the previously submitted SM  
from the same <oa>.  
MTI  
Message Type Indicator  
b1=0 & b0=0 -> SMS-DELIVER (in the direction SC to MS)  
b1=0 & b0=1 -> SMS-SUBMIT (in the direction MS to SC)  
In text mode <vp> is only coded in “relative” format. The default value is 167 (24 hours). This  
means that one byte can describe different values:  
VP value  
0 to 143  
144 to 167  
168 to 196  
197 to 255  
Validity period value  
(VP + 1) x 5 minutes (up to 12 hours)  
12 hours + ( (VP – 143) x 30 minutes )  
(VP – 166) x 1 day  
(VP – 192) x 1 week  
<pid> This is used to indicate the higher layer protocol being used or indicates interworking with a  
certain type of telematic device. For example, 0x22 is for group 3 telefax, 0x24 is for voice  
telephone, 0x25 is for ERMES (European Radio Messaging System).  
<dcs> This is used to determine the way the information is encoded. Compressed text is not  
supported. Only GSM default alphabet, 8 bit data and UCS2 alphabet are supported.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
72  
 
   
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CSMP=<fo>, <vp>, <pid>,<dcs>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CSMP?  
+CSMP: 0,0,0,0  
OK  
Note: current values  
Note: No validity period <dcs>= PCCP437  
alphabet (8 bits Æ 7 bits)  
OK  
AT+CMPS=17,23,64,244  
Note: <vp> = 23 (2 hours, relative format)  
<dcs> = GSM 8 bits alphabet  
Note: Command correct  
Reminder: Enter <fo> value in decimal format  
Delete Message +CMGD  
Description:  
This command deletes one or several messages from preferred message storage (“BM” SMS CB ‘RAM  
storage’, “SM” SMSPP storage ‘SIM storage’ or “SR” SMS Status-Report storage).  
Refer to the Preferred Message Storage +CPMS command.  
Values:  
<index> If <DelFlag>=0  
(1-20) If the preferred message storage is “BM”  
Sim dependent integer values (in the range of SIM location number) if the preferred  
message storage is “SM” or “SR”.  
If <DelFlag> is > 0, <index> is ignored.  
<DelFlag>  
0
Delete message at location <index>.  
Delete All READ messages  
Delete All READ and SENT messages  
Delete All READ, SENT and UNSENT messages  
Delete All messages.  
1
2
3
4
Notes:  
If <DelFlag> is omitted, default value is used.  
When the preferred message storage is “SR”, as SMS status reports are assumed to have a “READ”  
status, if <DelFlag> is greater than 0, all SMS status reports will be deleted.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CMGD=<Index> [,<DelFalg>]  
Command  
Possible responses  
+CMTI:”SM”,3  
Note: New message received  
AT+CMGR=3  
Note: Read it  
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,  
“98/10/01,18:19:20+00” <CR><LF>  
Message received!  
Note: Unread message received from 0146290800 on the 01/10/1998 at 18H19m  
20s  
AT+CMGD=3  
Note: Delete it  
AT+CMGD=1,0  
OK  
Note: Message deleted  
OK  
Note: The message from the preferred message storage at the location 1 is deleted  
AT+CMGD=1,1  
AT+CMGD=1,2  
AT+CMGD=1,3  
AT+CMGD=1,4  
OK  
Note: All READ messages from the preferred message storage are deleted  
OK  
Note: All READ messages and SENT mobile originated messages are deleted  
OK  
Note: All READ, SENT and UNSENT messages are deleted  
OK  
Note: All messages are deleted  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
73  
 
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Service Center Address +CSCA  
Description:  
This command indicates the service center to which the message must be sent.  
The product has no default value for this address. If the application tries to send a message without  
having indicated the service center address, an error will be generated.  
Therefore, the application must indicate the SC address when initializing the SMS. This address is then  
permanently valid. The application may change it if necessary.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<sca> service center address  
Command Syntax: AT+CSCA=<sca>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CMGS= “+33146290800”<CR>  
Hello, how are you?<ctrl-Z>  
Note: Send a message  
+CMS ERROR: 330  
Note: service center unknown  
AT+CSCA=”0696741234”  
Note: Service center initialization  
AT+CMGS=”+33146290800”<CR>  
Happy Birthday !<ctrl-Z>  
Note:  
OK  
+CMGS: 1  
OK  
Note: Successful transmission  
Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB  
Description:  
This command selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME. This command is allowed in  
both PDU and text modes.  
Values:  
The <bm> parameter of +CNMI command controls the message indication.  
The activation of CBM reception (<mode>=0) can select only specific Message Indentifiers (list in  
<mids>) for specific Languages (list in <dcss>), but the deactivation stops any reception of CBMs  
(only AT+CSCB=1 is allowed).  
Message Identifiers (<mids> parameter) indicates the type of message identifiers for which the ME  
should listen.  
<dcss> Supported languages  
0 for German  
1 for English  
2 for Italian  
3 for French  
4 for Spanish  
5 for Dutch  
8 for Portuguese  
9 for Finnish  
10 for Norwegian  
11 for Greek  
12 for Turkish  
13 for Hungarian  
14 for Polish  
6 for Swedish  
7 for Danish  
32 for Czech  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CSCB= <mode>, [ <mids>, [ <dcss> ] ]  
Important Note: Test/read command AT+CSCB? is not supported.  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CSCB=0,”15-17,50,86”,” ”  
OK  
Note: Accept SMS-CB types, 15,16,17,50 and Note: CBMs can be received  
86 in any language  
+CBM: 10<CR><LF>  
00112233445566778899  
Note: CBM length of a received Cell Broadcast  
message (SMS-CB), CBM bytes in PDU mode  
AT+CSCB=1  
OK  
Note: Deactivate the reception of CBMs  
Note: CBM reception is completely stopped  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
74  
 
   
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM  
Description:  
This specific command is used to read the EF-CBMI SIM file.  
The EF-CBMI file is not used with the +CSCB command.  
The application should read this file (using AT+WCBM ?) and combine the Message Identifiers with  
those required by the application.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<mids> message identifiers  
Command Syntax: AT+WCBM= <mids>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WCBM=”10,100,1000,10000”  
OK  
Note : Write 4 messages identifiers in EFCBMI Note : CBMIs are stored in EF-CBMI  
AT+WCBM?  
Note : Read the CBMIs in EF-CBMI  
+WCBM=”10,100,1000,100000”  
OK  
Note : 4 CBMIs are stored in EF-CBMI  
Message Status Modification +WMSC  
Description:  
This command allows the manipulation of a message status. The accepted status changes are from  
READ to NOT READ and vice versa, and also from SENT to NOT SENT and vice versa.  
Values:  
<loc> Location number of the stored message <interger>  
<status> New status to be stored, as in the +CMGL command  
PDU Mode  
Text Mode  
0
1
2
3
“REC UNREAD”  
“REC READ”  
“STO UNSENT”  
“STO SENT”  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+WMSC= <loc>, <status>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CMGR=2  
+CMGR: “REC READ”,”+336290918”,,”99/05/01  
14:19:44+04” <CR><LF>  
Hello All of you!  
OK  
AT+WMSC=2,”REC  
UNREAD”  
AT+CMGR=2  
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”+336290918”,,”99/05/01  
14:19:44+04” <CR><LF>  
Hello All of you!  
OK  
Possible responses:  
OK  
If the location is valid  
+CMS ERROR: 321  
+CMS ERROR: 302  
If <loc> is invalid or free  
If the new <status> and the previous one are incompatible (1)  
Note:  
If all parameters are correct, the product overwrites the whole SMS in SIM.  
Only the first byte (Status byte) is changed.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
75  
 
   
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Message Overwriting +WMGO  
Description:  
The +CMGW command specifies a location in the SMS or Flash memory for the next SMS to be stored  
when the +CMGW indicates a message is ready to be stored. The defined location is used only once:  
+WMGO has to used again to perform another overwrite.  
Important Notes:  
If the external application specifies a free location and an incoming message is received before the  
AT+CMGW command occurs, the product may store the incoming message at the specified available  
location. If the user then issues an AT+CMGW command without changing the location with another  
AT+WMGO, the received message will be overwritten.  
The location number is not kept over a software reset.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<loc> Location number of the SIM record to write or overwrite. The number depends on the SIM or  
Flash memory capacity.  
Command Syntx: AT+WMGO= <loc>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPMS?  
+CPMS: “SM”,3,10,”SM”,3,10,”SM”,3,10  
Note: Check the storage area  
AT+CMGW=”+33146290800”<CR>  
Hello how are you?<ctrl-Z>  
Note: Write a message in text mode  
AT+WMGO=?  
+CMGW: 4  
OK  
Note: Message stored in index 4 in the SIM  
+WMGO: (1-10)  
OK  
Note: Possible values for the SIM  
AT+WMGO=4  
AT+CMGW=”+33146299704”<CR>  
You are overwritten<ctrl-Z>  
+CMGW: 4  
OK  
Note: New Message stored in index 4  
AT+WMGO?  
+WMGO: 4  
OK  
Note: The value was used, so re-initialization  
AT+WMGO=4  
OK  
AT+CPMS=”SM”,”ME,””SM”  
+CPMS: 3,10,0,99,3,10  
OK  
Note: Change the storage area from SIM to Flash  
AT+WMGO?  
AT+WMGO?  
+WMGO: (1-99)  
OK  
Note: Possible values for Flash  
+WMGO: 0  
OK  
Note: We changed the storage area, so the value  
was reinitialized  
AT+WMGO=999  
+CMS ERROR: 321  
Note: If the storage area is changed with the AT+CPMS command, the value of WMGO will be reset to  
zero.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
76  
 
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Change or Do Not Change SMS Status +WUSS  
Description:  
The +WUSS command allows the SMS Status to be kept at UNREAD after the +CMGR or +CMGL  
commands are used.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0 The SMS Status will change  
1 The SMS Status will not change  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+WUSS=<mode>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WUSS=?  
+WUSS: (0-1)  
OK  
AT+WUSS=1  
OK  
+CMTI: “SM”,10  
Note: SMS has been received in index 10  
AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:36:35+00”<CR><LF>  
Do you want to change state?  
OK  
AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:36:35+00”<CR><LF>  
Do you want to change state?  
OK  
Note: The state hasn’t been updated  
AT+WUSS=0  
OK  
+CMTI: ”SM”,11  
Note: SMS has been received in index 11  
AT+CMGR=11 +CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:56:55+00”<CR><LF>  
It is me again.  
OK  
AT+CMGR=11 +CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:56:55+00”<CR><LF>  
It is me again.  
OK  
Note: The state has been updated.  
AT+WUSS?  
+WUSS: 0  
OK  
AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR: “REC READ”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:56:55+00”<CR><LF>  
It is me again.  
OK  
Note: The state has been updated  
AT+WUSS?  
+WUSS: 0  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
77  
 
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Copy Messages +WMCP  
Description:  
This command copies the SMS from the SIM to the Flash or from the Flash to the SIM.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
From SIM to the Flash  
From the Flash to the SIM  
<loc>  
Location of the SMS to copy (mandatory for <mode>=1)  
If this location is not defined, all the SMS will be copied  
Note: The SMS copied will be placed in the first free location  
Syntax:  
Command Syntx: AT+WMCP=<mode>[,<loc>]  
Command  
AT+WMCP=?  
Possible responses  
+WMCP: 0,(1-12)  
+WMCP: 1,(1-99)  
OK  
Note: The location of the SMS that can be copied from the  
SIM to the Flash is 1 to 12 (maximum available in the SIM).  
The location of the SMS that can be copied from the Flash to  
the SIM is 1 to 99 (the maximum available in the Flash).  
+CPMS: “SM”,3,10,”ME”,0,99,”SM”,3,10  
OK  
AT+CPMS?  
Note: Read the SMS storage  
Note: Read, write...SMS from/to SIM. 3 SMS are stored in the  
SIM. 10 is the total memory available in SIM. No SMS in  
Flash.  
AT+CMGR=1  
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,  
“98/10/01,18:22:11+00”, <CR><LF>  
My test message: SMS in the SIM at location 1  
OK  
Note: Read the first SMS from the  
SIM  
AT+WMCP=0,1  
OK  
Note: Copy the SMS at location 1 in  
the SIM to the Flash  
AT+CPMS?  
+CPMS: “SM”,3,10,”ME”,0,99,”SM”,3,10  
OK  
Note: Read the SMS storage  
Note: Read, write...SMS from/to SIM. 3 SMS are stored in the  
SIM. 10 is the total memory available in SIM. No SMS in  
Flash.  
AT+CPMS=“ME”,”ME”,“ME”  
Note: Select ME for reading, ME for  
writing and ME for storing  
AT+CMGR=1  
+CPMS: 1,99,1,99,1,99  
OK  
+CMGR: “REC READ”,”0146290800”,  
“98/10/01,18:22:11+00”, <CR><LF>  
My test message: SMS in the SIM at location 1  
OK  
Note: Read the first SMS from the  
Flash  
AT+CMGW=”+33146290800”<CR>  
Other test message: SMS in  
the Flash at location 2  
<ctrl-Z>  
+CMGW: 2  
OK  
Note: Message stored in index 2in the Flash  
Note: Write a message in text mode  
AT+CPMS?  
+CPMS: “ME”,2,99,”ME”,2,99,”ME”,2,99  
OK  
Note: Read the SMS storage  
Note: Read, write...SMS from/to the Flash. 2 SMS are stored  
in the Flash.  
AT+WMCP=1,2  
OK  
Note: Copy the SMS at location 2 in  
the Flash to the SIM  
AT+CPMS=“SM”,”ME”,“SM”  
Note: Select SM for reading, ME for  
writing and SM for storing  
AT+CMGR=4  
+CPMS: 4,10,2,99,4,10  
OK  
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”+33146290800”,  
“98/10/01,8:22:11+00”,<CR><LF>  
Other test message: SMS in the Flash at  
location 2  
Note: Read the first SMS from the  
SIM  
OK  
Continued on the next page.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
78  
 
 
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands  
Command Syntx: AT+WMCP=<mode>[,<loc>] Continued  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPMS=”ME”  
Note: Select ME for reading  
AT+CMGD=0,4  
+CPMS: 2,99,2,99,4,10  
OK  
OK  
Note: Erase all the SMS stored in the  
Flash  
AT+CPMS?  
+CPMS: “ME”,0,99,”ME”,0,99,”SM”,4,10  
OK  
Note: Read the SMS storage  
AT+WMCP=0  
Note: No SMS is stored in the Flash  
OK  
Note: Copy all the SMS from the SIM  
to the Flash  
AT+CPMS?  
+CPMS: “ME”,4,99,”ME”,4,99,”SM”,4,10  
OK  
Note: Read the SMS storage  
Note: 4 SMS are stored in the Flash  
More Messages to Send +CMMS  
Description:  
This short message service-oriented AT command allows the link to be kept open while sending several  
short messages with only a short delay.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
Disable feature  
Keep link opened while messages are sent. If the delay between two messages exceeds 5  
seconds, the link is closed and the mode is reset to 0: the feaure is disabled.  
Keep link opened while messages are sent. If the delay between two messages exceeds 5  
seconds, the link is closed but the mode remains set to 2: the feaure is still enabled.  
2
Notes:  
IMPORTANT: Before sending the last SMS in the link, you must use the AT+CMSS=0  
command. This command will indicate that the FOLLOWING SMS will be the last one.  
The delay of 5 seconds complies with Rec 3GPP 27.005...3.5.6  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CMMS=<mode>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CMMS=0  
OK  
Note: Disable feature  
Note: Feature is disabled  
AT+CMMS=1  
OK  
Note: Enable feature 1 time  
AT+CMMS=2  
Note: Feature is enabled; link is open  
OK  
Note: Enable feature  
Note: Feature is enabled; link is open  
AT+CMMS?  
+CMMS: 2  
OK  
AT+CMMS=?  
+CMMS: (0-2)  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
79  
 
 
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands  
Chapter 10 – Supplementary  
Services Commands  
Call Forwarding +CCFC  
Description:  
This commands allows control of the "call forwarding" supplementary service.  
Values:  
<reason>  
0
1
2
3
4
5
Unconditional  
Mobile busy  
No reply  
Not reachable  
All call forwarding  
All conditional call forwarding  
<mode>  
0
1
2
3
4
Disable  
Enable  
Interrogate  
Registration  
Erasure  
<type> TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format) (default 145 when dialing string includes  
international access code character “+”; otherwise, 129).  
<class>  
1
2
3
4
5
Voice  
Data  
Fax  
Short Messages  
All classes  
Note: The combination of different classes is not supported, it will only result in the activation /  
deactivation / status request of all classes (7).  
In the case where the FDN phonebook is activated, the registration is restricted to the phone  
numbers written in the FDN.  
If <Class> parameter is not given in the command, 7 is used as the default value.  
<subaddr> not managed  
<satype> not managed  
<time>  
For <reason> = 2 (No reply), 4 (all call forwarding) and 5 (all conditional call forwarding),  
time to wait (1 to 30) in seconds before call is forwarded. Default value is 20.  
<status>  
0
1
not active  
active  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+CCFC= <reason>, <mode> [, <number> [,<type> [,<class>  
[,<subaddr>[,<satype>[,<time> ] ] ] ] ] ]  
Response syntax: +CCFC: <status>, <class1> [, <number>, <type> [,<subaddr>, <satype> [,<time> ] ]  
] [ <CR><LF>+CCFC: <status>, <class2> [, <number>, <type> [,<subaddr>, <satype>  
[,<time> ] ] ] [ … ] ]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CCFC=0,3,”0146290800”  
OK  
Note: Register to an unconditional call forwarding Note: Command valid  
AT+CCFC=0,2  
+CCFC:1,1,”0146290800”,129  
Note: Interrogate unconditional call forwarding  
Note: Call forwarding active for voice  
<CR><LF>+CCFC:1,2,”0146290802”,129  
Note: Call forwarding active for data  
<CR><LF>+CCFC:1,4,”0146290804”,129  
OK  
Note: Call forwarding active for fax  
AT+CCFC=0,4  
OK  
Note: Erase unconditional call forwarding  
Note: Command valid  
+CCFC responses are not sorted by <class> parameter, but only by the order of network response.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
80  
 
   
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands  
Call Barring +CLCK  
Description:  
This command allows control of the call barring supplementary service. Locking, unlocking or querying  
the status of call barring is possible for all classes or for a specific class, but not for a combination of  
some.  
Values:  
<fac>  
“AO”, “OI”, “OX”  
“AI”, “IR”  
barring outgoing calls  
barring incoming calls  
“AG”, “AC”, “AB  
barring all calls (<mode>=0 only)  
<mode>  
0
1
2
Unlocks the facility  
Locks the facility  
Query status  
<class>  
See description for the +CLCK command (Facility Lock) or +CCFC (Call forwarding).  
Note: A combination of different classes is not supported. It will only result in the  
activation/deactivation/status_request for all classes (7).  
<status>  
0
1
Not active  
Active  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CLCK= <fac>, <mode> [, <password> [, <class> ] ]  
Response Syntax: (for <mode>=2 and command successful)  
+CLCK: <status> [, <class1> [ <CR><LF>+CLCK: <status>, <class2> [… ] ]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CLCK=”AO”,1,1234  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
+CME ERROR: 16  
Note: Wrong password  
OK  
AT+CLCK=”AO”,0,5555  
AT+CLCK=”AO”,0,1234  
Note: Command valid  
Modify SS Password +CPWD  
Description:  
This command changes the supplementary service password.  
Values:  
<fac> See +CLCK command with only “P2” facility added (SIM PIN2).  
Note: Regardless of the specified facility, the change of password applies to barring all calls.  
<OldPassword>, (NewPassword> The password code is over 8 digits for P2 facility (4 to 8 digits)  
The password code is over 4 digits for other facilities (1 to 4 digits)  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CPWD=<fac>,<OldPassword>,<NewPassword>  
Command  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: Password changed  
+CME ERROR: 16  
Note: Wrong password  
OK  
AT+CPWD=”AO”,1234,5555  
Note: Change Call Barring password  
AT+CPWD=”AO”,1234,5555  
Note: Change password  
AT+CPWD=”AO”,5555,1234  
Note: Change password  
Note: Password changed  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
81  
 
   
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands  
Call Waiting +CCWA  
Description:  
This command controls the call waiting supplementary service.  
The product will send a +CCWA unsolicited result code when the call waiting service is enabled.  
Values:  
<n>: result code presentation status in the TA  
0
1
Disable  
Enable  
<mode>  
0
1
2
Disable  
Enable  
Query status  
<type>  
0
Type of address byte in integer format (refer to Rec GSM 04.08 [8] sub clause 10.5.4.7)  
<class>  
1
2
8
7
Voice  
Data  
Short Messages  
All classes (voice, data)  
Note: A combination of different classes is not supported. It will only result in the activation /  
deactivation / status request for all classes (7).  
<status>  
0
1
Not Active  
Active  
<alpha>: Optional string type alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding to the entry  
found in the ADN or FDN phonebook.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CCWA=<n>, [ <mode> [, <class> ] ]  
Response Syntax: (for <mode>=2 and command successful)  
+CCWA: <status> [, <class1> [ <CR><LF>+CCWA: <status>, <class2> [ … ] ]  
Unsolicited Result: +CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class> [ ,<alpha>]  
(when waiting service is  
enabled)  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CCWA=1,1,1  
OK  
Note: Enable call waiting for voice Note: Command valid  
calls  
AT+CCWA=1,2  
+CCWA:1,1  
Note: Interrogate call waiting  
OK  
Note: Call waiting active for voice calls  
+CCWA:”0146290800”,145,1,”FREDDY”  
Note: Number and name of the waiting voice call  
or  
+CCWA:”0146290800”,145,1,”8023459678FFFF” (UCS2 format)  
AT+CCWA=1,0,7  
OK  
Note: Erase call waiting  
Note: Command valid  
+CCWA:,,1  
Note: voice call waiting (no number)  
AT+CCWA?  
+CCWA: <n>  
OK  
AT+CCWA=?  
+CCWA: List of supported <n>  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
82  
 
 
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands  
Calling Line Identification Restriction +CLIR  
Description:  
This command controls the Calling Line Identification restriction supplementary service.  
Values:  
<n> Sets the line ID restriction for outgoing calls  
0
1
2
Presentation indicator is used according to the subscription of the CLIR service  
CLIR invocation  
CLIR suppression  
<m> Shows the subscriber CLIR status in the network  
0
1
2
3
4
CLIR not provisioned  
CLIR provisioned in permanent mode  
Unknown (no network…)  
CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted  
CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+CLIR=<n>  
Response syntax: +CLIR:<n>,<m>  
(for AT+CLIR ?)  
Command  
AT+CLIR=2  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
AT+CLIR ?  
+CLIR:<n>,<m>  
Note: Ask for current functionality OK  
Note: <n> and <m> as defined above  
Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP  
Description:  
This command controls the calling line identification presentation supplementary service. When  
presentation of the CLI (Calling Line Identification) is enabled (and calling subscriber allows), +CLIP  
response is returned after every RING (or +CRING) result code.  
Values:  
<n> Parameter sets/shows the result code presentation in the TA  
0
1
Disable  
Enable  
<m> parameter shows the subscriber CLIP service status in the network  
0
1
2
CLIP not provisioned  
CLIP provisioned  
Unknown (no network…)  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+CLIP=<n>  
Response syntax: +CLIP: <n>,<m> (as response to AT+CLIP)  
+CLIP: <number>, <type>[ ,<subaddr>, <satype>, <alpha> ] (for an incoming call,  
after each RING or +CRING indication)  
Possible responses  
Command  
AT+CLIP=1  
OK  
Note: Enable CLIP  
Note: CLIP is enabled  
AT+CLIP?  
+CLIP:<n>,<m>  
Note: Ask for current functionality  
OK  
Note: <n> and <m> defined as below  
RING  
Note: Incoming call  
+CLIP: “0146290800”,129,1,,,”FRED”  
Note: Incoming call with number and name presentation  
RING  
Note: Incoming call  
+CLIP: “0146290800”,129,1,, “8000204212FFFF”  
Note: Incoming call with number and name presentation  
(UCS2 format)  
AT+CLIP=0  
OK  
Note: Disable CLIP presentation  
Note: Command valid  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
83  
 
   
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands  
Connected Line Identification Presentation +COLP  
Description:  
This command controls the connected line identification presentation supplementary service - useful for  
call forwarding of the connected line.  
Values:  
<n> Parameter sets/shows the result code presentation status in the TA  
0
1
Disable  
Enable  
<m> Parameter shows the subscriber COLP service status in the network  
0
1
2
COLP not provisioned  
COLP provisioned  
Unknown (no network)  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+COLP=<n>  
Response syntax: +COLP: <n>,<m> (as response to AT+COLP?)  
+COLP: <number>,<type> [ ,<subaddr>, <satype>, <alpha> ]  
After ATD command, before OK or CONNECT <speed>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+COLP=1  
OK  
Note: Activate COLP  
Note: Command valid  
AT+COLP?  
+COLP:1,1  
Note: Ask for current  
functionality  
OK  
Note: COLP is enabled and provisioned  
ATD146290928;  
Note: Outgoing call  
+COLP:”0146290928”,129,,,”JOE”  
or  
+COLP:“0146290800”,129,1,,,”8000204212FFFF” (UCS2 format)  
OK  
Note: Connected outgoing line number and name presentation  
AT+COLP=0  
OK  
Note: Deactivate COLP  
Note: Command valid  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
84  
 
 
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands  
Advice of Charge +CAOC  
Description:  
This refers to the Advice of Charge supplementary service (GSM 02.24 and GSM 02.86), which enables  
the subscriber to obtain information on call cost. With <mode>=0, the command returns the current call  
meter value (CCM) from the modem (ME).  
If AOC is supported, the command can also enable unsolicited event reporting on CCM information.  
The unsolicited result code +CCCM: <ccm> is sent when the CCM value changes. Deactivation of  
unsolicited event reporting is performed with the same command.  
If AOC is supported, the Read command indicates whether unsolicited reporting is activated or not.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
2
Query CCM value  
Deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value  
Activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value  
<ccm>  
String type; three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal format (e.g., “00001E”  
corresponds to the decimal value 30); value is in home units and bytes are coded in a similar way  
as the ACMmax value in SIM  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT+CAOC= <mode>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CAOC=0  
+CAOC: “000A08”  
Note: Query CCM value  
OK  
Note: Display Current Call Meter value (CCM=2568)  
AT+CAOC=1  
OK  
Note: Deactivate unsolicited report of CCM value Note: CCM report deactivated  
AT+CAOC=2  
OK  
Note: Activate unsolicited report of CCM value  
Note: CCM report activated  
AT+CAOC ?  
+CAOC:<mode>  
Note: Request mode  
OK  
Note: Display unsolicited report mode (1 or 2)  
AT+CAOC=?  
+CAOC: (0-2)  
Note: Request supported modes  
OK  
Note: 0,1,2 modes supported  
Accumulated Call Meter +CACM  
Description:  
This command resets the Advice of Charge for accumulated call meter value in SIM file EFACM. The  
ACM contains the total number of home units for both the current and preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is  
required to reset the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.  
The Read command returns the current value of the ACM.  
The ACM value (entered or displayed) is in hexadecimal format with 6 digits.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<pin2 passwd> string type  
<acm value> string type coded as <ccm> under +CAOC  
Command Syntax: AT+CACM=<pin2 passwd>  
Possible Response: +CACM: <acm value>  
Command  
AT+CACM?  
Note: Request ACM value  
Possible responses  
+CACM: “000400”  
OK  
Note: Display ACM value (ACM=1024)  
AT+CACM= 1234  
OK  
Note: Request ACM reset, real PIN2 is “1234”  
AT+CACM= 0000  
Note: ACM value is reset  
+CME ERROR: 16  
Note: Request ACM reset with wrong PIN2 value Note: Incorrect password  
AT+CACM ?  
+CACM: “000000”  
Note: Request ACM value  
OK  
Note: Display ACM value (ACM = 0)  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
85  
 
   
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands  
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum +CAMM  
Description:  
The set command sets the Advice of Charge related to accumulated call meter maximum value in SIM  
file EFACMmax. ACMmax contains the maximum number of home units the subscriber is allowed to  
consume. When ACM (see +CACM) reaches ACMmax, calls are prohibited. SIM PIN2 is required to set  
the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.  
The Read command returns the current value of ACMmax.  
The ACMmax value (entered or displayed) is in hexadecimal format with 6 digits.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<ACMmax>  
String type coded as <ccm> under +CAOC. Value 0 disables ACMmax feature.  
<pin2 passwd> String type  
Command syntax: AT+CAMM:<ACMmax>,<pin2 passwd>  
Command  
Possible responses  
OK  
AT+CAMM=”000400”,1234  
Note: Request ACMmax update, PIN2 is “1234”  
AT+CAMM=”000400”,0000  
Note: Request ACMmax update, PIN2 is “1234”  
AT+CAMM ?  
Note: ACMmax updated to 1024  
+CME ERROR: 16  
Note: Incorrect password  
+CAMM: “000400”  
OK  
Note: Request ACMmax value  
Note: ACMmax = 1024  
Price Per Unit and Currency Table +CPUC  
Description:  
The set command sets the parameters for Advice of Charge related to price per unit and the currency  
table in SIM file EFPUCT. PUCT information can be used to convert the home units (as used in +CAOC,  
+CACM and +CAMM) into currency units. SIM PIN2 is required to set the parameters. If setting fails in  
an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned..  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<currency> String type  
<ppu> String type  
<pin2 passwd> String type  
Command syntax: AT+CPUC <currency>,<ppu>,<pin2 passwd>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPUC=”FFR”,”0.82”,1234  
Note: Request Currency and Price per unit update  
AT+CPUC=”FFR”,”0.82”,1111  
OK  
+ CME ERROR: 16  
Note: Request Currency and PPU update (wrong PIN2) Note: Incorrect password  
AT+CPUC?  
Note: Request Currency and Price  
+CPUC:”FFR”,”0.82”  
OK  
Note: Currency= “FFR”  
Price per unit= “0.82”  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
86  
 
   
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands  
Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD  
Description:  
This command manages call hold and multiparty conversation (conference call). Calls can be put on  
hold, recovered, released or added to a conversation.  
Values:  
<n>  
0
1
Release all held calls or set User Determined User Busy (UDUB) for a waiting call.  
Release all active calls (if any exist) and accepts the other (held or waiting) call.  
1x Release a specific call X (active, held or waiting)  
Place all active calls (if any exist) on hold and accepts the other (held or waiting) call.  
2x Place all active calls on hold except call X with which communication is supported.  
2
3
4
Adds a held call to the conversation.  
Connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriber from both calls (Explicit Call Transfer).  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+CHLD=< n >  
Command Possible responses  
AT+CHLD=<n> OK  
Note: If n is within the defined values  
AT+CHLD=?  
+CHLD: (0-4, 11-17, 21-27)  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
87  
 
 
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands  
List Current Calls +CLCC  
Description:  
This command returns a list of current calls.  
Values:  
<idx> integer type, call identification as described in GSM 02.30  
<dir> direction of the call  
0 mobile originated (MO) call  
1 mobile terminated (MT) call  
<stat> (state of the call):  
0 active  
1 held  
2 dialing (MO call)  
3 alerting (MO call)  
4 incoming (MT call)  
5 waiting (MT call)  
<mode> (teleservice):  
0 voice  
1 data  
2 fax  
9 unknown  
<mpty>  
0 call is not one of multiparty (conference) call parties  
1 call is one of multiparty (conference) call parties  
<number> string type phone number in format specified by <type>  
<type>  
type of address byte in integer format  
<alpha>  
optional string type alphanumeric representation of <number>  
corresponding to the entry found in phonebook. (for UCS2 format see commands examples  
+CLIP, +CCWA or +COLP)  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+CLCC  
Response syntax: OK (if no calls are available)  
Else:  
+CLCC: <id1>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>[,<number>,<type> [<alpha>] ]  
[<CR><LF>  
+CLCC: <id2>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>[,<number>,<type>[<alpha>] ] [. . . ] ] ]  
<CR><LF>  
OK  
Command  
RING  
Possible responses  
Note: Incoming call  
AT+CLCC  
+CLCC: 1,1,4,0,0,”0146294079”,129  
OK  
ATA  
OK  
Note: Answering the call  
AT+CLCC  
+CLCC: 1,1,1,0,0,”0146294079”,129  
OK  
ATD0146299704  
Note: Outgoing Call  
AT+CLCC  
OK  
+CLCC: 1,0,2,0,0,”0146294079”,129  
Note: Before the phone called is ringing OK  
AT+CLCC  
+CLCC: 1,0,3,0,0,”0146294079”,129  
Note: The phone called is ringing  
OK  
AT+CLCC  
Note: The call is being answered  
+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,”0146294079”,129  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
88  
 
 
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands  
Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN  
Description:  
This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated notifications.  
Values:  
<n> Parameter sets/shows the +CSSI result code presentation status  
0 disable  
1 enable  
<m> Parameter sets/shows the +CSSU result code presentation status  
0 disable  
1 enable  
<code1>  
0 unconditional call forwarding is active  
1 some of the conditional call forwardings are active  
4 closed User Group call, with CUG <index>  
5 outgoing calls are barred  
6 incoming calls are barred  
7 CLIR suppression rejected  
<code2>  
0 this is a forwarded call (MT call setup)  
1 closed User Group call, with CUG <index>  
2 call has been put on hold (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)  
3 call has been retrieved (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)  
4 multiparty call entered (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)  
5 call on hold has been released (during a voice call)  
7 call is being connected (alerting) with the remote party in alerting state in Explicit Call Transfer  
operation (during a voice call)  
8 call has been connected with the other remote party in Explicit Call Transfer operation (during a  
voice call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)  
<index>  
<number> String type phone number  
<type> Type of address  
Command syntax:AT+CSSN= <n>, <m>  
When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after a mobile  
Closed User Group index  
Syntax:  
originated call setup, intermediate result code +CSSI:<code1>[,<index>] is sent  
before any other MO call setup result codes.  
When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received during a call,  
unsolicited result code +CSSU:<code2>[,<index>[,<number>,<type>]] is sent.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
89  
 
 
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands  
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data +CUSD  
Description:  
The USSD supplementary service is described in GSM 02.90. It is based on sequences of digits which  
may be entered by a mobile user with a handset. A sequence entered is sent to the network which  
replies with an alphanumerical string, for display only, or for display plus request for the next sequence.  
This command is used to:  
Enable or disable the CUSD indication sent to the application by the product when an incoming  
USSD is received  
Send and receive USSD strings  
Values:  
<n>  
0 Disable the result code presentation  
1 Enable the result code presentation  
2 Cancel session (not applicable to read command response)  
<m>  
0 no further user action required (network initiated USSD-Notify, or no further information needed  
after mobile initiated operation)  
1 further user action required (network initiated USSD-Request, or further information needed after  
mobile initiated operation)  
2 USSD terminated by network  
4 Operation not supported  
<str>is network string, converted in the selected character set  
<dcs> is the data coding scheme received (GSM TS 03.38).  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+CUSD = <n> [ ,<str> [ <dcs> ] ]  
Note: In case of enabled presentation, a +CUSD (as direct answer to a send  
USSD) is then indicated with:  
+CUSD: <m> [,<str>,<dcs> ]  
Command Syntax To Send and Receive USSD: AT+CUSD= <n> [,<str> [,<dcs>]]  
Note: Please be aware that the send USSD command needs the user to re-enter  
the <n> parameter!  
Values for Send and Receive USSD  
<str> The USSD string to be sent.  
<dcs>The default alphabet and the UCS2 alphabet are supported.  
When the product sends a USSD, an OK response is first returned, the  
intermediate +CUSD indication comes subsequently. In case of error, a +CUSD:  
4 indication is returned.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
90  
 
 
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands  
Closed User Group +CCUG  
Description:  
The Closed User Group Supplementary Service enables subscribers to form closed user groups with  
restricted access (both access to and from).  
The CUG supplementary service is described in GSM 02.85. This service is provided on prior  
arrangement with the service provider. Subscription options should be selected at implementation.  
The +CCUG command is used to:  
Activate/deactivate the control of CUG information for all following outgoing calls  
Select a CUG index  
Suppress outgoing access (OA). OA allows a member of a CUG to place calls outside the CUG  
Suppress the preferential CUG. Preferential is the default CUG used by the network when it does  
not receive an explicit CUG index  
Values:  
<n>  
0
1
Disable CUG mode (default)  
Enable CUG mode  
<index>  
0-9  
CUG index (0 default),  
Preferred CUG  
10  
<info>  
0
1
2
3
No information (default)  
Suppress OA  
Suppress preferential CUG  
Suppress OA and preferential CUG  
Note: To activate the control of the CUG information by call, add [G] or [g] to the ATD command.  
Index and info values will be used.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT+CCUG = <n> [ ,<index> [ <info> ] ]  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
91  
 
 
Chapter 11 – Data Commands  
Chapter 11 – Data Commands  
Using AT Commands During a Data Connection  
To use AT Commands during a data connection (such as while the product is in online mode), it is necessary either to  
switch to offline mode, or to use the +WMUX command to enable Commands / Data multiplexing.  
Switch from Online to Offline Mode  
To switch from online mode to offline mode, the “+++” sequence must be sent. Following this, the product gets back  
to offline mode with an “OK” response, and an AT command can be sent.  
Note: The “+++” sequence only works with the +ICF command using the following settings:  
8 data bits, with no parity  
7 data bits, with even parity  
Switch from Offline to Online Mode  
See the ATO command description.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
92  
 
   
Chapter 11 – Data Commands  
Bearer Type Selection +CBST  
Description:  
This command applies to both outgoing and incoming data calls, but in a different way. For an outgoing  
call, the two parameters (e.g., <speed> and <ce>) apply; whereas, for an incoming call, only the <ce>  
parameter applies.  
Notes:  
For incoming calls, if <ce> is set to T, only and the network offers NT only or vice versa. Then the  
call is released.  
The values 2 and 3 for the <ce> parameter are equivalent to the former values of 100 and 101.  
Those values are managed for compatibility purposes, but they should no longer be used in the  
new code (2 as former 100 and 3 as former 101).  
Values:  
<speed>  
0 (default)  
Autobauding (modem type: none)  
1
2
300 bps  
1200 bps  
(modem type: V.21)  
(modem type: V.22)  
3
1200/75 bps (modem type: V.23)  
4
5
6
7
2400 bps  
2400 bps  
4800 bps  
9600 bps  
Specific  
(modem type: V.22bis)  
(modem type: V.26ter)  
(modem type: V.32)  
(modem type: V.32)  
8
12  
14(*)  
65  
66  
68  
70  
71  
75(*)  
9600 bps  
1400 bps  
300 bps  
1200 bps  
2400 bps  
4800 bps  
9600 bps  
(modem type: V.34)  
(modem type: V.34)  
(modem type: V.110)  
(modem type: V.110)  
(modem type: V.110)  
(modem type: V.110)  
(modem type: V.110)  
14400 bps (modem type: V.110)  
(*) This speed configures data and fax 14.4 kbps bearers.  
<name> No data compression is provided and only asynchronous modem is supported (<name> = 0).  
<ce>  
Connection element  
0
Transparent only  
1 (default)  
2
3
Non transparent only  
Transparent preferred  
Non transparent preferred  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+CBST= <speed>, <name>, <ce>  
Command  
AT+CBST=?  
Note: Test command  
Possible responses  
+CBST: (0-8,65,66,68,70,71),(0),(0-3)  
OK  
Note: Data 14,4 kbps not supported  
AT+CBST=?  
+CBST: (0-  
Note: Test command  
8,12,14,65,66,68,70,71,75),(0),(0-3)  
OK  
Note: Data 14,4 kbps not supported  
AT+CBST=7,0,1  
Note: Ask for a bearer  
AT+CBST?  
OK  
Note: Bearer supported  
+CBST:7,0,1  
OK  
Note: Current values  
AT+CBST=81,0,0  
Note: Command valid  
+CME ERROR: 4  
Note: Ask for a bearer  
Note: Bearer not supported  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
93  
 
 
Chapter 11 – Data Commands  
Select Mode +FCLASS  
Description:  
This command puts the product into a particular operating mode (data or fax).  
Values:  
<n>  
0 Data  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT+FCLASS= <n>  
Command  
AT+FCLASS=?  
Note: Test command  
Possible responses  
+FCLASS: (0)  
OK  
Note: Fax class 2 not supported  
AT+FCLASS=?  
+FCLASS: (0)  
Note: Test command  
OK  
AT+FCLASS=0  
OK  
Note: Data mode requested  
Note: Command valid  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
+FCLASS:  
AT+FCLASS?  
OK  
Note: Current value  
Note: Command valid  
Service Reporting Control +CR  
Description:  
This command enables a more detailed type of service reporting in the case of incoming or outgoing  
data calls. Before sending the CONNECT response to the application, the product will specify the type  
of data connection that has been set up.  
These report types are:  
+CR: ASYNC  
For asynchronous transparent  
+CR: REL ASYNC For asynchronous non-transparent  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<mode>  
0 Disable extended reports  
1 Enable extended reports  
Command syntax: AT+CR=<mode>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CR=0  
OK  
Note: Extended reports disabled  
Note: Command valid  
AT+CR=1  
OK  
Note: Extended reports enabled  
AT+CR?  
Note: Command valid  
+CR: 1  
OK  
AT+CR=?  
+CR: (0,1)  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
94  
 
   
Chapter 11 – Data Commands  
Cellular Result Codes +CRC  
Description:  
This command shows more detailed ring information for an incoming call (voice or data). Instead of the  
string “RING”, an extended string is used to indicate which type of call is ringing (e.g. +CRING: VOICE).  
These extended indications are:  
+CRING: ASYNC  
+CRING: REL ASYNC  
+CRING: VOICE  
for asynchronous transparent  
for asynchronous non-transparent  
for normal speech.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<mode>  
0 Disable extended reports  
1 Enable extended reports  
Command syntax: AT+CRC=<mode>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CRC=0  
OK  
Note: Extended reports disabled  
Note: Command valid  
AT+CRC=1  
OK  
Note: Extended reports enabled  
AT+CRC?  
Note: Command valid  
+CRC: 1  
OK  
AT+CRC=?  
+CRC: (0,1)  
OK  
DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR  
Description:  
This parameter controls whether or not the extended-format “+ILRR:<rate>” information text is  
transmitted from the DCE to the DTE. The <rate> reported represents the current (negotiated or  
renegotiated) DTE-DCE rate.  
If enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted in an incoming or outgoing data call, after any  
data compression report, and before any final result code (CONNECT).  
Values:  
<value>  
0 Disable local port rate report  
1 Enable local port rate report  
<rate> Can take the following values: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200  
Kbps.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+ILRR = <value>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+ILRR=0  
OK  
Note: Local port rate report disabled Note: Command valid  
AT+ILRR=1 OK  
Note: Local port rate report enabled Note: Command valid  
AT+ILRR?  
+ILRR: 1  
OK  
AT+ILRR=?  
+ILRR: (0,1)  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
95  
 
   
Chapter 11 – Data Commands  
Radio Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP  
Description:  
This command changes the radio link protocol parameters used for non transparent data transmission.  
Values:  
Value:  
<iws>  
Range:  
0-61  
Description:  
Down window size, (default is 61)  
<mws>  
<T1>  
0-61  
Up window size, (default is 61)  
40-255  
1-255  
0-1  
Acknowledgement timer in units of 10ms, (default is 48)  
Retransmission attempts, (default is 6)  
<N2>  
<ver>  
Version number  
0
1
V42bis is not supported  
V42bis is supported  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT+CRLP=<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>, <ver>  
Command  
AT+CRLP=?  
Note: Test command  
Possible responses  
+CRLP: (0-61),(0-61),(40-255),(1,255),(0)  
OK  
Note: V42bis not supported  
+CRLP: (0-61),(0-61),(40-255),(1,255),(0,1)  
OK  
AT+CRLP=?  
Note: Test command  
Note: V42bis supported  
AT+CRLP=61,61,48,6,0  
Note: Set new parameters  
AT+CRLP?  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
AT+CRLP: 61,61,48,6,0  
Note: Command valid  
Note: Current values  
Other Radio Link Parameters +DOPT  
Description:  
This command modifies some supplementary radio link protocol parameters.  
Values:  
<reset_allowed>  
0
1
Data communication is hung up in case of bad radio link.  
Default. Data communication continues in case of bad radio link (possible loss of data)  
<dtx_allowed>  
0
1
Normal mode  
Default. Economic battery mode (not supported by all networks)  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+DOPT=<reset_allowed>,<dtx_allowed>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+DOPT=1  
OK  
Note: Set new parameters (2nd value is the default)  
AT+DOPT+?  
Note: Command valid  
(0,1),(0,1)  
Note: Test command  
OK  
Note: DTX is supported  
AT+DOPT=1,1  
OK  
Note: Set new parameters  
Note: Command valid  
AT+DOPT?  
1,1  
Note: Current values  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
96  
 
   
Chapter 11 – Data Commands  
Select Data Compression %C  
Description:  
This command enables or disables data compression negotiation if this feature is supported on the  
product.  
Values:  
<n>  
0
2
no compression (default)  
V42bis compression if supported  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT%C<n>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT%C0  
OK  
Note: Command  
Note: Feature supported  
AT%C2  
OK  
Note: Command  
AT%C?  
Note: V42bis supported  
2
Note: Current value  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
V42bis Data Compression +DS  
Description:  
This command enables or disables V.42bis data compression if this feature is supported on the product.  
Note that the product allows only the MNP2 protocol.  
Values:  
< dir > Specifies the desired direction(s) of operation of the data compression function; from the  
DTE point of view, (default is 3)  
0 Negotiated … no compression  
1 Transmit only  
2 Receive only  
3 Both directions, accept any direction. Default.  
< neg > Specifies whether or not the DCE should continue to operate if the desired result is not  
obtained, (default is 0)  
0 Do not disconnect if V.42 bis is not negotiated by the remote DCE as specified in <dir>.  
Default.  
1 Disconnect if V.42 bis is not negotiated by the remote DCE as specified in <dir>  
< P1 > Specifies the maximum number of dictionary entries that should be negotiated,  
Range is 512 to 2048. Default is 2048.  
< P2 > Specifies the maximum string length to be negotiated. Range is 6 to 250. Default is 20.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT+DS=[[<dir>][,[<neg>][,[<P1>][,[<P2>]]]]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+DS=?  
+DS: (0-3),(0,1),(512-2048),(6-250)  
Note: Test command  
AT+DS=3,0,2048,250  
Note: Set new parameters  
AT+DS?  
OK  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
+DS: 3,0,2048,20  
OK  
Note: Current values  
Note: Command valid  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
97  
 
   
Chapter 11 – Data Commands  
V42bis Data Compression Report +DR  
Description:  
This command determines whether or not the use of V42bis is allowed for an incoming or outgoing data  
call, if this feature is provided by the product. The intermediate result code represents current DCE-DCE  
data compression type. The format of this result code is as follows:  
+DR: NONE  
+DR: V42B  
Data compression is not in use  
Rec. V.42 bis is in use in both directions  
Rec. V.42 bis is in use in receive direction only  
Rec. V.42 bis is in use in transmit direction only  
+DR: V42B RD  
+DR: V42B TD  
The +DR intermediate result code, if enabled, is issued before the final result code, before the +ILRR  
intermediate report and after the service report control +CR.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<status>  
State of the V42bis  
Disable. Default value.  
Enable  
0
1
Command syntax: AT+DR=<status>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+DR=?  
+DR: (0-1)  
Note: Test command  
OK  
AT+DR=1  
OK  
Note: Reporting enabled  
AT+DR?  
Note: Command valid  
+DR: 1  
Note: Current value  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
Select Data Error Correcting Mode \N  
Description:  
If this feature is provided by the product, this command controls the preferred error correcting mode for  
a data connection. It can only be used for transparent data transmission.  
If the MNP2 feature is provided, the product authorizes MNP error correction mode.  
Values:  
<n>  
0
5
Default. Disables error correction mode  
Selects MNP error correction mode  
Note: +E prefixed commands of V.25 ter are not used.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT\N<n>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT\N0  
OK  
Note: no error correction  
AT\N?  
0
Note: Current value  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
AT\N4  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
98  
 
   
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands  
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25  
Commands  
Important  
All commands described hereafter will to the currently selected (and used) UART.  
Fixed DTE Rate +IPR  
Description:  
This commands specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands.  
Notes:  
The serial autobauding feature is supported and covers the following serial speeds only:  
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 bps. Beyond those serial speeds, proper operation of  
the modem is not guaranteed.  
Any AT command issued by the DTE must start with both capital ‘A’ and ‘T’ (or ‘/’) or both lower  
case ‘a’ and ‘t’ (or ‘/’); otherwise, the DCE may return some garbage characters and become  
desynchronized. Should this happen, the DTE simply issues ‘AT\r’ (at 2400 or 4800 bauds) once  
or twice or just ‘AT’ (at 9600 bauds) to resynchronize the modem.  
The DTE waits for 1ms after receiving the last character of the AT response (which is always ‘\n’  
or 0x0A) to send a new AT command at either the same rate or a new rate. Should this delay be  
ignored, the DCE can become desynchronised. Once again, sending ’AT\r’ once or twice or just  
‘AT’ causes the DCE to recover.  
Caution: When starting up, if autobauding is enabled and no AT command has yet been received, the  
product sends all unsolicited responses (like RING) at 9600 bauds.  
Values:  
<value> Baud rates that can be used by the DCE  
0
Enables autobauding  
300  
600  
1200  
2400  
4800  
9600  
19200  
38400  
57600  
115200  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+IPR=<value>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+IPR?  
+IPR: 9600  
OK  
Note: Current rate is 9600 bps  
AT+IPR=?  
+IPR: (0,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200), (300,600,1200)  
OK  
Note: Possible values, according to V25ter Recommendation:  
The first set of values indicates the range of auto-detectable baud rates (including  
0). The second set of values indicates the baud rates supported by the DCE but not  
auto-detectable.  
AT+IPR=38400 OK  
Note: Disable autobauding and set rate to 38400 bps  
OK  
Note: Enable autobauding  
AT+IPR=0  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
99  
 
   
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands  
DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF  
Description:  
This command determines the local serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing that the  
DCE uses.  
Values:  
<format>  
0
Autodetect (not supported)  
1
8 Data 2 Stop (supported)  
<parity> parameter is ignored  
2
3
4
5
6
8 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop (supported)  
If no <parity> provided, 3 is used by default as <parity> value  
8 Data 1 Stop (supported)  
<parity> parameter is ignored  
7 Data 2 Stop (supported)  
<parity> parameter is ignored  
7 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop (supported)  
If no <parity> provided, 3 is used by default as <parity> value  
7 Data 1 Stop (supported)  
<parity> parameter is ignored  
<parity>  
0
1
2
3
4
Odd  
(supported)  
(supported)  
(supported)  
(supported)  
(supported)  
Even  
Mark  
Space  
None  
Note: All character framing formats settings of the serial interface (i.e., 801, 8E1, 8S1, 8N1, 7N1, 7O1,  
7E1, 7S1 and 7N2) are supported on autobauding operation.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT+ICF= <format>[, <parity>]  
Command  
AT+ICF?  
Possible responses  
+ICF: 3,4  
OK  
Note: Current values  
+ICF: (1-6),(0-4)  
OK  
AT+ICF=?  
Note: Possible values  
AT+ICF=2,0  
OK  
Note: New values  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
100  
 
 
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands  
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control +IFC  
Description:  
This command is controls the operation of local flow control between the DTE and DCE.  
Values:  
< DCE_by_DTE >  
0 none  
(supported)  
1 Xon/Xoff local circuit 103  
2 RTS  
(not supported)  
(supported)  
3 Xon/Xoff global on circuit 103  
(not supported)  
Important Note: When this parameter is set to 2 (DTE invokes flow control through RTS) DCE  
behaviour is as follows:  
If the DCE has never detected RTS in the high (or ON) condition since startup then it ignores  
RTS as it assumes that this signal is not connected.  
As soon as the DCE detects RTS high the signal acts on it. Therefore subsequent RTS  
transition to OFF will prevent the DCE from sending any further data in both online and  
offline modes.  
This behavior allows the user to use the default settings (hardware flow control) and leave  
RTS disconnected. In the case where RTS is connected and is high at least once, it acts on  
the DCE.  
< DTE_by_DCE >  
0 none  
(supported)  
1 Xon/Xoff circuit 104  
2 CTS  
(not supported)  
(supported)  
Note: When this parameter is set to 0 (none), then CTS is kept high all the time.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+IFC=<DCE_by_DTE>,<DTE_by_DCE>  
Command  
AT+IFC?  
Possible responses  
+IFC: 2,2  
OK  
Note: Current values  
+IFC: (0,2),(0,2)  
OK  
AT+IFC=?  
Note: Possible values  
AT+IFC=0,0  
OK  
Note: New values  
Set DCD Signal &C  
Description:  
This commands controls the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal.  
Values:  
<n>  
0
1
DCD always on  
DCD matches the state of the remote modem’s data carrier  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT&C <n>  
Command  
AT&C0  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: DCD always on  
Note: Command valid  
AT&C1  
OK  
Note: DCD matches state of the remote Note: Command valid  
modem’s data carrier  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
101  
 
   
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands  
Set DTR Signal &D  
Description:  
This commands controls the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal.  
Values:  
<n>  
0
1
2
The DTR signal is ignored  
Modem switches from data to command mode when DTR switches from ON to OFF  
Upon DTR switch from ON to OFF, the call is released  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT&D<n>  
Command  
AT&D0  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: The DTR signal is ignored  
Note: Command valid  
AT&D1  
OK  
Note: Modem switches from data to command mode when  
DTR switches from ON to OFF  
Note: Command valid  
AT&D2  
OK  
Note: Upon DTR switch from ON to OFF, the call is released  
Note: Command valid  
Set DSR Signal &S  
Description:  
This commands controls the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal.  
Values:  
<n>  
0
1
DSR always on  
DSR off in command mode. DSR on in data mode.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT&S<n>  
Command  
AT&S0  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: DSR always on  
Note: Command valid  
AT&S1  
OK  
Note: DSR off in command mode, DSR on in data mode Note: Command valid  
Back to Online Mode O  
Description:  
If a connection has been established and the ME is in command mode, this command allows you to  
return to online data mode.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters  
Command syntax: ATO  
Command  
Possible responses  
ATO  
OK  
Return from offline mode to online mode  
Result Code Suppression Q  
Description:  
This command determines whether the mobile equipment sends result codes or not.  
Values:  
<n>  
0
1
DCE transmit result codes  
Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: ATQ<n>  
Command  
ATQ0  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: DCE transmits result codes  
Note: Command valid  
ATQ1  
Note: No response  
Note: Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
102  
 
       
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands  
DCE Response Format V  
Description:  
This command determines the DCE response format, with or without header characters <CR><LF>.  
Result codes are provided as numeric or verbose.  
Values:  
<n>=1  
<n>=0  
Information  
responses  
<text><CR><LF>  
<CR><LF>  
<text><CR><LF>  
Result codes  
<numeric code><CR> <CR><LF>  
<verbose code><CR><LF>  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: ATV<n>  
Command  
Possible responses  
ATV0  
0
Note: DCE transmits limited headers and trailers and Note: Command is valid (0 means OK)  
numeric result codes  
ATV1  
OK  
Note: DCE transmits full headers and trailers and  
verbose response text  
Note: Command valid  
Default Configuration Z  
Description:  
Values:  
This command restores the configuration profile. Any call is released.  
No parameters  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: ATZ  
Command Possible responses  
ATZ  
OK  
Note: Command valid  
Save Configuration &W  
Description:  
This command writes the active configuration to a non-volatile memory (EEPROM). For description of  
the stored parameters, refer to Appendix A.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters  
Command syntax: AT&W  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT&W  
OK  
Note: Writes current configuration to EEPROM Note: Command valid  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
103  
 
     
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands  
Auto-Tests &T  
Description:  
This command runs various auto-tests.  
Values:  
<n>  
0
Perform software auto-tests  
The response will be OK if no software problem is detected (EEPROM, RAM, and ROM  
checksums); otherwise, a simple ERROR response is sent.  
1
2
Perform the audio loop test (close)  
This is used to validate the audio loop (microphone to speaker)  
Stop the audio loop test (open)  
This is used to validate the audio loop (microphone to speaker)  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT&T<n>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT&T0  
OK  
Note: Perform software auto-tests  
Note: No software problem detected, all checksums are  
correct  
AT&T1  
OK  
Note: Do the audio loop test (close)  
Note: Command valid  
AT&T2  
OK  
Note: Stop the audio loop test (open) Note: Command valid  
Echo E  
Description:  
This command is used to determine whether or not the modem echoes characters received by an  
external application (DTE).  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<n>  
0
1
Characters are not echoed  
Characters are echoed  
Command syntax: ATE<n>  
Command  
Possible responses  
ATE0  
OK  
Note: Characters are not echoed  
Note: Done  
ATE1  
OK  
Note: Characters are echoed  
Note: Done  
Restore Factory Settings &F  
Description:  
This command is used to restore the factory settings from EEPROM.  
It only restores the parameters that can be found in the Parameters Storage table with column AT&F  
checked. Those parameters are restored in RAM and in E2P, overwriting the profile set with AT&W.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<n>  
0
Restore factory settings  
Note: No other value is supported.  
Command syntax:AT&F<n>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT&F  
OK  
Note: Ask for restoring the factory settings Note: Done  
AT&F0 OK  
Note: Ask for restoring the factory settings Note: Done  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
104  
 
     
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands  
Display Configuration &V  
Description:  
This command is used to display the modem configuration.  
Values:  
<n>  
0
Displays the modem configuration in RAM. Default value if no parameter provided.  
1
2
Displays the modem configuration in EEPROM.  
Displays the modem factory configuration.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT&V<n>  
The parameters displayed are the following:  
Q: val 1, V: val 2, S0: val 3, S2: val 4, S3: val 5, S4: val 6, S5: val 7,  
+CR: val 8, +CRC: val 9, +CMEE: val 10, +CBST: val 11,  
+SPEAKER: val 12, +ECHO: val 13, &C: val 14, &D: val 15, %C: val 16,  
+IPR: val 17, +ICF: val 18, +IFC: val 19  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT&V  
Note: Display active  
parameters in RAM  
Q:0 V:1 S0:000 S2:043 S3:013 S4:010 S5:008  
+CR:0 +CRC:0 +CMEE:0 +CBST:0,0,1  
+SPEAKER:0 +ECHO:0,0 &C:1 &D:2 %C:0  
+IPR:9600 +ICF:3,4 +IFC:2,2  
OK  
Note: Done  
For Echo the first value corresponds to Echo cancellation 1.  
Request Identification Information I  
Description:  
This command causes the product to transmit one or more lines of specific information text.  
Values:  
<n>  
0
Displays manufacturer followed by model identification. Equivalent to +CGMI and +CGMM.  
Displays revision identification. Equivalent to +CGMR.  
3
4
Displays modem configuration in RAM. Equivalent to &V0.  
5
6
7
Displays modem configuration in EEPROM. Equivalent to &V1.  
Displays modem data features. Lists the supported data rates, data modes, and fax classes.  
Displays modem voice features.  
Other values: OK string will be sent back.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: ATI<n>  
Command  
Possible responses  
ATI0  
WAVECOM MODEM  
900P  
Note: Manufacturer and model  
identifications  
OK  
Note: GSM 900 MHz primary band  
ATI3  
657_09gg.Q2406B 2015268 100506 17:01  
Note: Revision identification  
OK  
Note: Software release 6.57, generated on the 5th of October  
2006  
ATI6  
DATA RATES:  
Note: Modem data features  
AUTOBAUD,300,1200,1200/75,2400,4800,9600,14400  
DATA MODES: T/NT,ASYNCHRONOUS  
OK  
Note: Done  
ATI7  
SPEECH CODINGS: FR,EFR,HR,AMR  
Note: Modem voice features  
OK  
Note: Done  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
105  
 
   
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands  
Multiplexing Mode +WMUX  
Description:  
This command manages the data/AT commands in multiplexing mode. See Appendix B for the  
Data/Commands multiplexing protocol description.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
Multiplexing disabled. When the product is online (data communication in progress), no AT  
command can be used (default).  
1
Multiplexing enabled. Data flows and AT commands are multiplexed while in online mode (data  
communication in progress).  
Note: The Mulitplexing mode is available to only one UART. If this mode is available on UART1  
and the AT+WMUX=1 command is sent through UART2, the multiplexing mode will be  
available on UART2 and disabled on UART1.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WMUX=<mode>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WMUX=?  
+WMUX: (0-1)  
OK  
AT+WMUX?  
+WMUX: 0  
OK  
Note: Data/Commands multiplexing disabled  
AT+WMUX=1  
OK  
Note: Enable Data/Commands multiplexing  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
106  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Chapter 13 – Specific AT  
Commands  
Cell Environment Description +CCED  
Description:  
This command can be used by the application to retrieve the parameters of the main cell and of up to  
six neighboring cells.  
There are two possible methods for the external application to determine these cell parameters:  
On request by the application  
Automatically by the product every 5 seconds.  
Automatic mode is not supported during registration.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
2
One shot requested  
Automatic shots requested  
Stop automatic shots  
<requested dump>  
1
Main Cell:  
If the Cell Identity is available  
MCC, MNC, LAC, CI, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev, RxLev Full, RxLev Sub, RxQual,  
RxQual Full, RxQual Sub,Idle TS  
If the Cell Identity is not available  
MCC, MNC, LAC, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev, RxLev Full, RxLev Sub, RxQual,  
RxQual Full, RxQual Sub,Idle TS  
2
Neighbor1 to Neighbor6:  
If the Cell Identity is available  
MCC, MNC, LAC, CI, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev  
If the Cell Identity is not available  
MCC, MNC, LAC,, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev  
4
8
Main Cell Timing Advance  
Main cell RSSI indications (RxLev) in a range from 0 to 31  
16 <requested dump>=1 + <requested dump>=2 + <requested dump>=4 + Neighbor1 to  
Neighbor6 Timing Advance (only available for mode=0) Neighbor1 to Neighbor6 Timing  
Advance are only available in Idle Mode.  
<CsqStep> Indicates the step required for RSSI indications between 2 + CSQ unsolicited response.  
The range of this step is [1,5]. Default value: 1. If this field is not indicated, the previous value is used.  
Notes:  
The response for the requested dump 1, 2, and 4 will be:  
+CCED:<value>, … , <value n>  
OK  
Where <value> is the ASCII string of the values (in decimal form except the LAC and CI values  
which are in hexadecimal form) of the parameters. If a field cannot be measured – or is  
meaningless – the parameter is not filled in and two consecutive commas are sent.  
The response for the requested dump 8 will be a +CSQ response and not a +CCED. The 7.07  
format for +CSQ is respected. The <ber> is not evaluated by this command, so the <ber> value  
will always be 99.  
+CSQ:<rssi>, 99  
OK  
When automatic shots are selected, this +CSQ response is sent every time the <rssi> measured  
by the product is equal or greater than the value <CsqStep>. So the <rssi> level between 2  
successive +CSQ responses is equal or greater than <CsqStep>. Automatic shots are supported  
in idle mode and during communication. The activation or deactivation of this flow (8) does not  
affect the other flows.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
107  
 
   
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Combination of the requested dump is supported (addition of the values 1, 2, 4, and 8):  
Value Requested Dump Value Requested Dump  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+CCED response: Main Cell only  
9
+CSQ response; then +CCED response with  
Main Cell only  
+CSQ response; then +CCED response with  
Neighbors 1 to 6  
+CSQ response; then +CCED response with  
Main Cell; then Neighbors 1 to 6  
+CSQ response; then +CCED response with  
Timing Advance Only  
+CSQ response; then +CCED response with  
Main Cell; then Timing Advance  
+CSQ response; then +CCED response with  
Neighbors 1 to 6; then Timing Advance  
+CSQ response; then +CCED response: Main  
Cell, then Neighbors 1 to 6, then Timing Advance  
+CCED response: Neighbors 1 to 6  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
+CCED response: Main Cell; then Neighbors 1  
to 6  
+CCED response: Timing Advance Only  
+CCED response: Main Cell; then Timing  
Advance  
+CCED response: Neighbors 1 to 6; then  
Timing Advance  
+CCED response: Main Cell; then Neighbors 1  
to 2, then Timing Advance  
+CSQ response: Main Cell RSSI indications  
16 +CCED response: Main Cell, then Neighbors 1 to  
6, then Main Cell Timing Advance, then  
Neighbor1 to Neighbor6 Timing Advance  
------- -----------------------------------------------------------------  
No Last value used for CCED request or 15  
value  
If requested dump parameter is not provided, one of the last +CCED commands sill be used (or 15 by default) will  
be used.  
Values of MCC/MNC are set to 0 in the case of “No service”.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+CCED=<mode>[, <requested dump>]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CCED=0  
+CCED:208,20,0002,0418,37,706,24,,,0,,,0,208,20,0006,98  
Note: Last request was AT_CCED=0,3 (main cell 9b,37,835,20,208,,20,0002,02a9,37,831,12,208,20,0101,79  
and neighbors 1 to 6): you can see MCC,MNC  
sequences (here 208,20)  
66,34,818,508,20,0006,9899,39,713,9,208,20,0002,0a72,3  
3,711,12,208,20,0101,03fb,36,824,10,1  
OK  
AT+CCED=0,1  
+CCED:208,20,0002,0418,37,706,25,,,0,,,0  
Note: Only Main Cell request  
OK  
AT+CCED=0,1  
+CCED:208,10,189C,,19,85,,31,32,,0,0  
OK  
Note: Call in progress: RxLev and RxQual are  
empty, RxLevFull, RxLevSub, RxQualFull, and  
RxQualSub have data  
AT+CCED=1,8,1  
OK  
+CSQ: 12,99  
+CSQ: 13,99  
AT+CCED=0,16  
+CCED:  
208,20,0006,0418,54,789,,,,255,,,0,208,20,0,0006,57,1018,  
20,208,01,7500,6497,17,55,17,208,10,54c4,f0ed,31,700,9,  
208,20,0006,7d9a,50,1023,8,208,20,0002,9a29,48,1015,7,  
1,1,1,2,1,2  
OK  
Note: idle mode  
AT+CCED=0,16  
Note: 1,1,1,2,1,2 correspond to the Main Cell Timing  
Advance and 5 Neighbors Timing Advance  
+CCED:  
208,20,0006,0418,54,789,,19,19,0,0,,,,,,41,801,6,,,,,57,101  
8,20,,,,,48,1015,10,,,,,57,1006,4,,,,,50,1023,7,,,,,57,814,3,1,  
,,,,,  
OK  
Note: Neighbors Timing Advances are not available in  
dedicated mode  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: dedicated mode  
AT+CCED=1,16  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
108  
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
General Indications +WIND  
Description:  
This command provides a general mechanism to send unsolicited non-standardized indications to the  
application. The indicators are:  
Indication of a physical change on the SIM detect pin from the connector (meaning SIM inserted,  
SIM removed)  
Indication during mobile originated call setup that the calling party is ringing.  
Indication of the availability of the product to receive AT commands after boot.  
NITZ indication (Network Information and Time Zone)  
For each of these indications, a “bit flow” has to be indicated.  
Values:  
<IndLevel>  
0
No unsolicited “+WIND: <IndNb>” will occur. Default.  
Hardware SIM Insert/Remove indications or SIM presence after software reset.  
Calling party alert indication.  
1 (bit-0)  
2 (bit-1)  
4 (bit-2)  
Product is ready to process AT commands (except phonebooks, AOC, SMS), but  
still in emergency mode.  
8 (bit-3)  
The product is ready to process all AT commands at the end of init or after  
swapping to ADN in case of FDN configuration  
16 (bit-4)  
32 (bit-5)  
64 (bit-6)  
128 (bit-7)  
256 (bit-8)  
512 (bit-9)  
A new call identifier has been created (after an ATD command, +CCWA indication)  
An active, held or waiting call has been released by network or other party  
Network service available indication  
Network lost indication  
Audio ON indication  
SIM phonebooks reload status  
1024 (bit-10) SIM phonebooks checksum indication  
2048 (bit-11) Interruption indication (only if FTR_INT is activated)  
4096 (bit-12) Hardware rack open/closed indication  
8192 (bit-13) NITZ indication  
16384 (bit-14) SMS service ready indication  
Combination (addition of the values) is used to allow more than one indication flow: 0 IndLevel ≤  
32767  
To activate a specific WIND indication, <IndLevel> must have a value described above.  
AT+WIND=16384 only activates SMS service indication.  
To activate several WIND indications, <IndLevel> must have a value just before the last  
indication required.  
AT+WIND=32767 all unsolicited indications.  
<event>  
0
1
2
3
The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM removed”  
The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM inserted”  
Calling party is alerting  
Product is ready to process AT commands (except phonebooks, AOC, SMS), at init or after  
AT+CFUN=1  
4
5
6
Product is ready to process all AT commands, end of phonebook init or swap (FDN to ADN)  
Call <idx> has been created (after ATD or +CCWA…)  
Call <idx> has been released, after a NO CARRIER, a +CSSU: 5 indication, or after the  
release of a call waiting.  
7:  
8
The network service is available for an emergency call.  
The network is lost.  
Audio ON.  
9
10  
Show reload status of each SIM phonebook after init phase (after Power-ON or SIM  
insertion).  
11  
12  
13  
Show the checksum of SIM phonebooks after loading.  
An interruption has occurred.  
The rack has been detected as Closed.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
109  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
14  
15  
16  
The rack has been detected as Open.  
The modem received a NITZ information message from the network.  
SMS and SMS CB services are ready.  
For Event 10:  
<phonebook>: SIM phonebook  
"SM”  
“FD”  
“ON”  
“SN”  
“EN”  
<status>:  
0
1
Not Reloaded from SIM (no change since last init or SIM remove)  
Reloaded from SIM to internal memory (at least one entry has changed)  
For Event 11:  
<checksum>: 128-bit “fingerprint” of the phonebook.  
Note: If the service of the phonebook is not loaded or not present, the checksum is not displayed and  
two commas without checksum are displayed (,,).  
For Event 15:  
<Full name>: String. Updated long name for current network.  
<Short name>: String. updated short name for current network.  
<Local time zone>: Signed integer. Time Zone indicates the difference, expressed in quarters of an  
hour, between the local time and GMT.  
<Universal time and local time zone>: String, Universal Time and Time Zone, in format  
"yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss zzz" (Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:Seconds Time Zone).  
The Time Zone indicates the difference, expressed in quarters of an hour,  
between the local time and GMT.  
<LSA Identity>:  
Hexa string. LSA identity of the current cell in hexa format (3 bytes).  
<Daylight Saving Time>: Integer (0-2). When the LTZ is compensated for DST (Daylight Saving Time  
or summertime), the serving PLMN shall provide a DST parameter to indicate it.  
The adjustment for DST can be + 1h or +2h.  
Note: For the NITZ indication, all the fields indicated here are optional. That is why there is an index  
related to each of the following:  
1: Full name for network  
2: Short name for network  
3: Local time zone  
4: Universal time and local time zone  
5: LSA identity  
6: Network Daylight Saving Time  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WIND= <IndLevel >  
Command  
Possible Responses  
AT+WIND?  
+WIND: 0  
OK  
AT+WIND=255  
OK  
Note: The SIM has been removed.  
+WIND: 0  
Note :The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM  
removed”  
Note: The SIM has been inserted.  
+WIND: 1  
Note :The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM  
inserted”  
Note: The network service is available +WIND: 7  
for an emergency call  
Note: The initialization has been  
completed  
+WIND: 4  
Note: The modem received a NITZ  
information message  
+WIND: 15,1,"Cingular Extended",2,"Cingular",3,"+08",  
4,"03/14/27,16:59:48+08",5,"123456",6,"2"  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
110  
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Additional Notes:  
The AT+WIND? command is supported and indicates the <allowed bit flows>.  
AT+WIND settings are automatically stored in non volatile memory (EEPROM). This means the &W  
command does not need to be used and the selected flows are always activated after boot.  
Default value is 0: no flow activated, no indication.  
AT+WIND=? gives the possible value range (0-4095)  
The unsolicited response will then be:  
+WIND: <event> [,<idx>]  
<idx>: Call identifier, defined in +CLCC command.  
Or for event 10:  
+WIND: <event>,<phonebook>,<status>,…,<phonebook>,<status>  
Or for event 11:  
+WIND: <event>,[“<checksum of SM>”],[“<checksum of FD>”],[“<checksum of  
ON>”],[“<checksum of SN>”] ,[“<checksum of EN>”],[“<checksum of LD>”]  
Or for event 15 (NITZ indication):  
+WIND: <event>[,1,"Full name>"][,2,"<Short name>"][,3,"<Local time zone>"][,4,"<Universal  
time and local time zone>"][,5,"<LSA identity>"][,6,"<Daylight Saving Time>"]  
Analog Digital Converter Measurements +ADC  
Description:  
This command gets the (DC level * 1024) of ADC A and ADC B, and possibly ADC C. These voltages  
are coded on 10 bits.  
Values:  
<n>  
0
1
Select 2 converters  
Select 3 converters  
<ADCValA>  
ADC A value, coded on 10 bits. The value returned includes the resistor bridge. Values are updated  
every 10 seconds. Displayed on modes 0 and 1.  
<ADCValB>  
ADC B value, coded on 10 bits. Displayed on modes 0 and 1.  
<ADCValC>  
ADC C value, coded on 10 bits. Displayed on mode 1 only.  
<ADCValD>  
ADC D value, coded on 10 bits. Displayed on mode 1 only.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+ADC<n>  
Response syntax: +ADC: <ADCValA>,<ADCValB>[,<ADCValC>][,<ADCValD>]  
Command  
AT+ADC=?  
Possible responses  
+ADC: (0-1)  
Note: Ask for the list of possible values  
Note: possible values 0 or 1  
AT+ADC=0  
OK  
Note: Select 2 converters (mode 0)  
AT+ADC?  
Note: 2 converters mode selected  
+ADC: 500,412  
OK  
Note: Ask for the current values of  
converters in mode 0  
Note: ADC A, ADC B on 10 bits  
AT+ADC=1  
OK  
Note: Select extended mode (mode 1)  
Note: Extended mode selected  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
111  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER  
Description:  
This command enables or disables sending of unsolicited result codes in the case of a key press.  
Values:  
<keyp> (keypad)  
0
1
No keypad event reporting.  
Keypad event reportings are routed using unsolicited code: +CKEV: <key>, <press> only those  
key pressings, which are not caused by +CKPD are indicated.  
Keypad event reportings are routed using unsolicited code: +CKEV: <key>, <press> all key  
pressings are indicated.  
2
Note: As AT software does not manage the emulation of key press, the values 1 and 2 lead to the  
same results.  
<ind>  
0
No indicator event reporting  
1
2
Indicator event reporting using unsolicited result code. Only the indicator events not caused by  
+CIND shall be indicated by the TA to the TE.  
Indicator event reporting using unsolicited result code. All indicator events shall be directed  
from TA to TE (DTE).  
<key> Keyboard map is (5,5)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
15  
20  
11  
16  
21  
12  
17  
22  
13  
18  
23  
14  
19  
24  
<press>  
1
0
key press  
key release  
<indresp> Indicator order number (as specified for +CIND)  
<value> New value of the indicator  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax:  
AT+CMER=<mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,<ind>,<bfr>  
Response Syntax:+CKEV: <key>, <press> (key press event report)  
Response Syntax:+CIEV: <indresp>, <value> (indicator event report)  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CMER=1  
OK  
Note: Ask for key press event report  
+CKEV:12,1  
+CKEV:12,0  
Note: Key 12 has been pressed and released  
AT+CMER?  
+CMER: 3,1,0,0,0  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
112  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Read Language Preference +WLPR  
Description:  
Read a Language Preference value of EF-LP. The first indices should have the highest priority.  
Values:  
<index> Offset in the available languages range (SIM dependent)  
<value> Values for language. See Recommendation 3GPP TS 23.038. Language example:  
<value>  
Language  
German  
English  
Italian  
0
1
2
3
French  
4
5
Spanish  
Dutch  
6
7
Swedish  
Danish  
8
9
Portuguese  
Finnish  
Norwegian  
Greek  
Turkish  
Hungarian  
Polish  
Czech  
Hebrew  
Arabic  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
Russian  
Icelandic  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT+WLPR= <index >  
Response syntax: +WLPR: <value>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WLPR?  
+WLPR: 4  
Note: Read command  
OK  
Note: Four language preferences are available in EF-LP  
AT+WLPR=1  
+WLPR: 5  
Note: Read first EF-LP index value OK  
Note: Language preference is 5  
Write Language Preference +WLPW  
Description:  
Write a Language Preference value in EF-LP.  
Values:  
<index> Offset in the available languages range (SIM dependent)  
<value> See <values> examples above (Read Language Preference +WLPR)  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT+WLPW=<index >,<value>  
Response syntax: OK or +CME ERROR: <err>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WLPW=1,5  
OK  
Note: Write Lang Pref equal to 5 in EF-LP with index 1 Note: EF-LP correctly updated  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
113  
 
   
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Read GPIO Value +WIOR  
Description:  
Read the requested GPI or GPIO pin value.  
Notes:  
By default (e.g., after a reset), the I/O ports configuration is set by the +WIOM command.  
This command is allowed only on a GPIO not allocated by an Open-AT embedded application or  
for bus operations.  
When the BT chip is switched on, the GPIO5 is not available anymore.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<index>  
Up to ten I/O ports are available. The <index> value is between 0 and 9.  
<value>  
0
1
I/O port number <index> is reset.  
I/O port number <index> is set.  
Command syntax:AT+WIOR=<index>  
Response syntax: +WIOR: <value>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WIOR=0  
+WIOR: 0  
Read I/O (number 0) value  
OK  
GPIO number 0 is reset  
Write GPIO Value +WIOW  
Description:  
Set the requested GPO or GPIO pin value.  
Notes:  
By default (e.g., after a reset), the I/O ports configuration is set by the +WIOM command.  
This command is allowed only on a GPIO not allocated by an Open-AT embedded application or  
for bus operations.  
When the BT chip is switched on, the GPIO5 is not available anymore. It is not possible to  
change the state of the GPIO using this command.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<index>  
Up to ten I/O ports are available. The <index> value is between 0 and 9.  
<value>  
0
1
I/O port number <index> is reset.  
I/O port number <index> is set.  
Command syntax: AT+WIOW=<index >,<value>  
Command  
AT+WIOW=2,0  
Reset I/O (number 2)  
Possible responses  
OK  
GPIO value is written  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
114  
 
   
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Input/Output Management +WIOM  
Description:  
This command sets the default GPIO’s configuration (input or output) after reset, and each GPIO default  
value (if set as an output) after reset.  
Notes:  
This command is allowed only on a GPIO not allocated by the Open-AT embedded application or  
for bus operations.  
When UART is activated, GPIOs 0 and 5, GPO2 and GPI are not available anymore. When you  
try to do writable or readable operations on these I/O, CME ERROR: 3 will be returned. This  
applies for modems running AT X50 software and supporting the multi-UART feature.  
When the BT chip is switched on, the GPIO5 is not available anymore. It is not possible to  
change the state of the GPIO using this command.  
Values:  
<GpioDir> Bit table parameter indicating each GPIO direction.  
0
1
Input  
Output. Default.  
Default value: 2047 (all GPIOs set as outputs).  
<GpioVal> Bit table parameter indicating each output-configured GPIO value (each bit gives the  
corresponding GPIO default value).  
0
Reset. Default.  
1 Set  
The GPIOs set as inputs by the <GpioDir> parameter are not affected by the value set by the  
<GpioVal> parameter.  
Notes:  
<GpioDir> bit values for GPI and GPO are ignored.  
<GpioVal> bit values for GPI are ignored.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WIOM=[<GpioDir>],[<GpioVal>]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WIOM?  
+WIOM: 2047,0  
OK  
On reset, all GPIOs are set to 0, as an output  
AT+WIOM=?  
+WIOM: (0-2047),(0-2047)  
OK  
Range allowed for the parameters.  
AT+WIOM=254  
OK  
Set GPIO 0 as an input, and all others as outputs  
AT+WIOM=,128  
Set GPIO 3; default output value to 1  
AT+WIOM=,128  
OK  
OK  
Note: Set GPIO 8 or GPIO12 or GPIO7; default  
output value to 1  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
115  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Abort Command +WAC  
Description:  
This command allows SMS, SS and PLMN selection related commands to be aborted.  
Values:  
No parameters  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WAC  
Command Syntax  
Return  
AT+WAC  
AT+WAC=?  
AT+WAC?  
OK  
OK  
Example 1  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+COPS=?  
Note: Available PLMN  
AT+WAC  
OK  
Note: Abort the request of PLMN list Note: PLMN list request aborted  
Example 2  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CCFC=0,2  
Note: Query status of Call Forwarding service  
AT+WAC  
CME ERROR: 551  
Note: Abort the request of the query of the  
Call Forwarding service  
Note: Query of Call Forwarding service request failed  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
116  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Play Tone +WTONE  
Description:  
This command allows a tone to be played on the current speaker or on the buzzer. Frequency, gain and  
duration can be set.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
Stop playing.  
Play a tone  
<dest> Sets the destination (mandatory if <mode>=1)  
1
2
Speaker  
Buzzer  
<freq> Sets tone frequency (in Hz) (mandatory if <mode>=1).  
<freq2> Sets the 2nd tone frequency (in Hz) (mandatory if <mode>=1). Available with speaker only.  
If <dest>=1 speaker:  
Range is 1 Hz to 3999 Hz  
If <dest>=2 buzzer:  
Range is between 1 Hz and 50000 Hz.  
<gain> Sets the tone gain for the <freq>. The default is 9.  
<gain2> Sets the tone gain for the <freq2>. The default is 9.  
Range of values is 0 to 15  
<gain>  
Speaker (db)  
Buzzer (db)  
-0.25  
-0.5  
-1  
0
1
2
0
-0.5  
-1  
3
4
-1.5  
-2  
-1.5  
-2  
5
-3  
-3  
6
-6  
-6  
7
-9  
-9  
8
9
-12  
-15  
-18  
-24  
-30  
-36  
-42  
-infinite  
-12  
-15  
-18  
-24  
-30  
-40  
-infinite  
-infinite  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
<duration> Sets tone duration (unit of 100 ms).  
Range is 0 to 50. Default 0. 1 -> 0,1 s., 50 -> 5 s.)  
When this <duration>=0, the duration is infinite, and the tone can be stopped by  
AT+WTONE=0.  
Note: The frequency <freq2> and gain <gain2> are allowed for the speaker only.  
Caution: Hardware can only generate the following frequencies:  
Freq = (13 000 000 / (N * 64))  
N: Interger value in the recommended range 1 to 2048.  
With N=1, the frequency 203 125 Hz is generated.  
With N=2048, the frequency 99.18 Hz is generated.  
Some noise problems have been detected if the frequency is below 100 Hz.  
The lowest frequency possible is 12 Hz.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT+WTONE=<mode>[,<dest>,<freq>,<gain>,<duration>[,<freq2>,[gain2>]]]]]  
Response syntax: OK or +CME ERROR: <err>  
Command  
AT+WTONE=1,1,300,9,50  
Note: Play a tone  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: Done  
AT+WTONE=0  
OK  
Note: Stop playing  
AT+WTONE=?  
Note: Done  
OK  
Note: Test command  
AT+WTONE?  
Note: Done  
ERROR  
Note: Current value  
AT+WTONE=1,1,300,9,50,600,9  
OK  
Note: Play a tone with 2 frequencies (allowed with speaker only) Note: Done  
AT+WTONE=1,2,300,9,50,600,9  
Note: Play a tone with 2 frequencies with the buzzer  
+CME ERROR: 3 (Note: Dual  
frequency for speaker only)  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
117  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Play DTMF Tone +WDTMF  
Description:  
This command allows a DTMF tone to be played on the current speaker. DTMF, gain, and duration can  
be set.  
Note: This command is only used to play a DTMF tone. To send a DTMF over the GSM network, use  
the +VTS command.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0 Stop playing.  
1 Play a DTMF tone  
<dtmf> Sets the DTMF to play in (mandatory if <mode>=1).  
Value must be in {0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D}  
<gain> (0-15) Sets tone gain. The values are identical to those of the +WTONE (speaker) command.  
Range is 0 to 15 (see array on previous page). By default, the value is 9.  
<duration> (0-50) Sets the tone duration (unit of 100 ms).  
Range 0 to 50. Default 0 (1-> 0,1 s., 50 -> 5 s.)  
When this parameter is 0 (default value), the duration is infinite, and the DTMF tone  
can be stopped by AT+WDTMF=0.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT+WDTMF=<mode>[,<dtmf>,<gain>,<duration>]  
Response syntax: OK or +CME ERROR: <err>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WDTMF=1,"*",9,50  
Note: Play a DTMF tone  
AT+WDTMF=0  
OK  
Note: Done  
OK  
Note: Stop playing  
Note: Done  
AT+WDTMF=?  
+WDTMF: (0-1),(0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D),(0-15),(0-50)  
Note: Test command  
OK  
Note: Done  
AT+WDTMF?  
ERROR  
Note: Current value  
Downloading +WDWL  
Description:  
This command switches the product to download mode.  
AT+WDWL allows the download process to launch on UART1 only.  
Downloading is performed using the 1K-XMODEM protocol.  
Important Note: Software damages may occur if power is lost or if a hardware reset occurs during the  
downloading phase. This would seriously affect the modem.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters  
Command syntax: AT+WDWL  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WDWL  
+WDWL: 0  
Note: Switch on downloading mode  
Note: Start the downloading  
Note: Downloading in progress  
AT+CFUN=1  
Note: Reset the product at the end  
OK  
Note: Reset completed. New software running  
AT+WDWL?  
+WDWL: VO2.12  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
118  
 
   
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Voice Rate +WVR  
Description:  
This command allows the voice rate for bearer voice to be configured for outgoing and incoming calls.  
Note: According to the modem’s capabilities, the following voice coding type are allowed:  
Modem that supports AMR: FR, EFR, AMR-FR, AMR-HR are supported.  
Modem that does not support AMR: FR, EFR, HR are supported.  
Values:  
Voice coding type.  
Voice Coding Preferred Other Supported Types  
Default Values  
Type  
Type  
0
1
2
FR  
EFR  
HR  
Default incoming voice calls rate  
FR  
FR  
3
FR  
HR  
4
HR  
EFR  
5
EFR  
HR, FR  
Default outgoing voice calls rate  
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
AMR-FR  
AMR-FR  
AMR-HR  
AMR-HR  
AMR-HR  
AMR-HR  
AMR-FR  
AMR-FR  
AMR-FR  
EFR  
EFR, AMR-HR, FR  
EFR, AMR-HR, HR, FR  
HR, AMR-FR, EFR, FR  
AMR-FR, EFR, FR  
AMR-FR, FR  
HR, AMR-FR, FR  
AMR-HR, FR  
FR, AMR-HR  
FR, AMR-HR, HR  
FR, HR  
Command syntax: AT+WVR= <out_coding_type>[,<in-coding_type>]  
AT+WVR= [<out_coding_type>],<in-coding_type>  
AT+WVR? +WDR: <out_coding_type>,<in-coding_type>  
OK  
Note: <out_coding_type> is related to outgoing calls; <in-coding_type> to incoming calls.  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WVR=1  
OK  
Note: Configure voice type FR and EFR Note: Bearer is configured for outgoing calls  
for outgoing calls only  
AT+WVR=1,4  
OK  
Note: Configure voice type FR and EFR Note: Bearer is configured for outgoing calls and  
for outgoing calls and HR and EFR for  
incoming calls  
incoming calls  
AT+WVR=,4  
OK  
Note: Configure voice type HR and  
EFR for incoming calls  
AT+WVR=6  
Note: Bearer is unchanged for outgoing calls and  
configured for incoming calls  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Syntax error  
Note: Syntax error  
AT+WVR?  
+WVR: 1,1  
Note: Ask for the current values  
OK  
AT+WVR=?  
+WVR: (0,2,3),(0,2,3)  
Note: If Half Rate is available  
AT+WVR=?  
AT+WVR=?  
AT+WVR=?  
AT+WVR=?  
+WVR: (0,1),(0,1)  
Note: If EFR available.  
+WVR: (0),(0)  
Note: If neither HR nor EFR is available  
+WVR: (0-5,15),(0-5,15)  
Note: If HR and EFR are available  
+WVR:  
(0,2,3,10,11,12,13,14),(0,2,3,10,11,12,13,14)  
Note: If Half Rate and AMR are available  
+WVR: (0,1,6,9,10,11,12,13),(0,1,6,9,10,11,12,13)  
Note: If EFR and AMR are available  
+WVR: (0,10,12,13),(0,10,12,13)  
Note: If AMR is available  
+WVR: (0-15),(0-15)  
AT+WVR=?  
AT+WVR=?  
AT+WVR=?  
Note: If HR,EFR, and AMR are available  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
119  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Data Rate +WDR  
Description:  
This command allows the data rate for bearer data to be configured for outgoing and incoming calls.  
Values:  
<out_coding_type>: Data Coding Type for Outgoing Calls.  
Data Coding Preferred Other Supported Types  
Default Values  
Type  
Type  
0
1
2
3
FR  
HR  
FR  
FR  
Default incoming voice calls rate  
FR  
HR  
HR  
<in_coding_type>: Data Coding Type for Incoming Calls.  
Data Coding  
Type  
Type  
Default Values  
0
1
HR  
FR  
Default incoming data calls rate  
Command syntax: AT+WDR= <out_coding_type>[,<in-coding_type>]  
AT+WDR= [<out_coding_type>],<in-coding_type>  
AT+WDR? +WDR: <out_coding_type>[,<in-coding_type>  
Note: <out_coding_type> is related to outgoing calls, and <in_coding_type to incoming calls.  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WDR=?  
+WDR: (0-2),(0-2)  
Note: If Half Rate is available in both directions  
AT+WDR=?  
+WDR: (0),(1)  
OK  
Note: If Half Rate is notavailable.  
AT+WDR=1  
OK  
Note: Configure data type FR, HR with HR  
preferred for outgoing calls  
(<in_coding_type> parameter is omitted)  
AT+WDR=1  
Note: Bearer is configured  
OK  
Note: Configure data type FRfor incoming  
calls (<out_coding_type> parameter is  
omitted)  
Note: Bearer is configured  
AT+WDR=3  
Note: Illegal value  
AT+WVR?  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Syntax error  
+WVR: 1,1  
Note: Ask for the current values  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
120  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Select Voice Gain +WSVG  
Description:  
The product has 2 voice gain controllers. This specific command selects the microphone gain  
controller.  
Values:  
<n> Controller  
0 Controller 1 (Default)  
1 Controller 2  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WSVG = <n>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WSVG=<n>  
AT+WSVG=0  
OK  
Note: Select Controller 1 (Default)  
Note: Controller 1 selected  
AT+WSVG=1  
OK  
Note: Select Controller 2 (Default)  
Note: Controller 2 selected  
AT+WSVG=?  
+WSVG: (0-1)  
Note: Get the list of possible values  
AT+WSVG?  
Note: possible values 0 or 1  
+WSVG: 1  
Note: Get the current value  
Note: Controller 1 is selected  
Status Request +WSTR  
Description:  
This command returns some operation status. It can be used to check the state of the initialization  
sequence; the different values returned are Not started, Ongoing, Finished.  
Values:  
<status>  
1
Initialization sequence  
<value>  
0
1
2
Not started  
On going  
Finished  
2
Network status  
<value>  
0
1
No network  
Network available  
Syntax;  
Command syntax: AT+WSTR=<status>  
Response syntax: +WSTR: <status>,<value>  
Command  
AT+WSTR=<status>  
AT+WSTR=1  
Possible responses  
+WSTR:<status>,<value>  
+WSTR: 1,2  
Note: Select the status 1 (INIT SEQUENCE)  
OK  
Note: Init finished  
AT+WSTR=2  
+WSTR: 2,1  
Note: Select the status 2 (NETWORK STATUS) OK  
Note: The network is available  
AT+WSTR=?  
+WSTR: (1-2)  
Note: Ask the list of possible values  
Note: possible values: 1, 2  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
121  
 
   
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Scan +WSCAN  
Description:  
This command displays the received signal strength indication (<rssi>) for a specified frequency (in  
absolute format). This command is not allowed during communication.  
Values:  
<absolute frequency> frequency in absolute format <rssi>  
0
1
-113 dBm or less  
-111 dBm  
2...30 -109 to -53 dBm  
31  
99  
-51dBm or greater  
not known or not detectable  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WSCAN=<absolute frequency>  
Response syntax: +WSCAN: <rssi>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WSCAN=50  
+WSCAN: 23  
OK  
Note: Request <rssi> of absolute frequency 50  
AT+WSCAN=1025  
Note: <rssi> is 23.  
CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Request power of absolute frequency 1025 Note: 1025 is not a valid absolute frequency  
Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM  
Description:  
This command sets or returns the state of the Ring Indicator Mode.  
In up-down RI mode, no pulses are sent before unsolicited AT response, and up-down signals  
are sent when receiving an incoming call.  
In pulse RI mode, an electrical pulse is sent on the Ring Indicator signal just before sending any  
unsolicited AT response in order not to lose AT responses when client tasks are in sleep state.  
Still in RI mode, when receiving incoming calls, electrical pulses are sent on the RI signal.  
Pulse RI Mode + Pulse On Packet Downloaded: based on Pulse RI mode but an electrical pulse  
is also sent on the Ring Indicator signal just before sending a downloaded data packet (GPRS or  
CSD) if the remote client has dropped down his RTS signal.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
2
Up-down RI mode  
Pulse RI mode  
Pulse RI mode + Pulse on Downloaded Packet  
<n> used only in mode RI Pulse + Pulse on Downloaded Packet (<mode>=2).  
Duration of pulse is 5 μs  
0
1-31 Duration of pulse is n x 30 μs  
Important: Pulse duration may be increased by up to 3 ms, due to interrupt processes  
overhead.  
Note: Remind that this mode corresponds to the case where the remote equipment has dropped its  
RTS signal to stop its flow control.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WRIM=<n>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WRIM=0  
OK  
Note: Select up-down RI mode  
Note: up-down RI mode selected  
AT+WRIM=1  
OK  
Note: Select pulse RI mode  
AT+WRIM=2,0  
Note: pulse RI mode selected  
OK  
Note: Select mode pulse RI on downloaded packet,  
pluse duration is 5 μs  
AT+WRIM=?  
Note: mode pulse RI + Pulse on  
downloaded packet selected  
+WRIM: (0-2),(0-33)  
OK  
Note: Ask the list of possible values  
Note: possible values 0, 1 or 2  
AT+WRIM?  
+WRIM: 1  
Note: Ask the current value  
OK  
Note: current RI mode is pulse RI  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
122  
 
   
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
32kHz Power Down Mode +W32K  
Description:  
This command allows the 32kHz power down mode to be enabled or disabled:  
When power down mode is entered, the product uses a 32kHz internal clock during inactivity  
stages (regardless of its nominal internal clock).  
When enabled, power down mode is active after 1 to 15 minutes. The mode is not stored in  
EEPROM: the command has to be repeated after a reset.  
For additional information on power down mode, see Specification of Power Down Control via  
RS232 in the Appendix.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<mode>  
Disable 32kHz powerdown mode  
Enable 32kHz powerdown mode  
0
1
Command syntax: AT+W32K=<mode>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+W32K=1  
OK  
Note: Enable 32kHz power down mode  
Note: 32kHz power down mode is enabled  
AT+W32K=0  
OK  
Note: Disable 32kHz power down mode Note: 32kHz power down mode is disabled  
Change Default Melody +WCDM  
Description:  
This command allows a the selection of a manufacturer-specific melody. This default melody will be  
played for any new incoming voice call, either on the buzzer or on the speaker.  
Values:  
<melody>  
0
No melody (default)  
1…10 Melody 1 to 10  
<player>  
0
1
Melody n°<melody> will be played on the buzzer for any new incoming voice call. Default.  
Melody n°<melody> will be played on the speaker for any new incoming voice call.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT+WCDM=<melody>,<player>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WCDM=0  
OK  
Note: Select no melody  
AT+WCDM=5  
OK  
Note: Select melody n°5  
AT+WCDM?  
+WCDM: 5,0  
Note: Indicate the current melody  
OK  
Note: Melody n°5 is currently selected, and the buzzer is  
selected to play it.  
RING  
Note: An incoming call occurs, and the melody n°5 is played  
on the buzzer.  
AT+WCDM=,1  
OK  
Note: Select the speaker to play the  
melody on.  
AT+WCDM?  
+WCDM: 5,1  
OK  
Note: Now the speaker is selected to play the melody if an  
incoming call occurs.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
123  
 
   
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Custom Character Set +WCCS  
Description:  
This command allows you to edit and display the custom character set tables. These tables are used by  
the “CUSTOM” mode of +CSCS and the +WPCS commands. In this CUSTOM mode, when you enter a  
string, it is converted into the GSM alphabet using the Custom To GSM table. In a similar way, when the  
user requests a string display, the string is converted from the GSM alphabet using the Custom  
alphabet and Custom alphabet extension tables.  
In edition mode, the session is terminated by <ctrl-Z> or aborted by <ESC>. Only hexadecimal  
characters (‘0’…’9’, ‘A’…’F’) can be used. The number of characters entered must equal the edition  
range requested; otherwise, the command will return “+CME ERROR: 24”.  
The default Custome alphabet extension table contains the following extended characters:  
|
^
ε
{
}
[
]
~
\
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
Display the table  
Edit the table  
<table>  
0
1
2
Custom to GSM conversion table (default table is PCCP437 to GSM table)  
Custom alphabet table (default table is GSM 7 bit default alphabet)  
Custom alphabet extension table (default table is GSM 7 bit default alphabet extended)  
<char 1>, <char 2>  
Character range to display/edit  
0…127 for table 1 and 2  
0…255 for Custom to GSM conversion table  
Notes:  
<char1> and <char2> are not ASCII codes; they stand for the range of a given character in  
the tables.  
If only <char 1> is provided, only this char is displayed/edited  
See Appendix C for informative examples of the use of these characters.  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WCCS=<mode>,<table>,<char 1>[,<char 2>]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WCCS=0,0,120,130  
+WCCS: 11,  
Note: Display from character 120 to character 130 of the  
Custom to GSM conversion table  
78797A2020202020097E05  
OK  
Note: 11 characters displayed  
AT+WCCS=1,0,115<CR>  
20<ctrl-Z>  
OK  
Note: Edition successful  
Note: Edit character 115 of the Custom to GSM conversion  
table  
AT+WCCS=1,1,0,4<CR>  
40A324A5E8<ctrl-Z>  
OK  
Note: Edition successful  
Note: Edit the 5 first characters of the GSM to Custom  
conversion table  
AT+WCCS=0,2,20<CR>  
+WCCS: 1,5E  
Note: Display character 20 of the Custom alphabet extension OK  
table  
AT+WCCS=1,1,200  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Edit character 200 of GSM to Custom conversion table Note: Index out of range  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
124  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Lock +WLCK  
Description:  
This command allows the modem to be locked on a specific network operator.  
Note: Test SIM cards (with MCC=001 & MNC=01) doesn’t check these locks.  
Values:  
<fac>  
“PS”  
SIM lock facility with a 8 digits password (PCK).  
Network lock with a 8 digits password (NCK).  
Network subset lock with a 8 digits password (NSCK).  
Service provider lock with a 8 digits password (SPCK).  
Corporate lock with a 8 digits password (CCK).  
“PN”  
“PU”  
“PP”  
“PC”  
<psswd>  
<NetId>  
password code, 8 digits  
IMSI for SIM lock (<fac>)=”PS”), operator in numeric format (MCC and MNC) for other  
locks (other <fac> values).  
<GID1>  
Group Identifier level 1, mandatory for Service provider lock (<fac>)=”PP”) and for  
Corporate lock (<fac>="PC").  
<GID2>  
Group Identifier level 2, mandatory for Corporate lock (<fac>="PC").  
<CnlType> Type of lock for co-operative network list (CNL)  
0
Automatic (co-operative network list retrieved from EFCNL SIM file)  
Note: EFCNL file must be present in SIM to use automatic mode.  
Manual (co-operative network list is given in the <CnlData> parameter)  
1
<CnlData> Co-operative network list (hexa string type) using same format as in EFCNL SIM file (ETSI  
GSM 11.11 or 3GPP 04.08).  
Note: Only if <CnlType> = 1  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT+WLCK=<fac>,<passwd>,<NetId>[,<GID1>[,GID2]] [,<CnlType>[,<CnlData>]]  
Response syntax: +WLCK: <status>  
Command  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: Network lock activated  
AT+WLCK="PN",12345678,20810  
Note: Activate network lock on SFR (208,10)  
AT+WLCK="PS",12345678,20810592356897 OK  
4
Note: SIM lock activated  
Note: Activate SIM lock  
AT+WLCK="PU",12345678,2081035  
Note: Activate Network Subset lock on SFR  
(208, 10, 35).  
OK  
Note: Network Subset lock activated  
AT+WLCK="PU",12345678,20810  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Need 7 digits of IMSI to perform a service  
provider lock  
AT+WLCK=”PP”,12345678,20810,”E5”  
Note: Activate Service Provider lock on SFR  
(208, 10) and GID1 (0xE5).  
OK  
Note: Service Provider lock activated.  
AT+WLCK=”PC”,12345678,20810,”E5”,”10”  
Note: Activate Corporate lock on SFR (208,  
10), GID1 (0xE5) and GID2 (0x10).  
AT+WLCK=”PN”,12345678,20810,0  
OK  
Note: Corporate lock activated.  
OK  
Note: Activate Network lock on SFR (208, 10) Note: Network lock activated on SFR and co-  
using co-operative network list from SIM file  
EFCNL (must be present in SIM)  
operative network list present in SIM  
AT+WLCK=”PN”,12345678,20801,1,”02F802 OK  
FFFFFF02F801FFFFFF”  
Note: Activate Network lock on F ORANGE  
(208, 01) with manual co-operative network  
list including SFR (208, 10) and Bouygues  
Telecom (208, 20)  
Note: Network lock activated on F ORANGE  
(primary network), SFR and Bouygues Telecom  
(co-operative networks)  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
125  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
CPHS Command +CPHS  
Description:  
This command is used to activate, deactivate or interrogate a CPHS feature (e.g., Voice Mail Indicator,  
Mail Box Number…)  
Note:  
This command may answer +CME ERROR: 3 if the CPHS feature is disabled or if the  
SIM card does not support this CPHS feature.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
2
Deactivate a CPHS feature  
Activate a CPHS feature  
Interrogate a CPHS status  
Note: The deactivate or activate command has no effect on Alternate Line Service, Network  
Operator Name, CPHS Information, and Customer Profile Service features.  
<fctId>  
1
Voice Mail Indicator  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Mail Box Number  
Alternate Line Service  
Diverted Call Indicator  
Network Operator Name  
CPHS Information  
Customer Service Profile  
Note: The Customer Profile Service and Alternate Line Service features are activated if the  
field is set in CPHS Information and CSP files. The Network Operator is activated if at least  
one of the two format names exist (Long or Short format). This is done in initialization.  
<precision> Used only if <mode>=2 and <fctId> = 5 to 7  
if <fctId>=5, this field is <type format> (See +WNON)  
if <fctId>=6, this field is <date field> (See +WCPI)  
if <fctId>=7, this field is <service> (See +WCSP)  
<Status>  
0
1
CPHS feature disabled  
CPHS feature enabled  
Syntax:  
Command syntax:AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>[,<precision>]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>  
[,precision]  
OK  
AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>  
[,precision]  
+CME ERROR: 3  
AT+CPHS?  
+CPHS: <FctId1>,<Status><CR<LF>  
+CPHS: <FctId2>,<Status><CR<LF>  
+CPHS: <FctIdn>,<Status><CR<LF>  
OK  
OK  
AT+CPHS=?  
Examples:  
AT+CPHS?  
Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality  
Voice mail indicator functionality is deactivated  
Mail box number functionality is deactivated  
Alternate Line Serve functionality is activated  
Divert Call Indicator functionality is deactivated  
Network Operator functionality is activated  
CPHS Information functionality is activated  
Customer Service Profile functionality is activated  
+CPHS: 1,0  
+CPHS: 2,0  
+CPHS: 3,1  
+CPHS: 4,0  
+CPHS: 5,1  
+CPHS: 6,1  
+CPHS: 7,1  
OK  
AT+CPHS=3,1  
AT+CPHS=1,1  
Syntax error  
+CME ERROR: 3  
OK  
Activate the voice mail indicator functionality  
Examples continued on next page  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
126  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
AT+CPHS?  
Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality  
Voice mail indicator functionality is activated  
Mail box number functionality is deactivated  
Alternate Line Serve functionality is activated  
Divert Call Indicator functionality is deactivated  
Network Operator functionality is activated  
CPHS Information functionality is activated  
+CPHS: 1,1  
+CPHS: 2,0  
+CPHS: 3,1  
+CPHS: 4,0  
+CPHS: 5,1  
+CPHS: 6,1  
+CPHS: 7,1  
OK  
Customer Service Profile functionality is activated  
**** the message box contains 1 message *****  
+WVMI: 1,1  
A message is waiting on Line 1  
***** The message box contains a second message ***  
+WVMI: 2,1  
A message is waiting on Line 2  
AT+CPHS=1,4  
Activate Divert Call Indicator functionality  
OK  
****call forwarding is active on Line 1 *****  
+WDCI: 1,1  
AT+CPHS=2,1  
+WVMI: 1,1  
+WVMI: 2,1  
+WVMI: 3,0  
+WVMI:4,0  
OK  
Interrogate the status of voice mail indicator functionality  
a message is waiting on LINE 1  
a message is waiting on LINE 2  
no data waiting  
no fax waiting  
AT+CPHS=1,2  
OK  
Activate the mail box number functionality  
AT+WALS=1  
+WALS:2  
OK  
Interrogate the status of activated Line  
Current line is number 2  
AT+CPHS=0,4  
OK  
Deactivate the Divet Call Indicator functionality  
AT+CPHS?  
+CPHS: 1,1  
+CPHS: 2,1  
+CPHS: 3,1  
+CPHS: 4,0  
+CPHS: 5,1  
+CPHS: 6,1  
+CPHS: 7,1  
OK  
Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality  
Voice mail indicator functionality is activated  
The mail box number functionality is activated  
Alternate Line Serve functionality is activated  
Divert Call Indicator functionality is deactivated  
Network Operator functionality is activated  
CPHS Information functionality is activated  
Customer Service Profile functionality is activated  
AT+CPHS=2,2  
Query current mail box numbers in SIM  
+WMBN: 1,"19254871234",129,1 Mail box number for Line 1  
+WMBN: 2,,,1  
+WMBN: 3,,,1  
+WMBN: 4,,,1  
OK  
Mail box number for Line 2  
Mail box number for data Line  
Mail box number for fax Line  
Only Line1 can be updated  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
127  
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Unsolicited Result: Voice Mail Indicator +WVMI  
Description:  
This unsolicited indication gives the status of the LINE 1, LINE 2, or Data mailbox. The +CPHS  
command can be used to know the status of the voice mail indicator for each line.  
Values:  
<LineId>  
1
2
3
Line 1  
Line 2  
Data  
<Status>  
0
1
No message waiting.  
At least one message is waiting  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax:  
+WVMI=<LineId>,<Status>  
Response Syntax to AT+CPHS=2,1:  
WVMI: <LineId>,<Status>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPHS=1,1  
OK  
Note: Activate Voice Mail Indicator feature  
AT+CPHS=2,1  
Note: Get the current status of Voice Mail  
Indicator  
+WVMI: 1,1 a message is waiting on Line 1  
+WVMI: 2,1 a message is waiting on Line 2  
+WVMI: 3,0 no data waiting  
+CME ERROR: 3  
AT+CPHS=2,1  
Note: CPHS feature is not allowed  
AT+CPHS=1,1  
OK  
Note: Activatation of Voice Mail Indicator feature Note: Voice Mail Indicator feature is activated  
+WVMI: 1,1  
Note: A message is waiting on Line 1  
Unsolicited Result: Diverted Call Indicator +WDCI  
Description:  
This unsolicited indication provides the call forwarding flags. The +CPHS command can be used to  
know the status of the Divert Call Indicator for each line.  
Values:  
<LineId>  
1
2
3
Line 1  
Line 2  
Data  
<flag>, <status>  
0
1
Call forwarding is deactivated.  
Call forwarding is activated.  
Note: Call forwarding SS is set by the AT+CCFC command.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax:  
+WDCI: <LineId>,<Status>  
Response Syntax to AT+CPHS:+WDCI: <LineId>,<flag>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPHS=1,4  
OK  
Note: Activate Divert Call Indicator feature  
AT+CPHS=2,4  
Note: Get the current status of Divert Call  
Indicator  
+WDCI: 1,1 divert call indicator is active on Line 1  
+WDCI: 2,1 divert call indicator is active on Line 2  
+WDCI: 3,0 divert call indicator is deactived on data  
+CME ERROR: 3  
AT+CPHS=2,4  
Note: CPHS feature is not allowed  
AT+CPHS=1,4  
OK  
Note: Activatation of Divert Call Indicator  
feature  
Note: Divert Call Indicator feature is activated  
+WDCI: 1,1  
Note: Call forwarding is active on Line 1  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
128  
 
   
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Network Operator Name +WNON  
Description:  
This indication provides the name of the network operator (as a character string). This command is the  
response to the AT+CPHS 2,5 [,<type format>] command.  
Values:  
<type format>  
0
1
Long format operator name  
Short format operator name. Default.  
<operator name> The name of the operator in long or short format  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CHPS=2,5[,<type format>]  
Response Syntax:+WNON: <type format>,<operator name>  
Command  
AT+CPHS=2,5  
Note: Get Operator Name  
Possible responses  
+WNON: 0,”Orange F”  
OK  
AT+CPHS=2,5,1  
+WNON: 1,”Orange”  
Note: Get short format Operator Name OK  
AT+CPHS=2,5,0  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: CPHS feature is not allowed or format name is not  
accessible  
AT+CPHS=2,5,1  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: CPHS feature is not allowed or format name is not  
accessible  
AT+CPHS=0,5  
OK  
Note: Deactivatation of Network  
Operator Name feature  
Note: No effect  
CPHS Information +WCPI  
Description:  
This indication provides CPHS information; i.e., which data fields are present in the SIM. This command  
is the response to the AT+CPHS 2,6 [,<data field>] command.  
Values:  
<data field> value indicating the field of CPHS information  
If <precision> field is omitted in the AT+CPHS command, all fields of CPHS Information will be  
displayed.  
<status>  
0
1
data field is set  
data field is unset  
When all CPHS Information is requested, the status corresponds to a bit field. See Codes and  
Values in the Appendix.  
Note: The field CSP Service (<data field> = 1) is used to set the CSP feature at initialization.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax:AT+CHPS=2,6[,<data field>]  
Response Syntax:+WCPI: <data field>,<status>  
`
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CPHS=2,6  
+WCPI: 0,”0033000F”  
Note: Get current status for all CPHS Information fields OK  
AT+CPHS=2,6,13  
+WCPI: 13,1  
Note: Get the current status of Call Forward Activated OK  
Indicator for Line 1  
Note: Call Forward is active for Line 1  
AT+CPHS=2,6,22  
+WCPI: 22,0  
Note: Get current status for Line 2 Mailbox Number  
OK  
Note: Mailbox Number for Line 2 is not  
available  
AT+CPHS=2,6,17  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Wrong data field  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: CPHS feature is not allowed  
OK  
AT+CPHS=2,6,22  
Note: Get current status for Line 2 Mailbox Number  
AT+CPHS=0,6  
Note: Deactivatation of CPHS Information feature  
Note: No effect  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
129  
 
   
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Customer Service Profile +WCSP  
Description:  
This indication tells whether or not a service is accessible to the customer. This command is the  
response to the AT+CPHS 2,7,<service>] command.  
Values:  
<service> value indicating the CSP field to display (See Codes and Values in the Appendix).  
<status>  
0
1
service is not customer-accessible  
service is customer-accessible  
Note: The field Alternate Line Service (CPHS Teleservices Group) sets the ALS feature at  
initialization.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax:  
AT+CHPS=2,7,<service>  
Response Syntax:+WCSP: <service>,<status>  
Command  
Possible responses  
ERROR  
ERROR  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Syntax error  
+WCSP: 9,1  
AT+WCSP=?  
AT+WCSP?  
AT+CPHS=2,7  
AT+CPHS=2,7,9  
Note: Get current status of Barring All Outgoing Calls  
OK  
Note: Barring or All Outgoing Calls is  
customer accessible  
+WCSP: 11,1  
AT+CPHS=2,7,11  
Note: Get current status of Barring All Outgoing  
International Calls  
OK  
Note: Barring or All International Outgoing  
Calls is customer accessible  
+CME ERROR: 3  
AT+CPHS=2,7,2  
Note: Get current status of Call Forwarding on User Busy Note: CPHS feature is not allowed  
AT+CPHS=0,7  
OK  
Note: Deactivatation of CPHS Information  
Note: No effect  
Customer Storage Mirror +WMIR  
Description:  
This command allow you to make a mirror copy of the current configuration parameters in the  
EEPROM. In the case of a memory problem for the storage: if a customer mirror already exists, this one  
will be restored. Otherwise, the default mirrored parameters are restored.  
Warning: This command should be used only on special advice from a Technical Support person.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters  
Command syntax: AT+WMIR  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WMIR=?  
AT+WMIR  
OK  
OK  
Note: Build the Customer Mirror  
Change Default Player +WCDP  
Description:  
This command allows the default melody player to be selected.  
Values:  
<player>  
0
1
Buzzer  
Speaker  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WCDP = <player>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WCDP=?  
+WCDP: (0-1)  
OK  
AT+WCDP=0  
OK  
Note: Select the buzzer  
AT+WCDP?  
+WCDP: 0  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
130  
 
     
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN  
Description:  
This command sets the different mailbox numbers in SIM. The +CPHS command can be used to know  
which mailbox numbers can be updated.  
Values:  
<LineId>  
1
2
3
Line 1  
Line 2  
Data  
<number> Phone number in ASCII format  
<type>  
TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format)  
<name>  
name of mailbox  
Notes:  
For the <name> parameter, all strings starting with “80”, “81”, or “82” are considered in  
UCS2 format. See the Appendix G - Coding of Alpha Fields in the SIM for UCS2. If a  
wrong UCS2 format is entered, the string is considered as an ASCII string.  
The AT command +WPCS affects the format of the Mailbox <name> entry.  
<status>  
When checked with “AT+CPHS=2,2”, it indicates if the number can be updated or not:  
0
1
Update is not possible  
Update is possible  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WMBN = <LineId>,<number>,<type>,<name>  
Response syntax to AT+CPHS=2,2: +WMBN = <LineId>,<number>,<type>,<name>,<status>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WMBN=?  
OK  
AT+WMBN?  
OK  
AT+CPHS=2,2  
+WMBN: 1,"0123456789",129,”Maison” , 1  
Note: Get the current Mail Box Numbers in SIM  
+WMBN: 2,”9876543210”,129,”Travail” , 1  
+WMBN: 3,,,,1  
+WMBN: 4,,,,1  
OK  
AT+WMBN=1,”+33122334455”,145  
Note: Set mailbox number for line.  
AT+WMBN=2  
OK  
Note: Mailbox number for Line 1 is set.  
OK  
Note: Erase mailbox number & name for line 2  
AT+CPHS=2,2  
Note: Get current Mail Box Numbers again  
+WMBN: 1,"+ 33122334455",145,1  
+WMBN: 2,,,,1  
+WMBN: 3,,,,1  
+WMBN: 4,,,,1  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
131  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Alternate Line Service +WALS  
Description:  
This command allows you to set and to get the active line. The CPHS command can be used to know  
which line is active.  
Values:  
<CmdType>  
0
1
Set active line  
Get active line  
<Lineld> Used only for <CmdType>  
1
2
Line 1  
Line 2  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WALS = <CmdType>[,<Lineld>]  
Response syntax to AT+CPHS=2,3: +WALS = <Lineld>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WALS?  
+WALS: 1  
OK  
Note: Display current active line  
AT+WALS=?  
+WALS: (0-1),(1-2)  
OK  
AT+WALS = 0,1  
+WALS: 1  
Note: Activate Line 1  
OK  
AT+WALS = 0,2  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Activate Line 2  
AT+WALS = 1  
Note: When the ALS feature is not allowed  
+WALS: 1  
Note: Get the current Active Line  
AT+WALS = 1,2  
Note: Display the current Active Line  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Syntax error  
AT+CPHS=0,3  
OK  
Note: Deactivation of ALS feature  
Note: No effect  
AT+CPHS=2,3  
+WALS: 1  
Note: Interrogate ALS feature  
Note: Display the current Active Line  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: In the case where the ALS feature is not allowed  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
132  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Wavecom Open AT Control Command +WOPEN  
®
Description:  
This command starts, stops, deletes, and gets information about the current Open AT embedded  
application.  
®
This command also allows you to erase the Open AT flash objects storage place and to configure the  
Application and Data (A&D) storage place size.  
Values:  
<Mode>  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Stop the Open AT embedded application. If this one was running, the product resets  
Start the Open AT embedded application. If this one was stopped, the product resets  
Get the Open AT library versions  
Erase the objects flash of Open AT embedded application  
Erase the Open AT embedded application  
Suspend (in Wavecom software kernel) the Open AT embedded application tasks  
If the (A&Dsize) parameter is used, configure the Application & Data storage size. Otherwise,  
display the current A&D storage place size and Open AT application space size. If the A&D  
storage place size has changed, the product resets.  
Notes:  
For Mode=1: If the main version numbers returned by the AT+WOPEN=2 command do  
not match, the command will reply +CME ERROR: 541.  
Mode=3 and 4 are only available only if the Open AT embedded application is stopped  
(AT+WOPEN=0).  
Open AT embedded applications can be resumed with the AT+OPENRES command or  
INTERRUPT feature (see +WCFM).  
Warning: With Mode 6, any A&D size change will lead to this area format process (this  
process will take some seconds on start-up , before the +WIND:3 indication display (up to  
1.5 seconds per 64 Kbytes flash sector size can be considered as a maximum; all A&D  
cells data will be erased).  
<IntVersion>  
ASCII string giving the internal Open AT library version.  
<ExtVersion>  
ASCII string giving the external Open AT library version.  
Note: If no embedded application is loaded, the <ExtVersion> parameter does not  
appear.  
<A&DSize>  
[0 -1344]  
Usable only with <mode>=6  
Kbytes size allocated for the Application & Data storage place. Default = 768  
Kbytes.  
Provided parameter value will be updated with the nearest flash sector subdivision  
(64 Kbytes). For example, if a 100 Kbytes size is required, a 128 Kbytes size will  
effectively be set.  
<OATSize>  
Returned with <mode>=6  
Open AT Application reserved size (in Kbytes). This size is deducted from the  
<A&Dsize> one, since the whole available size for Open AT and A&D storage  
places are 1600 Kbytes (<OATSize> + <A&Dsize> = 1600).  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WOPEN=<Mode>[,<A&Dsize>]  
Response syntax according to mode: +WOPEN: <Mode>[,<IntVersion>[<ExtVersion>]]  
or  
+WOPEN: <Mode>,<A&DSize>,<OATSize>]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WOPEN=?  
+WOPEN: (0-6),(0-1344)  
OK  
AT+WOPEN?  
+WOPEN: 0  
OK  
AT+WOPEN=2  
+WOPEN: 2, “AT v3.01”, “AT v2.10”  
Note: Get the Open AT library OK  
versions  
Note: Open AT v2.10 library version. An embedded application has been  
downloaded on this product  
AT+WOPEN=1  
+CME ERROR: 541  
Note: Since main versions do not match, the Open AT Application  
cannot be started  
AT+WOPEN=2  
+WOPEN: 2, “AT v2.00”,”AT v2.00”  
Note: Get the Open AT library OK  
versions Note: Open AT v2.00 library version. An embedded application has been  
downloaded on this product.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
133  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
AT+WOPEN=3  
OK  
Note: The objects flash are erased  
AT+WOPEN=1  
Note: Start the embedded  
application  
OK  
+WIND: 3  
Note: Product reset in order to start the embedded application  
AT+WOPEN=3  
+CME ERROR: 532  
Note: The embedded application is activated so the objects flash are not  
erased  
AT+WOPEN=4  
+CME ERROR: 532  
Note: The embedded application is activated so it cannot be erased  
AT+WOPEN=0  
Note: Stop the embedded  
application  
OK  
+WIND: 3  
Note: Product reset in order to stop the embedded application  
AT+WOPEN=3  
OK  
Note: The objects flash are erased.  
AT+WOPEN=4  
AT+WOPEN=6  
OK  
Note: The embedded application is erased  
+WOPEN: 6,768,832  
OK  
Note: 768 Kbytes are reserved for A&D storage place, and 832 for the  
Open AT Application  
AT+WOPEN=6,1280  
AT+WOPEN=6,768  
AT+WOPEN=6,900  
+CME ERROR: 550  
Note: The current Open AT Application size is too big to allow this new  
A&D storage place size  
+WOPEN: 6,768,832  
OK  
Note: No product reset (same size used)  
+WOPEN: 6,960,640  
OK  
+WIND: 3  
Note: Size updated according to the nearest flash sector sub-division;  
product reset in order to set the new A&D storage place size.  
AT+WOPEN=6  
AT+WOPEN=5  
+WOPEN: 6,960,640  
OK  
Note: 960 Kbytes are served for the A&D storage place, and 640 for the  
Open AT application  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: The Open AT Application is not running  
AT+WOPEN=1  
OK  
Note: Start the embedded  
application  
+WIND: 3  
Note: Product reset in order to start the embedded application  
+WOPEN=5  
OK  
Note: Suspend Open AT tasks  
AT+WOPEN?  
+WOPEN:5  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
134  
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Reset +WRST  
Description:  
This command resets the modem after the time specified by the <delay> parameter.  
Values:  
<val1>  
0
1
timer reset is disabled  
timer reset is enabled  
<Delay> specify the time for reset  
Range “000:00”- “168:59” (format hhh:mm)  
<RemainTime> time before next reset  
Range “000:01”- “168:59” (format hhh:mm)  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WRST =<Mode>,<Delay>  
Response syntax: +WRST: <Mode>,<Delay>,<RemainTime>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WRST=?  
AT+WRST=0  
OK  
OK  
Note: Disable timer  
AT+WRST=1,”001:03”  
Note: Enable timer and put delay at 1 hour 3  
minutes  
OK  
AT+WRST?  
+WRST: 1,”001:03”,”001:01”  
OK  
Note: Timer activated to reset after 1 hour and 3  
minutes. At this point, 1 hour and 1 minute remain  
before next reset.  
Set Standard Tone +WSST  
Description:  
This command sets and gets the sound level of the Standard Tones.  
Values:  
<sound level> Range [0; 15]  
0
Maximum volume (default)  
15 Minimum volume  
<ring tone level> Range [0; 15]  
0
Maximum volume (default)  
15 Minimum volume  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: AT+WSST=[<sound level>][,<ring tone level>]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WSST=0  
OK  
Note: Set volume to Maximum  
AT+WSST=15  
Note: Set volume to Minimum  
AT+WSST=,5  
OK  
OK  
Note: Set ring tone level to 5  
AT+WSST?  
+WSST: 15,5  
Note: get current standard tones  
sound level  
OK  
Note: current standard tones level is 15  
(minimum), and ring tone level is 5.  
+WSST: (0-15),(0-15)  
AT+WSST=?  
Note: supported parameters  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
135  
 
   
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Hang-up +WATH  
Description:  
This command disconnects the remote user, specifying a release cause and the location. In the case of  
multiple calls, all calls are released (active, on-hold and waiting calls).  
Values:  
<RelCause>:  
decimal value from 1 to 127  
See table “Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 recommendation.”  
<location>:  
optional parameter (default value =0)  
values as defined in 04.08  
0
user  
1
2
3
private network serving the local user  
public network serving the local user  
transit network  
4
5
7
public network serving the remote user  
private network serving the remote user  
international network  
10  
network beyond interworking point  
Note: In order to have a “Normal Release”, use the ATH command.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+WATH=<RelCause>,<location>  
Command  
AT+WATH=31  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: Ask for disconnection with release  
cause=normal and location=USER  
AT+WATH=?  
Note: All calls, if any, are released  
+WATH: (1-127),(0-5,7,10)  
OK  
AT+WATH=17,2  
Note: Ask for disconnection with release  
cause=user busy and location= public network  
serving the local user  
Note: All calls, if any, are released  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
136  
 
 
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands  
Multi-Band Selection +WMBS  
Description:  
Use this command to select the GSM bands on which the modem will work. This command is allowed  
only if the selected bands are supported.  
You can choose whether the change is immediate or not:  
Either the modem has to be reset to take this change into account (this is the default)  
or the GSM stack restarts immediately on the specified band(s). In this mode, the command  
+WMBS is forbidden during the initialization phase of the modem and during calls.  
Values:  
<Band> frequency band configuration to be supported  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
mono-band mode 850 MHz  
mono-band mode 900 MHz  
mono-band mode 1800 MHz  
mono-band mode 1900 MHz  
dual-band mode 850/1900 MHz  
dual-band mode 900E (extended) /1800 MHz  
dual-band mode 900E (extended) /1900 MHz  
<Param> indicates the type of change  
0
the modem will have to be reset in order to start on the specified band(s). <ResetFlag> is set  
to 1.  
1
the change is effective immediately. The GSM stack is restarted with the specified band(s).  
<ResetFlag> stays at 0. This mode is forbidden whil in communication and during modem  
initialization.  
Note: If <Param> is not given, the modem has to be reset to start on the specified band(s), as for  
<param>=0.  
<ResetFlag>  
the feature was not modified since the last boot of the product  
0
1
the feature has been modified since the last boot of the product; it has to be reset in order to  
take the modification into account. This is the case when the band was changed with  
“AT+WMBS=<band>” or “AT+WMBS=<band>,0”  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+WMBS=<Band>[,<param>]  
Response Syntax: +WMBS: <Band>,<ResetFlag>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+WMBS=<Band>  
OK  
Note: The modem has to reset for the change to be effective  
AT+WMBS=<Band>,0  
AT+WMBS=<Band>,1  
AT+WMBS=<Band>  
AT+WMBS?  
OK  
Note: The modem has to reset for the change to be effective  
OK  
Note: Band mode selected and GSM stack restarted  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Note: Band not allowed  
+WMBS:<Band>,<ResetFlag>  
OK  
Note: Current selected band mode is returned.  
AT+WMBS=?  
AT+WMBS=?  
WMBS: (0,3,4),(0-1)  
OK  
Note: Only 850 mono-band or 850/1900 bi-band are available  
WMBS: (01,2,3,4,5,6),(0-1)  
OK  
Note: All bands are available  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
137  
 
 
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit  
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit  
Overview of SIM Application Toolkit  
SIM Toolkit, also known as “SIM Application Toolkit,” introduces new functionalities which open the way to a broad range of  
value added services. The principle is to allow service providers to develop new applications (e.g.. for banking, travel, ticket  
booking, etc.) for subscribers and to download them into the SIM.  
This solution allows new services to be accessible to the user by adding new SIM-based applications without modifying the  
handset.  
Functionality  
The term SIM Toolkit refers to the functionalities described in the GSM Technical Specification 11.14. It introduces about  
twenty-five new commands for the SIM. Three classes of Toolkt functionalities have been defined, with Class 1 offering a  
subset of commands and Class 3 offering the full range of commands (See the Support of SIM Toolkit Classes table in  
APPENDIX D).  
The SIM Application Toolkt supports:  
profile download  
proactive SIM  
data download into SIM  
menu selection  
call control by SIM  
Profile Download  
The Profile Download instruction is sent by the customer application to the SIM as part of the initialization. It is used to  
indicate which SIM Application Toolkit features the customer application supports. The AT command used for this  
operation is +STSF (SIM Toolkit Set Facilities).  
Proactive SIM  
A proactive SIM provides a mechanism whereby the SIM can ask the customer application to perform certain actions.  
These actions include:  
display menu  
display given text  
get user input  
send a short message  
play the requested tone  
set up a call  
provide location information  
This mechanism allows SIM applications to generate powerful menu-driven sequences on the customer application and to  
use services available in the network.  
The commands used for this operation are:  
+STIN (SIM Toolkit Indication),  
+STGI (SIM Toolkit Get Information),  
+STGR (SIM Toolkit Give Response).  
Data Download to SIM  
Data downloading to the SIM allows (SMS, phonebook…) data or programs (Java applets) received by SMS or by Cell  
Broadcast to be transferred directly to the SIM Application.  
This feature does not need any AT command. It is transparent to the customer application.  
Menu Selection  
A set of menu items is supplied by the SIM Application Toolkit. The menu selection command can then be used to inform  
the SIM Application which menu item is selected.  
The commands used for this operation are +STIN, +STGI and +STGR.  
Call Control by SIM  
The call control mechanism allows the SIM to check all dialed numbers, supplementary service control strings and USSD  
strings before connecting to the network. This gives the SIM the ability to allow, bar or modify the string before the  
operation starts.  
The commands used for this operation are:  
+STCR (SIM Toolkit Control Response)  
+STGR (SIM Toolkit Give Response)  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
138  
 
   
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit  
Messages Exchanged During a SIM Toolkit Operation  
The following scheme shows the SIM Toolkit commands and unsolicited results that are exchanged.  
+STSF=X,XXXXXXXX  
STEP 1: Configuration and Activation  
+STIN=X  
STEP 2: SIM sends pro-active command  
MULTI-TECH  
Modem  
Customer  
Application  
+STGI=X  
+STGI response  
STEP 3: Customer application gets all the information.  
+STCR:X  
+STGR=X,XXXXXX  
STEP 4: User response is sent to the SIM.  
Step 1:  
The customer application informs the modem which facilities are supported. This operation is performed with the +STSF  
(SIM Toolkit Set Facilities) command, which also activates or deactivates the SIM Toolkit functionality.  
Step 2:  
An unsolicited result +STIN (SIM Toolkit indication) is sent by the product in order to indicate to the customer application  
which command type the SIM Application Toolkit is running. The last SIM Toolkit indication can be requested by the  
+STIN? command.  
Step 3:  
The customer application uses the +STGI (SIM Toolkit Get Information) command to get all the information about the SIM  
Toolkit command, given by +STIN.  
Step 4:  
The customer application uses the +STGR (SIM Toolkit Give Response) to send its response (if any) to the SIM Toolkit  
Application.  
The +STCR (SIM Toolkit Control response) indication is an unsolicited result sent by the SIM when Call control  
functionality is activated and before the customer application has performed any outgoing call, SMS, SS, or USSD.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
139  
 
 
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit  
SIM Toolkit Commands  
SIM Toolkit Set Facilities +STSF  
Description:  
This command allows SIM Toolkit facilities to be activated, deactivated or configured.  
Values:  
<mode>  
0
1
2
Deactivates the SIM Toolkit functionalities.  
Activates the SIM Toolkit functionalities.  
Configures the SIM Toolkit functionalities.  
<Config>  
(160060C01F – 5FFFFFFF7F) (hex format)  
Default: 1F6BFFFF1F  
<Timeout>  
1-255 Timeout for user responses (multiple of 10 seconds).  
Default: 3  
<Autoresponse>  
Automatic response is not activated  
Automatic response is activated  
Default: 1  
0
1
Notes about Values:  
The activation or deactivation of the SIM Toolkit functionalities requires the use of the +CFUN (Set  
phone functionality) command to reset the product (this operation is not necessary if PIN is not  
entered yet).  
The <Config> parameter gives the coding of the TERMINAL PROFILE, precisely the list of SIM  
Application Toolkit facilities that are supported by the customer application.  
The <Timeout> parameter (multiple of 10 seconds) sets the maximum time the user has for reacting  
(to select an item, to input a text, etc).  
When the <Autoresponse> is activated, the +STIN indication for Play Tone (5), Refresh (7), Send SS  
(8), Send SMS (9) or Send USSD (10) is automatically followed by the corresponding +STGI  
response.  
Note about Bits:  
Some bits are related to the product only and not to the customer application. The product automatically  
sets these bits to either 0 or 1 whatever the user enters with the +STSF command. Those values are  
given in Appendix D.  
Each facility is coded on 1 bit:  
bit = 1: facility is supported by the customer application.  
bit = 0: facility is not supported by the customer application.  
Only the first five bytes of the TERMINAL PROFILE (Class 2) can be configured. The other are set to 0.  
(See structure of TERMINAL PROFILE in APPENDIX E.)  
Syntax:  
Command syntax: +STSF=<mode>[,<config>][,<Timeout>][,<AutoResponse>]  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+STSF=<Mode>[,<Config>]  
[,<Timeout>][,<AutoResponse>]  
AT+STSF?  
OK  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
+STSF: <Mode>,<Config>,<Timeout>,<Autoresponse>  
+STSF: (0-2), (160060C01F - 5FFFFFFF7F),(1-255),(0-1)  
OK  
AT+STSF=?  
SIM Toolkit Facilities Error Codes  
+CME ERROR: 3  
Operation not allowed.  
This error is returned when a wrong parameter is entered.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
140  
 
   
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit  
Example  
AT+CMEE=1  
Enable the reporting of mobile equipment errors  
OK  
OK  
AT+WIND=15  
AT+CPAS  
Set indications  
Query ME Status  
ME is ready.  
+CPAS: 0  
OK  
AT+STSF=?  
AT+STSF?  
Test command SIM Toolkit Set Facilities  
+STSF: (0-2), (160060C01F – 5FFFFFFF7F),(1-255)  
OK  
+STSF: 0,”160060C000”,3  
OK  
No activation of SIM Toolkit functionality  
AT+STSF=2,”5FFFFFFF7F”  
Set all SIM Toolkit facilities (class 3).  
Syntax Error  
OK  
AT+STSF=3  
+CME ERROR: 3  
AT+STSF=1  
AT+CFUN=1  
AT+CPIN?  
Activation of SIM Toolkit functionality  
Reboot Software.  
OK  
OK  
Is the ME requiring a password?  
Yes, SIM PIN required  
+CPIN: SIM PIN  
AT+CPIN=0000  
OK  
PIN OK  
+WIND: 4  
Init phase is complete  
AT+STSF?  
+STSF: 1,”5FFFFFFF7F”,3  
OK  
SIM Toolkit functionality activated with all facilities  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
141  
 
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit  
SIM Toolkit Indication +STIN or +STRIL  
Unsolicited Result  
In order to allow the customer application to identify the pro-active command sent via SIM Toolkit, a mechanism of  
unsolicited SIM Toolkit indications (+STIN) is implemented.  
Syntax: AT+STIN: <CmdType>  
Option:  
<CmdType>  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Indicates that a ‘Setup Menu’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.  
Indicates that a ‘Display Text’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.  
Indicates that a ‘Get Inkey’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.  
Indicates that a ‘Get Input’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.  
Indicates that a ‘Setup Call’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.  
Indicates that a ‘Play Tone’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)  
Indicates that a ‘Sel Item’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.  
Indicates that a ‘Refresh’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)  
Indicates that a ‘Send SS’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)  
Indicates that a ‘Send SMS’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)  
Indicates that a ‘Send USSD’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)  
Indicates that a ‘SETUP EVENT LIST’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.  
An “SMS-PP Download” failed due to SIM BUSY  
8
9
10  
11  
93  
94  
98  
99  
An “SMS-PP Download” failed due to SIM ERROR  
Indicates the timeout when no response from user.  
Indicates that a “End Session” has been sent from the SIM.  
(*) if the automatic response parameter is activated, this indication is followed by the corresponding +STGI  
response.  
Second SIM Toolkit Indication  
If the customer application needs to exchange a SIM Toolkit message directly with the SIM card, the second  
indication (+STRIL) gives the full command string provided by the SIM.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<CmdTreated>  
0
1
The command must be treated by the application  
The is already treated by the modem  
<Command string> string type: SIM command string in hexadecimal format.  
+STRIL: <CmdTreated>,<Command string>  
Last SIM Toolkit Indication  
The last SIM Toolkit indication sent by the SIM can be requested by the AT+STIN? command. This command is  
only usable between the sending of the STIN indication by the SIM (Step 2, Messages exchanged during a SIM  
Toolkit operation) and the response of the user with the +STGI command (Step 3).  
Syntax: Command syntax: AT+STIN?  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+STIN?  
Note: Ask for the last SIM Toolkit  
indication sent by the SIM  
+STIN: 0  
OK  
Note: the last SIM Toolkit indication was a Setup Menu  
Note: Display the SIM Toolkit application menu  
+CME ERROR: 4  
AT+STGI=0  
AT+STIN?  
Note: Ask for the last SIM Toolkit  
indication sent by the SIM  
Note: Operation not supported. The +STGI command has  
been already used  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
142  
 
 
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit  
SIM Toolkit Get Information +STGI  
Description:  
This command allows to get the information (text to display, menu information, priorities…) of a pro-  
active command sent from the SIM.  
The information is returned only after receiving a SIM Toolkit indication (+STIN).  
Values:  
Syntax :  
Values are listed after the Command Table  
Command syntax: +STGI=<CmdType>  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+STGI=<CmdType>  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
AT+STGI=?  
+STGI: (0-11)  
OK  
Table of Command Types  
Cmd Description  
Type  
Possible responses  
0
Get information about Setup Menu  
+STGI: <Alpha Identifier menu>  
pro-active command.  
+STGI: <Id1>,<NbItems>,<Alpha Id1 Label>,<Help  
Info>[,<NextActionId>]<CR><LF>  
+STGI: <Id2>,<NbItems>,<Alpha Id2 Label>,<Help  
Info>[,<NextActionId>]<CR><LF>  
[…]]  
No action expected from SIM.  
1
2
3
Get information about Display text  
pro-active command.  
Get information about Get Inkey  
pro-active command.  
Get information about Get Input  
pro-active command.  
+STGI: <Prior>,<Text>,<ClearMode>  
No action expected from SIM.  
+STGI: <Format>,<HelpInfo>[,<TextInfo>]  
SIM expects key pressed (+STGR).  
+STGI: <Format>,<EchoMode>,<SizeMin>,<SizeMax>,  
<HelpInfo>[,<TextInfo>]  
SIM expects key input (+STGR).  
+STGI: <Type>,<CalledNb>,<SubAddress>,<Class>  
SIM expects user authorization (+STGR).  
+STGI: <ToneType>[,<TimeUnit>,<TimeInterval>,<TextInfo>]  
No action.  
+STGI: <DefaultItem>, <Alpha Identifier menu><CR><LF>  
+STGI: <Id1>,<NbItems>,<Alpha Id1 Label>,<Help  
Info>[,<NextActionId>]<CR><LF>  
4
5
6
Get information about Setupt call  
pro-active command.  
Get information about Play Tone  
pro-active command.  
Get information about Sel Item  
pro-active command.  
+STGI: <Id2>,<NbItems>,<Alpha Id2 Label>,<Help  
Info>[,<NextActionId>]<CR><LF>  
[…]]  
SIM expects an item choice (+STGR).  
7
Get information about Refresh  
pro-active command.  
Get information about Send SS  
pro-active command.  
+STGI: <RefreshType>  
No action (Refresh done automatically by product).  
+STGI:<TextInfo>  
8
No action (Send SS done automatically by product).  
9
Get information about Send SMS  
pro-active command.  
Get information about Send USSD  
pro-active command.  
Get information about SETUP EVENT LIST  
pro-active command.  
+STGI: <TextInfo>  
No action (Send SMS done automatically by product).  
+STGI: <TextInfo>  
No action (Send USSD done automatically by product).  
+STGI: <Evt>  
10  
11  
Values for the SIM Toolkit Get Information Command:  
Values when CmdType=0 (Setup menu)  
<Alpha Idenitifer menu>  
<Idx> (1-255)  
<NbItems> (1-255)  
<Alpha Idx Label>  
<HelpInfo>  
Alpha identifier of the main menu  
Menu item Identifier  
Number of items in the main menu  
Alpha identifier label of items in ASCII format  
0
No help information available  
1
Help information available  
<NextActionId>  
Contains a pro-active command identifier (see the table in APPENDIX F)  
Compared to other commands the customer application can always get information about setup menu after having  
received the +STIN:0 indication.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
143  
 
 
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit  
Values when CmdType=1 (Display text)  
<Prior>  
0
Normal priority of display  
1
High priority of display  
<Text>  
Text to display in ASCII format  
<ClearMode>  
0
1
Clear message after a delay (3 seconds)  
Wait for user to clear message  
Values when CmdType=2 (Get Inkey)  
<Format>  
0
Digit (0-9, *, #,and +)  
1
2
SMS alphabet default  
UCS2  
<HelpInfo>  
0
1
No help information available  
Help information available  
<TextInfo>  
Text information in ASCII format  
Values when CmdType=3 (Get Input)  
<Format>  
0
Digit (0-9, *, #,and +)  
1
2
SMS alphabet default  
UCS2  
3
4
Unpacked format  
Packed format  
<EchMode>  
0
Echo off  
1
Echo on  
<SizeMin> (1-255)  
<SizeMax> (1-255)  
Minimum length of input  
Maximum length of input  
<HelpInfo>  
0
1
No help information available  
Help information available  
<TextInfo>  
Text information in ASCII format  
Values when CmdType=4 (Setup Call)  
<Type>  
0
Set up call but only if not currently busy on another call  
1
2
Set up call, putting all other calls (if any) on hold  
Set up call, disconnecting all other calls (if any)  
Called party number in ASCII format  
<CalledNb>  
<SubAdress>  
<Class>  
0
Called party sub-address in ASCII format  
Voice call  
Data call  
1
<Alpha Id>  
Values when CmdType=5 (Play tone)  
<ToneType>  
0
Tone Dial  
1
Tone Busy  
2
3
4
Tone Congestion  
Tone Radio ack  
Tone Dropped  
5
Tone Error  
6
7
Tone Call waiting  
Tone Ringing  
8
9
10  
Tone General beep  
Tone Positive beep  
Tone Negative beep  
<TimeUnit>  
0
Time unit used is minutes  
1
Time unit used is seconds  
2
Time unit used is tenths of seconds  
Time required expressed in units  
Text information in ASCII format  
<TimeInterval> (1-255)  
<TextInfo>  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
144  
 
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit  
Values when CmdType=6 (Sel Item)  
<DefaultItem> (1-255)  
<Alpha Idenitifer menu>  
<Idx> (1-255)  
Default Item Identifier  
Alpha identifier of the main menu  
Identifier items  
<NbItems> (1-255)  
<Alpha Idx Label>  
<HelpInfo>  
Number of items in the menu  
Alpha identifier label of items in ASCII format  
0
1
No help information available  
Help information available  
<NextActionId>  
Contains a pro-active command identifier. (see the table in APPENDIX F)  
Values when CmdType=7 (Refresh)  
<RefreshType>  
0
1
2
3
4
SlM initialization and full file change notification  
File change notification  
SIM initialization and file change notification  
SIM initialization  
SIM reset  
Values when CmdType=8 (Send SS)  
<TextInfo>  
Text information in ASCII format  
Text information in ASCII format  
Values when CmdType=9 (Send SMS)  
<TextInfo>  
Values when CmdType=10 (Send USSD)  
<TextInfo>  
Text information in ASCII format  
Values when CmdType=11 (Setup Event List)  
<Evt>  
1
2
3
4
Reporting asked for an ‘Idle Screen’ event  
Reporting asked for an ‘User Activity’ event  
Reporting asked for ‘Idle Screen’ and ‘User Activity’ events  
Cancellation of reporting event  
Note: For the UCS2 format texts are displayed in Hexa ASCII format. Example: When the SIM sends a TextString  
containing 0x00 0x41 the text displayed is “0041”.  
Error Codes for the SIM Toolkit Get Information Command:  
+ CME ERROR: 3  
+CME ERROR: 4  
Operation not allowed. This error is returned when a wrong parameter is detected.  
Operation not supported. This error is returned when the user wants to get information  
about a SIM Toolkit pro-active command (with SIM Toolkit functionality not activated.)  
SIM Toolkit indication not received. This error is returned when the SIM Toolkit indication  
(+STIN) has not been received.  
+CME ERROR: 518  
Example  
Initially, all facilities are activated. The PIN is not required and SIM Toolkit functionality is activated.  
AT+CMEE=1  
Enable the reporting of mobile equipment errors  
OK  
AT+WIND=15  
Set indications  
OK  
AT+STSF?  
+STSF: 1,”5FFFFFFF7F”,3  
OK  
SIM Toolkit functionality activated with all facilities.  
The main menu has been sent from the SIM.  
+STIN: 0  
AT+STIN?  
+STIN: 0  
OK  
AT+STGI=0  
Get information about the main menu  
Main menu contains 3 items.  
+STGI: ”SIM TOOLKIT MAIN MENU”  
+STGI: 1,3,”BANK”,0  
+STGI: 2,3,”QUIZ”,0  
+STGI: 3,3,”WEATHER”,0  
OK  
AT+STIN?  
+CME ERROR: 4  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
145  
 
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit  
Unsolicited Result: SIM Toolkit Control Response  
+STCR  
Description:  
When the customer application makes an outgoing call or an outgoing SMS and if the call control facility  
is activated, CALL CONTROL and SMS CONTROL responses can be identified. This is also applicable  
to SS calls.  
Values:  
<Result>  
0
1
Control response not allowed.  
Control response with modification.  
<Number>  
<MODestAddr> MO destination address in ASCII format.  
<TextInfo> Text information in ASCII format.  
Called number, Service Center Address or SS String in ASCII format.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: +STCR: <Result>[,<Number>,<MODestAddr>,<TextInfo>]  
SIM Toolkit Give Response +STGR  
Description:  
This command allows the application/user to select an item in the main menu or to answer the following  
proactive commands:  
GET INKEY  
GET INPUT  
SELECT ITEM  
SETUP CALL  
DISPLAY TEXT  
SETUP EVENT LIST  
Key Pressed By The User.  
Message Entered By The User.  
Selected Item.  
User Confirmation.  
User Confirmation To Clear The Message.  
Reporting events.  
It is also possible to terminate the current proactive command session by sending a Terminal Response  
to the SIM, with the following parameters:  
BACKWARD MOVE  
BEYOND CAPABILITIES  
UNABLE TO PROCESS  
NO RESPONSE  
Process a backward move  
Command beyond ME capabilities  
ME is currently unable to process command  
No response from the user  
User abort.  
END SESSION  
Values:  
Syntax:  
The values are listed after the Command Syntax Table.  
Command syntax: +STGR=<CmdType>[,<Result>,<Data>]  
Command  
AT+STGR=<CmdType>[,<Result>,<Data OK  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
OK  
Possible responses  
For GetInput with <Result>=1:  
AT+STGR=3,1<CR>  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
<Data><Ctrl Z>  
For GetInkey with <Result>=1  
AT+STGR=2,1,”<Data>”  
OK  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
AT+STGR=?  
OK  
Values:  
<CmdType>  
0
1
2
3
4
6
Item selection in the main menu.  
User confirmation to clear a ‘Disp Text’.  
Response for a ‘Get Inkey’.  
Response for a ‘Get Input’.  
Response for a ‘Setup call’.  
Response for a ‘Sel Item’.  
11 Reponse for a ‘Setup event list’.  
95 Backward move  
96 Command beyond ME capabilities  
97 ME currently unable to process command  
98 No response from the user.  
99 User abort.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
146  
 
   
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit  
Values when CmdType=0 (Select an item from the main menu)  
<Result>  
1
2
Item selected by the user.  
Help information required by user.  
<Data> Contains the item identifier of the item selected by the user.  
Values when CmdType=1 (Confirm the display text clearing)  
No values.  
Values when CmdType=2 (Get Inkey)  
<Result>  
0
1
2
Session ended by user.  
Response given by the user.  
Help information required by user.  
<Data> Contains the key pressed by the user.  
Values when CmdType=3 (Get Input)  
<Result>  
0
1
2
Session ended by user.  
Response given by the user.  
Help information required by user.  
<Data> Contains the string of characters entered by the user.  
Note: For Inputs in UCS2 format, the data are entered in ASCII format. Example: For  
“8000410042FFFF” entered, the SIM receives 0x00 0x41 0x00 0x42 with UCS2 DCS. (See the  
Appendix G about the different UCS2 syntaxes).  
Values when CmdType=4 (Setup call)  
<Result>  
0
1
User refuses the call.  
User accepts call.  
Values when CmdType=6 (Select Item)  
<Result>  
0
1
2
3
Session terminated by the user  
Item selected by the user  
Help information required by the user  
Return to the back item  
<Data> Contains the item identifier selected by the user  
Values when CmdType=11 (Setup Event List)  
<Result>  
1
2
Idle screen available.  
User activity event.  
Sending a Terminal Response to the SIM:  
Values when CmdType=95 (Backward Move)  
Values when CmdType=96 (Command beyond ME capabilities)  
Values when CmdType=97 (ME currently unable to process command)  
Values when CmdType=98 (No response from the user)  
Values when CmdType=99 (SIM Toolkit Session aborting by the user)  
No values.  
It is possible to send a Terminal Response after the +STIN indication (step 2, of Messages exchanged during a SIM  
Toolkit operation), or after the +STGI command (step 3).  
Note: For the SETUP MENU Proactive Command, it is only possible to send a Terminal Response after the +STIN:  
0 indication, not after a +STGI=0 request. All of the Terminal Responses are not possible with all of the  
Proactive Commands. Compatibility between available Terminal Responses and Proactive Commands is  
given in Appendix D, Table 2. If a Terminal Response is attempted during a incompatible Proactive Command  
session, a +CME ERROR: 3 will be returned.  
Possible error codes  
+CME ERROR: 3 Operation not allowed. This error is returned when a wrong parameter is detected.  
+CME ERROR: 4 Operation not supported. This error is returned when the user gives a response with  
SIM Toolkit functionality not activated. Or if the SIM Toolkit indication (+STIN) has not  
been received.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
147  
 
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit  
Example  
Initially, all facilities are activated, the PIN is not required and the SIM Toolkit functionality is activated.  
+STIN: 0  
AT+STGI=0  
+STGI: 1,3,”BANK”,0  
+STGI: 2,3,”QUIZ”,0  
+STGI: 3,3,”WEATHER”,0  
OK  
The main menu has been sent from the SIM.  
Get information about the main menu  
The main menu contains 3 items.  
AT+STGR=0,1,1  
OK  
The item 2 of the main menu has been selected.  
+STIN: 6  
AT+STGI=6  
+STGI: 1,”BANK”  
The Sel item menu has been sent from the SIM.  
Get information about the BANK menu  
The BANK menu contains two items.  
+STGI: 1,2,”PERSONAL ACCOUNT ENQUIRY”,1  
+STGI: 2,2,”NEWS”,0  
OK  
AT+STGR=6,1,1  
OK  
Select Item 1.  
+STIN: 3  
AT+STGI=3  
User request to enter Password sent.  
Get information about this request.  
+STGI: 0,0,4,4,0,”Enter Account Password:’  
OK  
AT+STGR=3,1<CR>  
>0000<Ctrl Z>  
OK  
The user enters the Password.  
+STIN:1  
AT+STGI=1  
A text info has been sent from the SIM.  
Get information about this text.  
+STGI: 0,”Password correct, please wait for response”,0  
OK  
+STIN: 9  
AT+STGI=9  
SIM requests a bank account update from bank server via the network (SEND SMS)  
Get all information about the SEND SMS  
+STGI: ”Send account balance of user, authorization ok”  
OK  
********* After a short period of time. ********  
+STIN: 5  
Transaction is complete: BEEP  
+STGI=5  
+STGI: 9,1,1  
+STIN: 1  
Get information about the Tone  
Display text indication  
AT+STGI=1  
+STGI: 0,”Your account balance is 1000 $”,0  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
148  
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Chapter 15 – GPRS commands  
Important: GPRS commands are not available under GSM-only software.  
Define PDP Context +CGDCONT  
Description:  
This command specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by the local context  
identification parameter, <cid>.  
Four PDP contexts can be defined through the software.  
A special form of the set command, +CGDCONT= <cid> causes the values for context number <cid> to  
become undefined.  
The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the modem supports several PDP  
types, <PDP_type>, the parameter value ranges for each <PDP_type> are returned on a separate line.  
The read command returns the current settings for each defined context.  
The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the modem supports several PDP  
types, <PDP_type), the parameter value ranges for each <PDP_type> are returned on a separate line.  
Values:  
<cid> (PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter (1-4) which specifies a particular PDP context  
definition. The parameter is local to the DTE-modem interface and is used in other PDP  
context-related commands.  
<PDP_type> (Packet Data Protocol type) a string parameter which specifies the type of packet data  
protocol  
IP  
Internet Protocol  
PPP Point to Point Protocol  
<APN> (Access Point Name) a string parameter, which is a logical name that is used to select the  
GGSN or the external packet data network.  
If the value is null or omitted, then the subscription value will be requested.  
<PDP_address> a string parameter that identifies the modem in the address space applicable to the  
PDP.  
If the value is null or omitted, then a value may be provided by the DTE during the PDP  
startup procedure or a dynamic address will be requested. The read form of the command will  
continue to return the null string even if an address has been allocated during the PDP  
startup procedure. The allocated address may be read using the +CGPADDR command.  
<d_comp> a numeric parameter that controls PDP data compression  
0
1
Off (default if value is omitted)  
On  
Other values are reserved.  
<h_comp> a numeric parameter that controls PDP header compression  
0
1
Off (default if value is omitted)  
On  
Other values are reserved.  
Notes:  
The data compression algorithm (V.42bis) provided in SNDCP is V.42bis.  
Four CIDs are available to specify four PDP contexts, but only 11 NSAPIs are available for  
PDP activation. Only one can be activated at a time.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
149  
 
   
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CGDCONT  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CGDCONT=[<cid> [,<PDP_type>  
[,<APN> [,<PDP_addr> [,<d_comp>  
[,<h_comp>]]]]]]  
OK  
ERROR  
AT+CGDCONT?  
+CGDCONT: <cid>, <PDP_type>, <APN>,<PDP_addr>,  
<data_comp>, <head_comp>  
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: <cid>, <PDP_type>,  
<APN>,<PDP_addr>, <data_comp>, <head_comp>  
[...]]  
OK  
AT+CGDCONT=?  
+CGDCONT: (range of supported <cid>s),  
<PDP_type>,,,(list of supported <d_comp>s),  
(list of supported <h_comp>s)  
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: (range of supported <cid>s),  
<PDP_type>,,,(list of supported <d_comp>s),(list of  
supported <h_comp>s)  
[...]]  
OK  
OK  
AT+CGDCONT: 1, “IP” “internet”;  
AT+CGCONT=2, “IP”, “abc.com”  
AT+CGDCONT=?  
+CGCONT: (1-4), “IP”,,,(0-1),(0-1)  
+CGCONT: (1-4), “PPP”,,,0,0,0  
OK  
AT+CGCONT?  
+CGCONT: 1, “IP”,”internet”,,0,0  
+CGCONT: 2, “IP”,”abc.com”,,0,0  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
150  
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Quality of Service Profile Requested +CGQREQ  
Description:  
This command allows the DTE to specify a Quality of Service Profile that is used when the modem  
sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network.  
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the local context identification  
parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the  
+CGQREQ command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command. The QoS profile  
consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value.  
A special form of the set command, +CGQREQ= <cid>, causes the requested profile for context  
number <cid> to become undefined.  
The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. The test command returns  
values supported as a compound value. If the modem supports several PDP types, the parameter value  
ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line.  
Values:  
<cid>  
Numeric parameter that specifies a particular PDP context definition  
Range 1- 3  
<precedence> Numeric parameter that specifies the precedence class  
0
1
2
3
Subscribed precedence - Subscribed by the Network by default if value is omitted  
High priority. Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence classes 2 & 3  
Normal priority - Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence class 3  
Low priority - Service commitments shall be maintained after precedence classes 1 and 2  
<delay> Numeric parameter that specifies the delay class  
0
1
2
3
4
Subscribed  
Delay class 1  
Delay class 2  
Delay class 3  
Delay class 4  
Delay (maximum values)  
SDU size: 128 bytes  
Delay Class  
SDU size: 1024 bytes  
95 percentile Delay Mean Transfer Delay 95 percentile Delay (sec)  
(sec) (sec)  
Subscribed by the Nwk / default if value is omitted  
Mean Transfer  
Delay (sec)  
0
Subscribed  
< 0.5  
< 5  
1. (Predictive)  
2. (Predictive)  
3. (Predictive)  
4. (Best Effort)  
< 2  
< 7  
< 25  
< 250  
< 15  
< 75  
< 75  
< 375  
< 50  
Unspecified  
<reliabiliy>  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Subscribed  
Up to 1 000 (8 kbit/s)  
Up to 2 000 (16 kbit/s)  
Up to 4 000 (32kbit/s)  
Up to 8 000 (64 kbit/s)  
Up to 16 000 (188 kbit/s)  
Up to 32 000 (256 kbit/s)  
Up to 64 000 (512 kbit/s)  
Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbit/s)  
Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbit/s)  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
151  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Reliability GTP Mode  
Class  
LLC Frame Mode LLC Data RLC Block Mode Traffic Type  
Protection  
0
1
Subscribed  
Acknowledged  
Subscribed by the Nwk / default if value is omitted  
Acknowledged Protected Acknowledged  
Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive  
application that cannot cope with  
data loss.  
2
3
4
5
Unacknowledged Acknowledged Protected Acknowledged  
Unacknowledged Unacknowledged Protected Acknowledged  
Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive  
application that can cope with  
infrequent data loss.  
Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive  
application that can cope with data  
loss, GMM/SM, & SMS.  
Unacknowledged Unacknowledged Protected Unacknowledged Real-time traffic, error-sensitive  
application that can cope with data  
loss.  
Unacknowledged Unacknowledged Unprotecte Unacknowledged Real-time traffic, error non-sensitive  
d
application that can cope with data  
loss.  
Note: For real-time traffic, the QoS profile also requires appropriate settings for delay and throughput.  
<peak>  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Subscribed  
Up to 1 000 (8 kbit/s)  
Up to 2 000 (16 kbit/s)  
Up to 4 000 (32kbit/s)  
Up to 8 000 (64 kbit/s)  
Up to 16 000 (188 kbit/s)  
Up to 32 000 (256 kbit/s)  
Up to 64 000 (512 kbit/s)  
Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbit/s)  
Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbit/s)  
<mean>  
0
1
Subscribed by the Network by default if value is omitted  
100 (~0.22 bit/s)  
2
200 (~0.44 bit/s)  
3
500 (~1.11 bit/s)  
4
1 000 (~2.2 bit/s)  
5
2 000 (~4.4 bit/s)  
6
5 000 (~11.1 bit/s)  
7
10 000 (~22 bit/s)  
8
20 000 (~44 bit/s)  
9
50 000 (~111 bit/s)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
31  
100 000 (~0.22 kbit/s)  
200 000 (~0.44 kbit/s)  
500 000 (~1.11 kbit/s)  
1 000 000 (~2.2 kbit/s)  
2 000 000 (~4.4 kbit/s)  
5 000 000 (~11.1 kbit/s)  
10 000 000 (~22 kbit/s)  
20 000 000 (~44 kbit/s)  
50 000 000 (~111 kbit/s)  
Best effort  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
152  
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Syntax: Command Syntax:  
Command  
Possible Response(s)  
AT+CGQREQ=[<cid> [,<precedence >  
[,<delay> [,<reliability.> [,<peak>  
OK  
ERROR  
[,<mean>]]]]]]  
AT+CGQREQ?  
+CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence >, <delay>, <reliability>,  
<peak>, <mean>  
[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence >, <delay>,  
<reliability.>, <peak>, <mean>  
[…]]  
OK  
AT+CGQREQ=?  
+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported  
<precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of  
supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s), (list  
of supported <mean>s)  
[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported  
<precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of  
supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s), (list  
of supported <mean>s)  
[…]]  
OK  
AT +CGQREQ=1,1,4,5,2,14  
AT+CGQREQ=?  
OK  
+CGQREG: “IP”, (1-3), (1-4), (1-5), (1-9), (1-31)  
+CGQREQ: “PPP”, (1-3), (1-4), (1-5), (1-9), (1-31)  
OK  
AT+CGQREQ?  
+CGQREQ: 1,1,4,5,2,14  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
153  
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Quality of Service Profile Minimum Acceptable  
+CGQMIN  
Description:  
This command allows the DTE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is checked by the modem  
against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate PDP Context Accept message.  
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the local context identification  
parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the  
+CGQMIN command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command. The QoS profile consists  
of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value.  
A special form of the set command, +CGQMIN= <cid> causes the minimum acceptable profile for  
context number <cid> to become undefined. In this case no check is made against the negotiated  
profile.  
The read command returns the current settings1 for each defined context.  
The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the modem supports several PDP  
types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context .  
<precedence>: a numeric parameter which specifies the precedence class.  
<delay>: a numeric parameter which specifies the delay class.  
<reliability>: a numeric parameter which specifies the reliability class.  
<peak>: a numeric parameter which specifies the peak throughput class.  
<mean>: a numeric parameter which specifies the mean throughput class.  
Note: If a value is omitted for a particular class then this class is not checked.  
Command Syntax: AT+CGQMIN  
Command  
Possible Response(s)  
AT+CGQMIN=[<cid> [,<precedence >  
[,<delay> [,<reliability.> [,<peak>  
[,<mean>]]]]]]  
OK  
ERROR  
AT+CGQMIN?  
+CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence >, <delay>, <reliability>,  
<peak>, <mean>  
[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence >, <delay>,  
<reliability.>, <peak>, <mean>  
[…]]  
OK  
AT+CGQMIN=?  
+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported  
<precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of  
supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s), (list  
of supported <mean>s)  
[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported  
<precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of  
supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s), (list  
of supported <mean>s)  
[…]]  
OK  
AT+CGQMIN=1,1,4,5,2,31  
AT+CGQMIN=?  
OK  
+CGQMIN: “IP”,(1-3),(1-4),(1-5),(1-9),(1-31)  
+CGQMIN: “PPP”,(1-3),(1-4),(1-5),(1-9),(1-31)  
OK  
AT+CGQMIN?  
+CGQMIN=? 1,1,4,5,2,14  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
154  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
GPRS Attach or Detach +CGATT  
Description:  
The execution command is used to attach the modem to, or detach the modem from, the GPRS service.  
After the command has completed, the modem remains in V.25ter command state. If the modem is  
already in the requested state, the command is ignored and the OK response is returned. If the  
requested state cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended  
error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command.  
Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the attachment state changes to  
detached.  
The read command returns the current GPRS service state.  
The test command is used for requesting information on the supported GPRS service states.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<state> Indicates the state of GPRS attachment  
0
1
2
Detached  
Attached  
Combined detach (GPRS and GSM detach in the same network request)  
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the execution command.  
Command Syntax: AT+CGATT  
Command  
Possible Responses  
AT+CGATT= [<state>]  
OK  
ERROR  
AT+CGATT?  
+CGATT: <state>  
OK  
AT+CGATT=?  
+CGATT: (list of supported  
<state>s)  
OK  
AT+CGATT=1  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
155  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT  
Description:  
The execution command activates or deactivates the specified PDP context (s). After the command has  
completed, the modem remains in V.25ter command state. If any PDP context is already in the  
requested state, the state for that context remains unchanged.  
If the requested state for any specified context cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR  
response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command.  
If the modem is not GPRS attached when the activation form of the command is executed, the modem  
first performs a GPRS attach and them attempts to activate the specified contexts. If the attach fails  
then the modem responds with ERROR or, if extended error responses are enabled, with the  
appropriate failure-to-attach error message.  
If no <cid>s are specified the activation form of the command activates the first activable defined  
contexts. If no <cid>s are specified the deactivation form of the command deactivates all active  
contexts.  
One PDP context can be activated at the same time.  
The read command returns the current activation states for all the defined PDP contexts.  
The test command is used for requesting information on the supported PDP context activation states.  
Note: See “Full GPRS AT Command Examples” later in this chapter.  
Values:  
<state> Indicates the state of PDP context activation  
0
1
Deactivated  
Activated  
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the execution command.  
<cid> A numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context.  
Before a context can be activated, the modem must be attached to the GPRS network by  
performing an automatic GPRS attach.  
Note: If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not  
supported.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CGACT  
Command  
Possible Response(s)  
AT+CGACT=[<state>  
[,<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]]  
AT+CGACT?  
OK  
ERROR  
+CGACT: <cid>, <state>  
[<CR><LF>+CGACT: <cid>, <state>  
[...]]  
OK  
AT+CGACT=?  
+CGACT: (list of supported <state>s)  
OK  
AT+CGACT=1,1  
AT+CGACT?  
OK  
+CGACT: 1,1  
OK  
AT+CGACT=?  
+CGACT: (0-1)  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
156  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Enter Data State +CGDATA  
Description:  
The command causes the modem to perform the necessary actions to set up communication between  
the DTE and the network. This may include performing a GPRS attach and one PDP context activation.  
If the <cid> value is not defined to the modem, the modem will return an ERROR or +CME ERROR  
response. Otherwise, the modem issues the intermediate result code CONNECT and enters V.25ter  
online data state.  
GPRS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior to or during the PDP  
startup if they have not already been performed using the +CGATT and +CGACT commands.  
If no <cid> is given, the modem attempts to activate the context with whatever information is available to  
the modem. The other context parameters is set to their default values (No APN, default QOS  
parameters, dynamic IP address requested).  
If the activation is successful, data transfer may proceed.  
After data transfer and layer 2 protocol termination procedure completion, the V.25ter command state is  
re-entered and the modem returns the final result code OK.  
In case of an abnormal termination or start up, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the modem  
returns the final result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled, +CME ERROR. Attach, activate and other  
errors may be reported.  
This command may be used in both normal and modem compatibility modes.  
Note: The goal of this command is the same than ATD*99***.  
Note:  
If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not supported.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<cid> A numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition.  
Command Syntax: AT+CGDATA  
Command  
AT+CGDATA=[<cid>]  
Possible Response(s)  
CONNECT  
ERROR  
AT+CGDATA=?  
AT+CGDATA=?  
AT+CGDATA=1  
+CGDATA:  
OK  
+CGDATA:  
OK  
CONNECT  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
157  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
GPRS Mobile Station Class +CGCLASS  
Description:  
The set command is used to set the modem to operate according to the specified GPRS mobile class. If  
the requested class is not supported, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned.  
The read command returns the current GPRS mobile class.  
The test command is used for requesting information on the supported GPRS mobile classes.  
Values:  
<class>  
A string parameter which indicates the GPRS mobile class (in descending order of  
functionality)  
A
Class A (highest)  
B
Class B  
CG  
CC  
Class C in GPRS only mode  
Class C in circuit switched only mode (lowest)  
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the set command.  
If the modem is GPRS attached when the set command is issued with a <class> = CC specified, a  
GPRS detach request is sent to the network.  
If the modem is GSM attached when the set command is issued with a <class> = CG specified, a GSM  
detach request is sent to the network.  
Class A is not supported.  
Note: During switch-On in CG class, the modem always performs an automatic GPRS attach (the  
ATTACH-STATUS parameter of +WGPRS is ignored). But if the modem is not already GPRS-  
attached when switching from B/CC class to CG class, then no automatic GPRS attach is  
performed.  
Example of the Automatic Attachment (See Note Above):  
AT+CGCLASS?  
+CGCLASS: “B”  
OK  
AT+CGATT?  
+CGATT: 0  
OK  
AT+CGCLASS=”CG”  
OK  
AT+CGATT?  
+CGATT: 0  
OK  
AT+CGATT=1  
OK  
AT+CPOF  
OK  
AT+CFUN=1  
OK  
AT+CGCLASS?  
+CGCLASS: “CG”  
OK  
AT+CGATT?  
+CGATT: 1  
OK  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CGCLASS  
Command  
Possible Response(s)  
AT+CGCLASS= [<class>]  
OK  
ERROR  
AT+CGCLASS?  
AT+CGCLASS=?  
+CGCLASS: <class>  
OK  
+CGCLASS: (list of supported <class>s)  
OK  
AT+CGCLASS=”CG”  
Note: Enter GPRS Class C  
mode  
OK  
AT+CGCLASS=”CC”  
Note: Enter GMS mode  
AT+CGCLASS=”A”  
Note: Chosen class not  
supported  
OK  
+CME ERROR: 150  
AT+CGCLASS=?  
+CGCLASS: (“CG”,”CC”)  
OK  
AT+CGCLASS?  
+CGCLASS: (“CC”)  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
158  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Select Service for MO SMS Messages +CGSMS  
Description:  
The set command specifies the service or service preference that the modem will use to send MO SMS  
messages.  
The read command returns the currently selected service or service preference.  
The test command requests information on the currently available services and service preferences.  
Values:  
<service>: a numeric parameter which indicates the service or service preference to be used  
0
1
2
3
GPRS  
Circuit switched  
GPRS preferred (use circuit switched if GPRS is not available)  
Circuit switched preferred (use GPRS if circuit switched not available)  
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the set command.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax:  
Command  
Possible Responses  
AT+CGSMS= [<service>]  
OK  
ERROR  
At+CGSMS?  
+CGSMS: <service>  
OK  
AT+CGSMS=?  
+CGSMS: (list of currently available  
<service>s)  
OK  
AT +CGSMS=0  
AT+CGSMS=?  
OK  
+CGSMS=(0-3)  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
159  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
GPRS Event Reporting +CGEREP  
Description:  
Set command enables or disables sending of unsolicited result codes, +CGEV: XXX from modem to  
DTE in the case of certain events occurring in the GPRS modem or the network.  
<mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes specified within this command.  
Read command returns the current mode and buffer settings.  
Test command returns the modes and buffer settings supported by the modem as compound values.  
Values:  
<mode>:  
0
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the modem; if modem result code buffer is full, the oldest  
ones can be discarded. No codes are forwarded to the DTE.  
2
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the modem when modem-DTE link is reserved (e.g. in on-line  
data mode) and flush them to the DTE when modem-DTE link becomes available; otherwise  
forward them directly to the DTE.  
<bfr>  
0
Modem buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when  
<mode> 1 or 2 is entered. This is the only case supported.  
1
Modem buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the DTE  
when <mode> 2 is entered. This case is not supported.  
The software provides a combination of all modes. When a serial link is available, indications are  
forwarded directly to the DTE. If a serial link is reserved (e.g., in on-line data mode) or the modem  
result code buffer is full, the oldest ones can be discarded.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CGEREP  
Command  
Possible Responses  
AT+CGEREP=[<mode>]  
OK  
ERROR  
AT+CGEREP?  
AT+CGEREP=?  
+CGEREP: <mode>,<bfr>  
OK  
+CGEREP: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of  
supported <bfr>s)  
OK  
Unsolicited Result Codes and Corresponding Events:  
The following unsolicited result codes and the corresponding events are defined:  
+CGEV: REJECT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>  
A network request for PDP context activation occurred when the modem was unable to report it to  
the DTE with a +CRING unsolicited result code and was automatically rejected.  
+CGEV: NW REACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]  
The network has requested a context reactivation. The <cid> that was used to reactivate the  
context is provided if known to the modem.  
+CGEV: NW DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]  
The network has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to activate the context is  
provided if known to the modem.  
+CGEV: ME DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]  
The mobile equipment has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to activate the  
context is provided if known to the modem.  
+CGEV: NW DETACH  
The network has forced a GPRS detach. This implies that all active contexts have been  
deactivated. These are not reported separately.  
+CGEV: ME DETACH  
The mobile equipment has forced a GPRS detach. This implies that all active contexts have been  
deactivated. These are not reported separately.  
+CGEV: NW CLASS <class>  
The network has forced a change of MS class. The highest available class is reported.  
+CGEV: ME CLASS <class>  
The mobile equipment has forced a change of MS class. The highest available class is reported.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
160  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
GPRS Network Registration Status +CGREG  
Description:  
The set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat> when <n>=1  
and there is a change in the modem's GPRS network registration status, or code +CGREG:  
<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell.  
The read command returns the status of result code presentation and an integer <stat> which shows  
whether the network has currently indicated the registration of the modem. Location information  
elements <lac> and <ci> are returned only when <n>=2 and modem is registered in the network.  
Values:  
<n>  
0
1
2
Disable network registration unsolicited result code  
Enable network registration unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>  
Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code +CGREG:  
<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]  
<stat>  
0
1
2
3
4
5
Not registered; the modem is not currently searching a new operator to which to register  
Registered, home network  
Not registered, but modem is currently searching a new operator to which to register  
Registration denied  
Unknown  
Registered, roaming  
<lac>  
String type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format  
<ci>  
String type; two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CGREG  
Command  
Possible response(s)  
AT+CGREG=[<n>]  
+CGREG: stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]  
OK  
AT+CGREG?  
AT+CGREG=?  
+CGREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]  
OK  
Note: +CME ERROR: <err>  
+CGREG: (list of supported <n>s)  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
161  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Request GPRS IP Service D  
Description:  
This command causes the modem to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish  
communication between the DTE and the external PDN.  
The V.25ter 'D' (Dial) command causes the modem to enter the V.25ter online data state and, with the  
DTE, to start the specified layer 2 protocol. The modem returns CONNECT to confirm acceptance of the  
command prior to entering the V.25ter online data state. No further commands may follow on the AT  
command line.  
The detailed behavior after the online data state has been entered is described briefly in clause 9, for  
IP, of GSM 07.60. GPRS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior to or  
during the PDP startup if they have not already been performed using the +CGATT and +CGACT  
commands.  
If <cid> is supported, its usage is the same as in the +CGDATA command. The +CGDCONT,  
+CGQREQ, etc. commands may then be used in the modem initialization AT command string to set  
values for for PDP type, APN, QoS etc.  
If <cid> is not supported or is supported but omitted, the modem attempt to activate the context using  
the 'Empty PDP type' (GSM 04.08). (No PDP address or APN is sent in this case and only one PDP  
context subscription record is present in the HLR for this subscriber.)  
Note: If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not supported.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<GPRS_SC_IP>  
(GPRS Service Code for IP) a digit string (value 99), which identifies a request to  
use the GPRS with IP (PDP types IP and PPP)  
<cid>  
A digit string which specifies a particular PDP context definition.  
Command Syntax:  
Command  
Possible Responses  
D*<GPRS_SC_IP>[***<cid>]#  
CONNECT  
ERROR  
Example:  
ATD*99***1#  
CONNECT  
ATD*99***2#  
ERROR  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
162  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Network Requested PDP Context Activation  
In this mode of operation, the modem behaves like an answering modem and accepts the normal V.25ter commands  
associated with answering a call. If GPRS-specific configuration commands are required, they may be sent to the modem  
as part of the modem initialization commands. The +CGAUTO command is used to select modem compatibility mode.  
Automatic Response to a Network Request for PDP Context Activation S0  
The V.25ter 'S0=n' (Automatic answer) command may be used to turn off (n=0) and on (n>0) the automatic response to a  
network request for a PDP context activation.When the 'S0=n' (n>0) command is received, the modem attempt to perform  
a GPRS attach if it is not already attached. Failure will result in ERROR being returned to the DTE. Subsequently, the  
modem will announce a network request for PDP context activation by issuing the unsolicited result code RING to the  
DTE, followed by the intermediate result code CONNECT. The modem then enters V.25ter online data state and follows  
the same procedure as it would after having received a +CGANS=1 with no <L2P> or <cid> values specified.  
Note: The 'S0=n' (n=0) command does not perform an automatic GPRS detach.  
Manual Acceptance of a Network Request for PDP Aontext Activation A  
The V.25ter 'A' (Answer) command may be used to accept a network request for a PDP context activation announced by  
the unsolicited result code RING. The modem responds with CONNECT, enters V.25ter online data state and follows the  
same procedure as it would after having received a +CGANS=1 with no <cid> value specified. It is an error to issue the 'A'  
command when there is no outstanding network request.  
Manual Rrejection of a Network Request for PDP Context Activation H  
The V.25ter 'H' or 'H0' (On-hook) command may be used to reject a network request for PDP context activation  
announced by the unsolicited result code RING. The modem responds with OK. It is an error to issue the 'H' command  
when there is no outstanding network request.  
Note: This is an extension to the usage of the 'H' command that is described in ITU-T V.25ter.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
163  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Automatic Response to a Network Request for PDP  
Context Activation +CGAUTO  
Description:  
The set command disables or enables an automatic positive response (auto-answer) to the receipt of a  
Request PDP Context Activation message from the network. It also provides control over the use of the  
V.25ter basic commands 'S0', 'A and 'H' for handling network requests for PDP context activation. The  
setting does not affect the issuing of the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING.  
The test command returns values of <n> supported by the modem as a compound value.  
When the +CGAUTO=0 command is received, the modem will not perform a GPRS detach if it is  
attached. Subsequently, when the modem announces a network request for PDP context activation by  
issuing the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING, the DTE may manually accept or reject the  
request by issuing the +CGANS command or may simply ignore the network request.  
When the +CGAUTO=1 command is received, the modem will attempt to perform a GPRS attach if it is  
not already attached. Failure will result in ERROR or, if enabled, +CME ERROR being returned to the  
DTE. Subsequently, when the modem announces a network request for PDP context activation by  
issuing the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING to the DTE, this is followed by the intermediate  
result code CONNECT. The modem then enters V.25ter online data state and follows the same  
procedure as it would after having received a +CGANS=1 with <cid> values specified.  
Values:  
<n>  
0
Turn off automatic response for GPRS only  
For <n> = 0 GPRS network requests are manually accepted or rejected by the +CGANS  
command.  
1
2
Turn on automatic response for GPRS only  
For <n> = 1 GPRS network requests are automatically accepted according to the description  
above.  
Modem compatibility mode, GPRS only  
For <n> = 2, automatic acceptance of GPRS network requests is controlled by the 'S0'  
command. Manual control uses the 'A' and 'H' commands, respectively, to accept and reject  
GPRS requests. (+CGANS may also be used.) Incoming circuit switched calls can be neither  
manually nor automatically answered  
3
Modem compatibility mode, GPRS and circuit switched calls (default)  
For <n> = 3, automatic acceptance of both GPRS network requests and incoming circuit  
switched calls is controlled by the 'S0' command. Manual control uses the 'A' and 'H'  
commands, respectively, to accept and reject GPRS requests. (+CGANS may also be used.)  
Circuit switched calls are handled as described elsewhere in this specification.  
Note:  
In class C GPRS the modem can’t receive GPRS and GSM incoming calls  
simultaneously.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CGAUTO  
Command  
Possible response(s)  
AT+CGAUTO=[<n>] OK  
ERROR  
AT+CGAUTO?  
AT+CGAUTO=?  
+CGAUTO: <n>  
OK  
+CGAUTO: (0-3)  
OK  
Example:  
AT+CGAUTO=?  
+CGAUTO: (0-2)  
OK  
AT+CGAUTO?  
+CGAUTO: 2  
OK  
AT+CGAUTO=0  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
164  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Manual Response to a Network Request for PDP  
Context Activation +CGANS  
Description:  
The execution command requests the modem to respond to a network request for GPRS PDP context  
activation which has been signalled to the DTE by the RING or +CRING: unsolicited result code. The  
<response> parameter allows the DTE to accept or reject the request.  
If <response> is 0, the request is rejected and the modem returns OK to the DTE.  
If <response> is 1, the following procedure is followed by the modem.  
PDP context activation procedures take place prior to or during the PDP startup.  
One <cid> may be specified in order to provide the values needed for the context activation request.  
During the PDP startup procedure the modem has the PDP type and the PDP address provided by the  
network in the Request PDP Context Activation message.  
If a <cid> is given his informations must matching with the PDP type and PDP address in the network  
request as follows -  
The PDP type must match exactly.  
The PDP addresses are considered to match if they are identical or if the address in the context  
definition is unspecified. If any of this information is in conflict, the command will fail.  
The context is activated using the values for PDP type and PDP address provided by the network,  
together with the other information found in the PDP context definition. An APN may or may not be  
required, depending on the application.  
If no <cid> is given, the modem will attempt to activate the context using the values for PDP type and  
PDP address provided by the network, together with any other relevant information known to the  
modem. The other context parameters will be set to their default values.  
If the activation is successful, data transfer may proceed.  
After data transfer is complete, and the layer 2 protocol termination procedure has completed  
successfully, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the modem returns the final result code OK.  
In the event of an erroneous termination or a failure to startup, the V.25ter command state is re-entered  
and the modem returns the final result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled, +CME ERROR. Attach,  
activate and other errors may be reported. It is also an error to issue the +CGANS command when  
there is no outstanding network request.  
This command may be used in both normal and modem compatibility modes.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
<response> A numeric parameter which specifies how the request should be responded to.  
0
1
reject the request  
accept and request that the PDP context be activated  
If <response> is omitted it is assumed to be 0. Other values are reserved and will result in the  
ERROR response.  
<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition.  
Command Syntax: AT+CGANS  
Command  
Possible response(s)  
AT+CGANS=[<response>,  
[<cid>]]  
OK  
ERROR  
AT+CGANS=?  
+CGANS: (list of supported <response>s), (list of supported <L2P>s)  
OK  
Example:  
+CRING: GPRS "IP", "122.41.74.238"  
AT+CGANS=1  
CONNECT  
AT+CGANS=?  
+CGANS= (0-1)  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
165  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Show PDP Address +CGPADDR  
Description:  
The execution command returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers.  
The test command returns a list of defined <cid>s.  
Values:  
<cid>  
A numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition. If no <cid> is  
specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are returned.  
<PDP_address> A string that identifies the modem in the address space applicable to the PDP. The  
address may be static or dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by the  
+CGDCONT command when the context was defined. For a dynamic address it will be the  
one assigned during the last PDP context activation that used the context definition  
referred to by <cid>. <PDP_address> is omitted if none is available.  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+CGPADDR  
Command  
AT+CGPADDR=[<cid> [,<cid> [,…]]] +CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr>  
[<CR><LF>+CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr>  
Possible response(s)  
[...]]  
OK  
AT+CGPADDR=?  
+CGPADDR: (list of defined <cid>s)  
OK  
Example:  
In this example, 1 <cid> is defined:  
AT+CGPADDR=1  
+CGPADDR=1,"107.210.5.4"  
OK  
AT+CGPADDR=?  
+CGAPDDR= (1)  
OK  
AT+CGPADDR  
+CGPADDR: 1,  
Cellular Result Codes +CRC  
Description:  
This command enables a more detailed ring indication, in case of incoming call (voice or data). Instead  
of the string “RING”, an extended string is used to indicate which type of call is ringing (e.g. +CRING:  
VOICE).  
These extended indications are:  
+CRING: ASYNC  
for asynchronous transparent  
+CRING: REL ASYNC for asynchronous non-transparent  
+CRING: VOICE  
+CRING: GPRS  
for normal speech.  
GPRS network request for PDP context activation  
If the modem is unable to announce to the DTE the network's request (for example it is in V.25ter online  
data state) the modem reject the request. No corresponding unsolicited result code is issued when the  
modem returns to a command state.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters  
Command Syntax: AT+CRC  
Command  
Possible responses  
AT+CRC=0  
OK  
Note: Extended reports disabled Note: Command valid  
AT+CRC=1 OK  
Note: Extended reports enabled Note: Command valid  
AT+CRC?  
+CRC: 1  
OK  
AT+CRC=?  
+CRC: (0,1)  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
166  
 
   
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Service Reporting Control +CR  
Description:  
This command enables a more detailed service reporting for incoming or outgoing calls. Before sending  
the CONNECT response to the application, the GSM modem will precisely define the type of data  
connection being established.  
These report types are:  
+CR: ASYNC  
+CR: REL ASYNC  
+CR: GPRS  
For asynchronous transparent  
For asynchronous non-transparent  
For GPRS  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters  
Command syntax: AT+CR  
Command  
AT+CR=0  
Possible responses  
OK  
Note: Extended reports disabled  
Note: Command valid  
AT+CR=1  
OK  
Note: Extended reports enabled  
Note: Command valid  
Extended Error Report +CEER  
Description:  
This command gives the reason of the call release when the last call setup (originating or answering)  
failed. New indication for GPRS is the reason of the last unsuccessful PDP context activation and the  
last GPRS detach or PDP context activation.  
Values:  
Syntax:  
No parameters  
Command Syntax: AT+CEER  
Command  
Possible Responses  
NO CARRIER  
Note: Call setup failure  
+CEER: Error <xxx>  
OK  
ATD123456789 ;  
Note: Outgoing voice call  
AT+CEER  
Note: Ask for reason of release Note: <xxx>is the cause information element values form GSM  
recommandation 04.08 or specific Call accepted  
“NO CARRIER” indicates that the AT+CEER information is available for a failure diagnostic.  
See Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 Recommendation in Appendix A.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
167  
 
   
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
GPRS Parameters Customization +WGPRS  
Description:  
This command modifies some of the GPRS parameters:  
The ATTACH-STATUS (the modem doesn’t automatically make a GPRS attachment after  
initialization)  
The PDP-INIT-STATUS (activate automatically some defined PDP Contexts after initialization)  
and  
The user-defined multislot class. This parameter represents the GPRS class chosen by the user  
to perform power saving (by reducing TX [or uplink] time slots).  
In addition, this command allows you to:  
Automatically set some defined PDP contexts to be activated after initialization.  
Set some parameters for the PALM® OS software: PPP Silent Mode (PPP waits for PPP Client  
to start the dialog) and Slow CONNECT due to the delay of the processing of PALM® OK, the  
CONNECT is sent one second after the dialing command request.  
Important Note: The modem must be rebooted to activate the new setup except for <mode> 3, 5, 6  
and 7 (refer to the Values section).  
Values:  
<mode>  
A numeric parameter which specifies a GPRS parameter:  
ATTACH-STATUS (the modem doesn’t automatically make a GPRS attachment after init)  
PDP-INIT-STATUS (declare some PDP contexts liable to be activated automatically after  
initialization by <mode>=2)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Set “ACTIVABLE” automatically after init a define PDP context  
PPP silent mode  
Definition of the GPRS multislot class  
Slow CONNECT for PALM® OS  
PPP Filtering  
Automatic GPRS roaming inter-operator: if activated, the modem automatically re-  
attaches itself to the network and reactivates its PDP context by changing the operator  
when reaching border areas.  
Notes:  
If <mode>=0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 <cid> and <class> will be ignored.  
If <mode>=0, 1, 2, 3, 5, or 6 <class> will be ignored.  
If <mode>=4 <parameter> and <cid> will be ignored. The modem must be restarted to  
take the modification into account.  
PPP Filtering is a test-purpose functionality. It avoids sending some OS-specific frames on  
the radio link, for accurate transfer rate measurements.  
<parameter> A numeric parameter that controls the operation defined by <mode> if it is equal to 0, 1, 2  
or 3  
0
1
Operation Off (disabled)  
Operation On (enabled)  
<cid>  
(PDP Context Identifier). A numeric parameter that specifies a particular PDP context  
definition. The parameter is local to the DTE-modem interface and is used in other PDP  
context-related commands. The range of values is 0 to 4.  
<class>  
GPRS multislot class number. It may be loser than the maximum possible class. Possible  
values are 2, 8, 10, 12. Note that the range of values is dependent upon the modem.  
Multislot  
Class  
Maximum  
Number of Slots  
Minimum Number of  
Slots  
Type  
of MS  
Rx Tx  
Sum Tta  
Ttb  
Tra  
Trb  
2
8
2
4
1
1
3
5
3
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
10  
12  
4
4
2
4
5
5
3
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
Notes:  
When the modem is set in CG class, the modem always makes an automatic GPRS attachment after  
initialization. AT+WGPRS? always gives +WGPRS: 0,0 for the parameter 0.  
The default value for mode 7 is 0. In this case, no automatic GPRS reconnection to a new operator is done  
when reaching border areas.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
168  
 
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Syntax:  
Command Syntax: AT+WGPRS=<mode>,<parameter>,[<cid>],[<class>]  
Command  
Possible Responses  
+WGPRS: <mode>, <parameter1>,[<cid>]  
AT+WGPRS=?  
[<CR><LF>+WGPRS: <mode>,  
<parameter>,[<cid>]  
[...]]  
OK  
AT+WGPRS?  
+WGPRS:<mode>(list of supported  
<parameter>),[(list of supported  
<cid>)][<CR><LF>+WGPRS:<mode>(list of  
supported <parameter>),[(list of supported  
<cid>)] [...]]  
OK  
AT+WGPRS=2,1,3  
OK  
Note: Set ACTIVABLE to ON on PDP context  
3
AT+WGPRS=7,1  
OK  
Note: Set automatic re-attachment to the  
network and reactivation of PDP context in  
case of change of operator for MCC/MNC  
AT+WGPRS=4,,,18  
OK  
Note: Choose GPRS multislot class 8  
AT+WGPRS=?  
Note: Request range of values  
AT+WGPRS?  
AT+WGPRS: (0-7),(0-1),(0-4),(2,8,10,12)  
OK  
Note:  
+WGPRS: 0,0  
+WGPRS: 1,0  
Automatic re-attachment at init not activated  
Automatic reactivation of PDP context at init  
not activated  
+WGPRS: 2,1,1  
+WGPRS: 2,0,2  
+WGPRS: 2,0,3  
+WGPRS: 2,0,4  
3 PDP contexts and automatic reactivation  
only for cid 1  
+WGPRS: 3,1  
+WGPRS: 4,8  
+WGPRS: 5,1  
+WGPRS: 6,1  
+WGPRS: 7,1  
PPP silent mode activated  
GPRS class is 8  
GPRS slow connect activated  
PPP filtering activated  
Automatic re-attachment and PDP  
reactivation at operator board area  
OK  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
169  
 
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands  
Examples of Full GPRS AT Commands  
Activation of an IP PDP Context  
Example 1  
AT +CGDCONT=1, "IP", "internet"; +GCDCONT=2, "IP", "abc.com"  
OK  
ATD*99***1#  
CONNECT  
Example 2  
AT +CGCLASS=”CG”  
OK  
+CGREG: 1  
AT +CGDCONT=1, "IP", "internet"  
OK  
AT +CGQREQ=1,1,4,5,2,14  
OK  
AT +CGQMIN=1,1,4,5,2,14  
OK  
AT +CGATT=1  
OK  
AT +CGACT=1,1  
OK  
//Remark about +CGDATA: the goal of this command is the same as ATD*99***  
AT +CGDATA=1  
CONNECT  
…….  
Data transfer  
…….  
+CGEV: NW DETACH  
Network Request  
AT+CGAUTO=0  
OK  
+CRING: GPRS "IP", "211.45.89.152"  
AT+CGANS=1  
CONNECT  
……. Data transfer  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
170  
 
 
Chapter 16 – Other AT Commands  
Chapter 16 – Other AT  
Commands  
V.25ter Recommendation  
The commands not listed in this document are not supported. For these commands, the product will then answer with  
"ERROR". All modulation control, error control and data compression commands are not recognized. An "ERROR" string  
will be returned.  
GSM 07.05 Recommendation  
All the 07.05 commands not described in this manual are not implemented. The product will answer "ERROR" to these  
commands.  
GSM 07.07 Recommendation  
All the 07.07 commands not described in this manual are not implemented. The product will answer "ERROR" to these  
commands.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
171  
 
       
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
Appendix A – Result Codes,  
Failure Causes, Other Tables  
Chapter Summary  
The following tables are included in Appendix A:  
ME error result code: +CME ERROR: <error>  
Message service failure result code: +CMS ERROR <er>  
Specific error results codes  
Failure Cause from GMS 05.08 recommendation (+CEER)  
Specific Failure Cause for +CEER  
GSM 04.11 Annex E-2: Mobile originating SM-transfer  
Unsolicited result codes  
Final result codes  
Intermediate result codes  
Parameter storage  
GMS sequences list  
Operator names  
CPHS Information field  
CSP constraints  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
172  
 
   
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
ME Error Result Code: +CME ERROR: <error>  
<error> Meaning  
Resulting from the following commands  
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 3)  
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 4)  
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 5)  
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 10)  
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 11)  
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 12)  
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 13)  
+CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC, +CLCK, +CPWD, +CPIN,  
+CPIN2 (+CME ERROR: 16)  
3
Operation not allowed  
4
5
Operation not supported  
PH-SIM PIN required (SIM lock)  
SIM not inserted  
SIM PIN required  
SIM PUK required  
SIM failure  
10  
11  
12  
13  
16  
Incorrect password  
17  
18  
SIM PIN2 required  
SIM PUK2 required  
+CPBW (FDN), +CLCK (FDN),  
+CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC, +CPBW (FDN), +CPIN,  
+CPIN2, +CLCK (FDN), +CPWD  
20  
21  
22  
Memory full  
Invalid index  
Not found  
+CPBW  
+CPBR, +CPBW, ATD>[mem]index, +WMGO  
+CPBF, +CPBP, +CPBN, +CGSN, +WOPN,  
ATD>[mem]”name”  
24  
26  
27  
30  
32  
40  
42  
Text string too long  
Dial string too long  
+CPBW, +CPIN, +CPIN2, +CLCK, +CPWD  
+CPBW, ATD, +CCFC  
+CPBW  
+VTS, +COPS=?, +CLCK, +CCFC, +CCWA, +CUSD  
+COPS  
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 40)  
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 42)  
Invalid characters in dial string  
No network service  
Network not allowed – emergency calls only  
Network personal PIN required (Network lock)  
Network personal PIN required (Network subset  
lock)  
44  
Network personal PIN required (Service Provider  
lock)  
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 44)  
46  
Network personal PIN required (Corporate lock)  
Illegal MS (#3)  
Illegal ME (#6)  
Mobile Station is not allowed to operate in GPRS  
Mobile Station is not allowed to operate in the  
requested PLMN  
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 46)  
103  
106  
107  
111  
+CGATT  
+CGATT  
+CGATT  
+CGATT  
112  
Mobile Station is not allowed to make location  
updating in this area  
+CGATT  
113  
132  
133  
134  
148  
149  
150  
Roaming not allowed in this area (#13)  
service option not supported (#32)  
requested service option not subscribed (#33)  
service option temporarily out of order (#34)  
unspecified GPRS error  
+CGATT  
+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99  
+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99  
+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99  
All GPRS commands  
+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99  
+CGCLASS +CGATT  
PDP authentication failure  
invalid mobile class  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
173  
 
 
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
Message Service Failure Result Code +CMS ERROR  
<er> is defined as below:  
<er>  
Meaning  
Resulting from the following commands  
1 to 127 Error cause values from the GSM  
recommendation 04.11 Annex E-2  
+CMGS, +CMSS  
301  
302  
303  
304  
305  
310  
311  
312  
313  
SMS service of ME reserved  
Operation not allowed  
Operation not supported  
Invalid PDU mode parameter  
Invalid text mode parameter  
SIM not inserted  
SIM PIN required  
PH-SIM PIN required  
SIM failure  
+CSMS (with +CMS: ERROR 301)  
All SMS commands (+CMSS, +CMGL, +CPMS, +CSMP…  
All SMS commands  
+CMGS, +CMGW  
+CMGS, +CMGW, +CMSS  
All SMS commands  
All SMS commands  
All SMS commands  
All SMS commands  
316 SIM PUK required  
All SMS commands  
317 SIM PIN2 required  
All SMS commands  
318 SIM PUK2 required  
All SMS commands  
321 Invalid memory index  
322 SIM memory full  
+CMGR, +CMSS, +CMGD  
+CMGW  
330 SC address unknown  
340 no +CNMA acknowledgement expected  
+CSCA?, +CMSS, +CMGS  
+CNMA  
Specific Error Result Codes  
<error> Meaning  
500 unknown error.  
Results from the following commands  
All commands  
512 MM establishment failure (for SMS).  
513 Lower layer failure (for SMS)  
514 CP error (for SMS).  
+CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 512)  
+CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 513)  
+CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 514)  
All commands ( “+CME ERROR: 515” or  
“+CMS ERROR: 515”) except ATHO,  
ATH1, AT+WOIR, AT+WIOW,  
AT+CFUN=1, AT+CLCC, AT+WAC,  
AT+CPAS, AT+VGR, AT+VTS,  
AT+SPEAKER  
515 Please wait, init or command processing in progress.  
517 SIM Toolkit facility not supported.  
+STGI  
518 SIM Toolkit indication not received.  
+STGI  
519 Reset product to activate or change a new echo cancellation  
algo.  
+ECHO, +VIP  
520 Automatic abort about get plmn list for an incoming call.  
526 PIN deactivation forbidden with this SIM card.  
527 Please wait, RR or MM is busy. Retry your selection later.  
528 Location update failure. Emergency calls only.  
529 PLMN selection failure. Emergency calls only.  
+COPS=?  
+CLCK  
+COPS  
+COPS  
+COPS  
531 SMS not sent: the <da> is not in FDN phonebook, and FDN lock +CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 531)  
is enabled. (for SMS)  
532 Embedded application is activated so objects flash are not erased +WOPEN  
533 Missing or Unknown APN  
ATD*99 +GACT +CGDATA  
All commands  
536 Class locked: A command has been launched from a port. The  
effect is to lock all commands belonging to the same class. If  
another port launches a command of this class, this error will  
occur as long as the class is not released (at first command’s  
completion time).  
537 Phonebook group full.  
538 Not enough space to copy SMS  
539 Invalid SMS  
+CPBW  
+WMCP  
+CMGR  
+WOPEN  
541  
Open AT® application and AT software version do not match  
543 CMUX connection is refused by remote, after a restart of CMUX +CMUX  
protocol by the modem, due to a 27.010 connection loss during  
virtual channels establishment.  
continued on next page  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
174  
 
   
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
Continued: Specific Error Result Codes  
<error> Meaning  
544  
Results from the following commands  
+CMUX  
CMUX connection Timeout (no answer from the remote); i.e., no  
DLCO opened response.  
545  
A CMUX session has been started on a physical UART, and the  
+CMUX  
user tries to start another CMUX session on another physical  
UART. The error, +CME ERROR: 545 is raised on the UART  
where AT+CMUX command is trying to be started again.  
Emergency call is not allowed without SIM  
Emergency call is allowed without SIM  
No flash objects to delete  
The phone number of the requested phonebook entry is empty  
Unable to resize the Application & Data storage place since the  
new required size would overlap with the current Open AT®  
application storage place  
546  
547  
548  
549  
550  
+COPS  
+COPS  
+WOPEN  
ATD><index>[;],ATD><phonebook><index>[;]  
+WOPEN  
551  
552  
Service abort request has failed  
Unsolicited responses for autodiag or charge indication are  
already activated on another port  
AT+WAC  
+WDIAG, +WBCM  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
175  
 
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 Recommendation +CEER  
Cause Value  
1
Diagnostic  
Unassigned (unallocated) number  
No route to destination  
3
6
Channel unacceptable  
8
Operator determined barring  
16  
Normal call clearing  
17  
User busy  
18  
No user responding  
19  
User alerting, no answer  
21  
Call rejected  
22  
Number changed  
26  
Non selected user clearing  
27  
Destination out of order  
28  
29  
Invalid number format (incomplete number)  
Facility rejected  
30  
31  
Response to STATUS ENQUIRY  
Normal, unspecified  
34  
No circuit/channel available  
38  
Network out of order  
41  
Temporary failure  
42  
43  
44  
47  
49  
50  
55  
57  
58  
63  
65  
68  
69  
70  
79  
81  
Switching equipment congestion  
Access information discarded  
Requested circuit/channel not available  
Resources unavailable, unspecified  
Quality of service unavailable  
Requested facility not subscribed  
Incoming calls barred with in the CUG  
Bearer capability not authorized  
Bearer capability not presently available  
Service or option not available, unspecified  
Bearer service not implemented  
ACM equal to or greater than ACMmax  
Requested facility not implemented  
Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available  
Service or option not implemented, unspecified  
Invalid transaction identifier value  
User not member of CUG  
87  
88  
Incompatible destination  
91  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
Invalid transit network selection  
Semantically incorrect message  
Invalid mandatory information  
Message type non-existent or not implemented  
Message type not compatible with protocol state  
Information element non-existent or not implemented  
Conditional IE error  
100  
101  
102  
111  
127  
224  
225  
226  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
233  
234  
Message not compatible with protocol state  
Recovery on timer expiry  
Protocol error, unspecified  
Interworking, unspecified  
MS requested detach  
NWK request Detach  
Unsuccessful attach cause NO SERVICE  
Unsuccessful attach cause NO ACCESS  
Unsuccessful attach cause GPRS SERVICE REFUSED  
PDP deactivation requested by NWK  
PDP deactivation cause LLC link activation failed  
PDP deactivation cause NWK reactivation with same TI  
PDP deactivation cause GMM abort  
PDP deactivation cause LLC or SNDCP failure  
PDP unsuccessful activation cause GMM error  
Continued on next page.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
176  
 
 
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
Continued: Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 Recommendation +CEER  
Cause Value  
Diagnostic  
235  
236  
237  
238  
239  
PDP unsuccessful activation cause NWK reject  
PDP unsuccessful activation cause NO NSAPI available  
PDP unsuccessful activation cause SM refuse  
PDP unsuccessful activation cause MMI ignore  
PDP unsuccessful activation cause Nb Max Session Reach  
All Other Values in the Range  
Will Be Treated as Cause  
[0,31]  
[32,47]  
[48,63]  
[64,79]  
[80,95]  
[96,111]  
[112,127]  
31  
47  
63  
79  
95  
111  
127  
Specific Failure Cause for +CEER  
Cause value  
Diagnostic  
240  
241  
252  
253  
FDN is active and number is not in FDN  
Call operation not allowed  
Call barring on outgoing calls  
Call barring on incoming calls  
Call impossible  
254  
255  
Lower layer failure  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
177  
 
 
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
GSM 04.11 Annex E-2: Mobile Originating SM-Transfer  
These error causes could appear for SMS commands (+CMGS, +CMSS, +CMGD…)  
Error #  
Error Label  
Description  
1
Unassigned  
The destination requested by the Mobile Station cannot be reached because,  
although the number is in a valid format, it is not currently assigned (allocated).  
The MS has tried to send a mobile originating short message when the MS's  
network operator or service provider has forbidden such transactions.  
The outgoing call barred service applies to the short message service for the  
called destination.  
The equipment sending this cause does not wish to accept this short message,  
although it could have accepted the short message.This cause is neither busy  
nor incompatible.  
(unallocated) number  
Operator determined  
barring  
8
10  
21  
Call barred  
Short message transfer  
rejected  
27  
Destination out of  
service  
The destination indicated by the Mobile Station cannot be reached because the  
interface to the destination is not functioning correctly. The term "not functioning  
correctly" indicates that a signaling message was unable to be delivered to the  
remote user; e.g., a physical layer or data link layer failure at the remote user,  
user equipment off-line, etc.  
28  
29  
30  
Unidentified subscriber  
Facility rejected  
Unknown subscriber  
The subscriber is not registered in the PLMN (e.g., IMSI not known)  
The facility requested by the Mobile Station is not supported by the PLMN.  
The subscriber is not registered in the HLR (e.g., IMSI or directory number is  
not allocated to a subscriber).  
38  
41  
Network out of order  
Temporary failure  
The network is not functioning correctly and the condition is likely to last a  
relatively long period of time; e.g., immediately reattempting the short message  
transfer is not likely to be successful.  
The network is not functioning correctly and the condition is not likely to last a  
long period of time; e.g., the Mobile Station may wish to try another short  
message transfer attempt almost immediately.  
42  
47  
Congestion  
Resources unavailable,  
unspecified  
The short message service cannot be serviced because of high traffic.  
This cause is used to report a resource unavailable event only when no other  
cause applies.  
50  
69  
81  
95  
96  
Requested facility not  
subscribed  
Requested facility not  
implemented  
The requested short message service could  
The network is unable to provide the requested short message service.  
The equipment sending this cause has received a message with a short  
Invalid short message  
transfer reference value message reference which is not currently in use on the MS-network interface.  
Invalid message,  
unspecified  
Invalid mandatory  
information  
This cause is used to report an invalid message event only when no other  
cause in the invalid message class applies.  
The equipment sending this cause has received a message where a mandatory  
information element is missing and/or has a content error (the two cases are  
undistinguishable).  
97  
98  
99  
Message type non-  
existent or not  
implemented  
The equipment sending this cause has received a message with a message  
type it does not recognize either because this is a message not defined or  
defined but not implemented by the equipment sending this cause.  
Message not compatible The equipment sending this cause has received a message such that the  
with short message  
protocol state  
procedures do not indicate that this is a permissible message to receive while in  
the short message transfer state.  
Information element non- The equipment sending this cause has received a message which includes  
existent or not  
implemented  
unrecognized information elements because the information element identifier is  
not defined or it is defined but not implemented by the equipment sending the  
cause.  
However, the information element is not required to be present in the message  
so that the equipment sends the cause to process the message.  
This cause is used to report a protocol error event only when no other cause  
applies.  
111  
127  
Protocol error,  
unspecified  
Interworking, unspecified There has been interworking with a network which does not provide causes for  
actions it takes; thus, the precise cause for a message which is being sent  
cannot be ascertained.  
Note: All values other than specified should be treated as error #41.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
178  
 
 
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
Unsolicited Result Codes  
Verbose Result Code  
Numeric  
Description  
(V0 set)  
+CALA: < time string>,<index>  
+CBM: <length><pdu> (PDU) or  
+CBM:<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages>…  
(Text mode)  
As verbose  
As verbose  
Alarm notification  
Cell Broadcast Message directly displayed  
+CBMI: “BM”,<index>  
As verbose  
As verbose  
Cell Broadcast Message stored in mem at location  
<index>  
Current Call Meter value  
+CCCM: <ccm>  
+CCED: <values>  
As verbose (specific) Cell Environment Description indication  
+CCWA:<number>,<type>, <class> [,<alpha>] As verbose  
Call Waiting number  
+CDS: <fo>, <mr>… (text mode)  
or +CDS: <length>,… (PDU)  
+CDSI: <mem>,<index>  
As verbose  
SMS status report after sending a SMS  
As verbose  
Incoming SMS Status Report after sending a SMS,  
stored in <mem> (“SR”) at location <index>  
Key press or release  
Incoming Call Presentation  
Incoming message directly displayed  
+CKEV: <keynb>  
As verbose  
As verbose  
As verbose  
+CLIP: <number>, <type> [,,,<alpha>]  
+CMT: <oa>…(text mode)  
or +CMT: [<alpha>,]… (PDU)  
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>  
As verbose  
Incoming message stored in <mem> (“SM”) at  
location <index>  
+CREG: <stat> [,<lac>,<ci>]  
+CRING: <type>  
+CSQ: <RxLev>,99  
+CSSU: <code2>[<number>,<type>]  
+STIN: <ind>  
As verbose  
As verbose  
As verbose  
As verbose  
Network registration indication  
Incoming call type (VOICE, FAX ...)  
Automatic RxLev indication with AT+CCED=1,8  
Supplementary service notification during a call  
As verbose (specific) SIM Toolkit Indication  
+WIND: <IndicationNb> [,<CallId>]  
As verbose (specific) Specific unsolicited indication (SIM Insert/Remove,  
End of init, Reset, Alerting, Call creation/release)  
+WVMI: <LineId>,<Status>  
+WDCI: <LineId>,<Status>  
RING  
As verbose (specific) Voice Mail Indicator notification (cf. +CPHS)  
As verbose (specific) Diverted call indicator  
2
Incoming call signal from network  
+CIEV  
As verbose (specific) Indicator event reporting  
+CUSD: <m>,[<str>,<dcs>]  
As verbose  
USSD unsolicited response  
Final Result Codes  
Verbose Result Code  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
+CMS ERROR: <err>  
BUSY  
Numeric (V0 set)  
As verbose  
As verbose  
7
4
8
3
0
2
Description  
Error from GSM 07.05 commands  
Error from SMS commands (07.07)  
Busy signal detected  
Command not accepted  
Connection completion timeout  
Connection terminated  
ERROR  
NO ANSWER  
NO CARRIER  
OK  
Acknowledges correct execution of a command line  
Incoming call signal from network  
RING  
Intermediate Result Codes  
Verbose Result Code  
+COLP:<number>,<type>  
+CR: <type>  
Numeric (V0 set)  
as verbose  
as verbose  
Description  
Outgoing Call Presentation  
Outgoing Call report control  
+ILRR: <rate>  
as verbose  
Local TA-TE data rate  
CONNECT 300  
CONNECT 1200  
CONNECT 1200/75  
CONNECT 2400  
CONNECT 4800  
CONNECT 9600  
CONNECT 14400  
+CSSI: <code1>[,<index>]  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Data connection at 300 bauds  
Data connection at 1200 bauds  
Data connection at 1200/75 bauds  
Data connection at 2400 bauds  
Data connection at 4800 bauds  
Data connection at 9600 bauds  
Data connection at 14400 bauds  
Supplementary service notification during a call setup  
As verbose  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
179  
 
     
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
Parameter Storage Mode  
Parameter Storage Mode  
AT&W Command  
AT+CSAS AT&F (SIM,  
Command  
Default values  
(E2P)  
(E2P)  
(SIM, E2P)  
E2P)  
General commands  
+CMEE  
+CSCS  
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
“PCCP437”  
“TRANSPARENT”  
+WPCS  
Call Control commands  
%D  
ATS0  
+CICB  
+CSNS  
+ECHO  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
0 (no auto-answer)  
2 (speech)  
0 (voice)  
,1,0,3,10,7 (Algo ID 1)  
,3,30,8000,256 (Algo ID 3)  
1,2  
0 (Spk 1 & Mic 1)  
128 (speaker 1)  
32 (speaker 2)  
32 (mic 1 & ctrl 1)  
0 (others)  
+SIDET  
+SPEAKER  
+VGR  
X
X
X
X
X
X
+VGT  
X
X
Network Service commands  
+COPS  
+CREG  
X
X
X
X
X
0,2  
0
Phonebook commands  
+CSVM  
+WAIP  
+WCOS  
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
X
SMS commands  
+CNMI  
+CMGF  
+CMMS  
+CSCA  
+CSDH  
X
X
X
0,1,0,0,0  
1 (text)  
0
SIM dependant (phase 2)  
0
1,167,0,0  
X
X
X
X
X
X
+CSMP  
+CSMS  
+WUSS  
X
X
0
0
X
Supplementary Services commands  
+CCUG  
+CCWA  
+CLIP  
+COLP  
+CSSN  
+CUSD  
X
0,0,0  
0
0
0
0,0  
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Data commands  
%C  
\N  
+CBST  
+CR  
+CRC  
+CRLP  
+DOPT  
+DS  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
0
0,0,1  
0
0
61,61,48,6,1  
1,1  
3,0,2048,20  
0
0
+DR  
+ILRR  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
180  
 
 
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
Parameter Storage Mode  
AT&W Command  
AT+CSAS AT&F (SIM,  
Command  
Default values  
(E2P)  
(E2P)  
(SIM, E2P)  
E2P)  
V24 – V25 commands  
&C  
X
1
&D  
&S  
E
Q
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
1
1
0
X
X
V
1
3,4  
2,2  
115200  
0
+ICF  
+IFC  
+IPR  
+WMUX  
X
Specific commands  
+ADC  
+CMER  
X
X
X
X
X
0
0,0  
1,0 for VMI  
X
+CPHS  
2,0 for MBN  
4,0 for DCI  
+WCCS  
X
Custom table is the same as  
PCCP437 to GSM table  
+WCDM  
+WCDP  
+WDR  
+WIND  
+WIOM  
+WRIM  
+WSVG  
+WVR  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0,0  
0
0,1  
0
X
May be 1023,0 or 0,0  
X
X
0
0
5
SIM Toolkit commands  
+STSF  
X
0,”1F6BFFFF1F”,3,1  
GPRS commands  
+GCAUTO  
+GCCLASS  
+GCDCONT  
+GCEREP  
+GCREG  
X
X
3
“B”  
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
0
+GCSMS  
+WGPRS  
X
X
1
0,1  
1,0  
3,0  
5,0  
6,0  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
181  
 
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
GSM Sequences List  
In accordance with GSM Technical Specification 02.30, the product supports the following GSM sequences, which can  
be used through the ATD and the +CKPD commands.  
Security  
**04*OLDPIN*NEWPIN*NEWPIN#  
**042*OLDPIN2*NEWPIN2*NEWPIN2#  
**05*PUK*NEWPIN*NEWPIN#  
**052*PUK2*NEWPIN2*NEWPIN2#  
*#06#  
Change PIN code  
Change PIN2 code  
Unlock PIN code  
Unlock PIN2 code  
Show the IMEI number  
Call Forwarding  
*SC# or  
Activate  
*SC**bs#  
or  
**SC*PhoneNumber# or  
**SC*PhoneNumber*BS# or  
**SC*PhoneNumber*[BS]*T# or  
*SC*PhoneNumber# or  
*SC*PhoneNumber*BS# or  
*SC*PhoneNumber*[BS]*T#  
*#SC#  
Register and activate  
or  
or  
or  
or  
or  
Check status  
*#SC**BS#  
or  
#SC#  
Deactivate  
#SC**BS#  
or  
##SC#  
Unregistered and deactivate  
##SC**BS#  
or  
The Service codes (SC) are:  
002  
004  
21  
61  
62  
all call forwarding  
all conditional call forwarding  
call forwarding unconditional  
call forwarding on no answer  
call forwarding on not reachable  
call busy  
67  
The Network service codes (BS) are:  
No code  
10  
All tele and bearer services  
All teleservices  
11  
Telephony  
12  
All data teleservices  
13  
Fax services  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Short Message Services  
Voice Group Call Service  
Voice Broadcast Service  
All teleservices except SMS  
All bearer services  
20  
21  
22  
24  
25  
26  
27  
All asynchronous services  
All synchronous services  
All data circuit synchronous  
All data circuit asynchronous  
All dedicated packet access  
All dedicated PAD access  
Note: The no reply condition timer (T) is only used for SC = 002, 004 or 61.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
182  
 
 
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
Call Barring  
Note: SC values are listed below. BS values are covered in Call Forwarding  
*SC*Password#  
Activate  
*SC*Password*BS#  
or  
*#SC#  
Check status  
*#SC**BS#  
or  
#SC*Password#  
Deactivate  
#SC*Password*BS#  
or  
**03*330*OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#  
**03**OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#  
*03*330*OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#  
*03**OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#  
Change password for call barring  
or  
or  
or  
The Service codes (SC) are:  
33  
call barring of outgoing call  
all barring service (only for deactivation)  
call barring of outgoing international call  
call barring of outgoing international calls except to HPLMN  
all outgoing barring service (only for deactivation)  
call barring of incoming calls  
330  
331  
332  
333  
35  
351  
353  
call barring of incoming calls if roaming  
all incoming barring service (only for deactivation)  
Note: Network service codes (BS) are the same the call forwarding sequences.  
Call Waiting  
*43*BS#  
Activate  
*#43*BS# Check status  
#43*BS#  
Deactivate  
Number Presentation  
*#30#  
CLIP check status  
*#31#  
CLIR check status  
*31#PhoneNumber  
#31#PhoneNumber  
*#76#  
Suppress CLIR for a voice call  
Invoke CLIR for a voice call  
COLP check status  
Operator Names  
Refer to the following documentation:  
SE13 (22nd August, 2005)  
NAPRD10 2.6.8  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
183  
 
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
CPHS Information Field  
CPHS Information  
Description  
Data Field Bit Field  
All information  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
None  
0
1
2
3
CSP service activated and allocated  
SST service activated and allocated  
Mailbox Number service activated and allocated  
Operator Name Shortform service activated and allocated  
Information Numbers service activated and allocated  
RFU  
4
5
RFU  
7
6
RFU  
8
7
Voice Message Waiting Indicator for Line 1  
Voice Message Waiting Indicator for Line 2  
Data Message Waiting Indicator  
Call Forward Activated Indicator for Line 1  
Call Forward Activated Indicator for Line 2  
Call Forward Activated Indicator for Data  
Call Forward Activated Indicator for Fax  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Line 1 Mailbox Number Available  
Line 2 Mailbox Number Available  
Date Mailbox Number Available  
EF Mn Updatable  
9
8
9
10  
11  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
25  
10  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
24  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
184  
 
 
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
CSP Constants  
Service Group: Call Offering  
Service  
External Value  
Call Forwarding Unconditional  
Call Forwarding on User Busy  
Call Forwarding on No Rely  
Call Forwarding on User Not Reachable  
Call Transfer  
1
2
3
4
5
Service Group: Call Restriction  
Service  
External Value  
Barring of All Outgoing Calls  
Barring of Outgoing International Calls  
Barring of Outgoing International Calls except those directed to  
the Home PLMN country  
9
10  
11  
Barring of All Outgoing Calls  
BIC Roam  
12  
13  
Service Group: Other Supplementary Services  
Service  
External Value  
Multi-Party Service  
Closed User Group  
Advice of Charge  
Perferential CUG  
CUG Outgoing Access  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
Service Group: Group Completion  
Service  
External Value  
Call Hold  
Call Waiting  
25  
26  
27  
28  
Completion of Call to Busy Subscriber  
Restriction of the menus allowing use of user to user signalling  
Service Group: Teleservices  
Service  
External Value  
Short Message – Mobile Terminated  
Short Message – Mobile Originated  
Short Message – Cell Broadcast  
Restricts menu options for the ability to set reply path active on  
outgoing Short Messages  
33  
34  
35  
36  
SMS Delivery Confirmation  
Restriction of menus for SMS Protocol ID options  
37  
38  
Validity Period, restriction of menus for SMS Validity period options 39  
Service Group: CPHS Teleservices  
Service  
External Value  
Alternate Line Service  
41  
Service Group: Number Identification  
Service  
External Value  
Calling Line Identification Presentation  
Connected Line Identification Restriction  
Connected Line Identification Presentation  
Malicious Call Indicator  
CLI per call mode – default block CLI – menu to send CLI  
CLI per call mode – default block CLI – menu to block CLI  
57  
59  
60  
61  
63  
64  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
185  
 
 
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables  
Service Group: Phase 2+ Services  
Service  
External Value  
Menus concerned with GPRS functionality  
Menus concerned with High Speed Circuit Switched Data  
functionality  
65  
66  
ASCII Voice Group call menus  
ASCII Voice Broadcast service menus  
Multi Subscriber profile menus  
Multi band: Restriction of menus allowing user to select a  
particular GSM 900/1800 or 1900 band  
67  
68  
69  
70  
Service Group: Value Added Services  
Service  
External Value  
Restriction of menus options for manual PLMN selection  
73  
Restriction of menus options for Voice Mail or other similar menus 74  
Restriction of menus options for the ability to send Short  
Messages with type Paging  
75  
Restriction of menus options for the ability to send Short  
Messages with type Email  
76  
Restriction of menus options for Fax calls  
Restriction of menus options for Data calls  
Restriction of menus allowing the user to change language  
77  
78  
80  
Service Group: Information Numbers  
Service  
External Value  
The ME shall only present information numbers to the user if this  
field is set to FF  
81  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
186  
 
Appendix B – ME SIM Toolkit Support  
Appendix B - ME SIM Toolkit  
Support  
TABLE 1 – Support of SIM Toolkit classes (This has been extracted from the GMS Technical Specification 11.14.)  
Command description  
CALL CONTROL  
CELL BROADCAST DOWNLOAD  
DISPLAY TEXT  
Class 1 Class 2 Class 3  
X
X
X
X
X
X
EVENT DOWNLOAD  
- MT call  
- Call connected  
X
X
- Call disconnected  
- Location status  
X
X
- User activity  
X
- Idle screen available  
GET INKEY  
GET INPUT  
X
X
X
X
X
GET READER STATUS  
MENU SELECTION  
MO SHORT MESSAGE CONTROL  
MORE TIME  
PERFORM CARD APDU  
PLAY TONE  
$(MultipleCard)$  
$(MultipleCard)$  
Lc  
X
X
X
Lc  
X
X
X
X
X
X
POLLING OFF  
POLL INTERVAL  
X
X
POWER ON CARD  
POWER OFF CARD  
PROVIDE LOCAL INFORMATION  
REFRESH  
$(MultipleCard)$  
$(MultipleCard)$  
Lc  
Lc  
X
X
X
X
X
RUN AT COMMAND  
SELECT ITEM  
SEND SHORT MESSAGE  
SEND SS  
$(AT$)  
Lc  
X
X
X
X
X
X
SEND USSD  
X
SET UP CALL  
X
X
SET UP EVENT LIST  
SET UP IDLE MODE TEXT  
SET UP MENU  
SMS-PP DOWNLOAD  
TIMER MANAGEMENT  
TIMER EXPIRATION  
X
X
X
X
Lc  
Lc  
$(IdleModeText)$  
X
X
X
$(Timer)$  
$(Timer)$  
TABLE 2 - Compatibility between Available Terminal Responses and Proactive Commands  
Proactive commands  
Terminal Reponses  
Setup Display Get Get Setup Play Select Refresh Send Send Send Setup  
Menu  
(0)  
Inkey Input Call Tone Item  
(7)  
SS SMS USSD event  
Text (1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(8)  
(9)  
(10) list (11)  
Backward Move (95)  
Command beyond ME  
capabilities (96)  
ME currently unable to  
process command (97)  
No response from the user (98)  
SIM session terminated by the  
user (99)  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
187  
 
 
Appendix C – Structure of the Terminal Profile  
Appendix C – Structure of the  
Terminal Profile  
First byte (Download):  
b8  
b7 b6  
b5 b4  
b3 b2 b1  
Profile download  
User choice  
SMS-PP data download  
Cell Broadcast data download  
Menu selection  
Set by product to 1  
Set by product to 1  
User choice  
'9E XX' response code for SIM data  
download error  
Set by product to 1  
Timer expiration  
USSD string data object supported in  
Call Control  
Set by product to 0  
User choice  
RFU, bit=0  
Second byte (Other):  
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4  
b3 b2 b1  
4
Command result  
Call Control by SIM  
Cell identity included in Call Control  
by SIM  
User choice  
User choice  
User choice  
MO short message control by SIM  
Handling of the alpha identifier  
according to subclause 9.1.3  
UCS2 Entry supported  
UCS2 Display supported  
Display of the extension text  
User choice  
User choice  
User choice  
User choice  
User choice  
Third byte (Proactive SIM):  
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4  
b3 b2 b1  
4
Proactive SIM: DISPLAY TEXT  
Proactive SIM: GET INKEY  
Proactive SIM: GET INPUT  
Proactive SIM: MORE TIME  
Proactive SIM: PLAY TONE  
Proactive SIM: POLL INTERVAL  
Proactive SIM: POLLING OFF  
Proactive SIM: REFRESH  
User choice  
User choice  
User choice  
User choice  
User choice  
Set by product to 1  
Set by product to 1  
User choice  
Fourth byte (Proactive SIM):  
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4  
b3 b2 b1  
4
Proactive SIM: SELECT ITEM  
Proactive SIM: SEND SHORT  
MESSAGE  
User choice  
User choice  
Proactive SIM: SEND SS  
User choice  
Proactive SIM: SEND USSD  
Proactive SIM: SET UP CALL  
Proactive SIM: SET UP MENU  
Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL  
INFORMATION (MCC, MNC, LAC,  
Cell ID & IMEI)  
User choice  
User choice  
User choice  
Set by product to 1  
Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL  
INFORMATION (NMR)  
Set by product to 1  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
188  
 
 
Appendix C – Structure of the Terminal Profile  
Fifth byte (Event driven information):  
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1  
b8  
Proactive SIM: SET UP EVENT LIST  
Event: MT call  
Event: Call connected  
Event: Call disconnected  
Event: Location status  
Event: User activity  
Set by product to 1  
Set by product to 1  
Set by product to 1  
Set by product to 1  
Set by product to 1  
User choice  
Event: Idle screen available  
Event: Card reader status  
User choice  
Set by product to 0  
Sixth byte: (reserved for Event driven information extensions)  
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1  
b8  
b8  
RFU, bit = 0  
Seventh byte (Multiple card proactive commands) for class "a"  
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1  
Proactive SIM: POWER ON CARD  
Proactive SIM: POWER OFF CARD  
Set by product to 0  
Set by product to 0  
Proactive SIM: PERFORM CARD APDU  
Proactive SIM: GET READER STATUS  
RFU, bit = 0  
Set by product to 0  
Set by product to 0  
Set by product to 0  
Eighth byte (Proactive SIM):  
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4  
b3 b2 b1  
Proactive  
MANAGEMENT (start, stop)  
Proactive SIM:  
MANAGEMENT (get current value)  
Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL  
INFORMATION (date, time and time  
zone)  
SIM:  
TIMER  
TIMER  
Set by product to 1  
Set by product to 1  
Set by product to 0  
Binary choice in GET INKEY  
SET UP IDLE MODE TEXT  
RUN AT COMMAND (e.g.. class "b"  
is supported)  
Set by product to 0  
Set by product to 0  
Set by product to 0  
2nd alpha identifier in SET UP  
CALL  
Set by product to 0  
Set by product to 0  
2nd  
capability  
configuration  
parameter (see 9.1.6)  
Ninth byte:  
b8 b7 b6  
b5 b4  
b3 b2 b1  
Sustained DISPLAY TEXT (see  
6.4.1)  
SEND DTMF command (see 6.4.24)  
RFU, bit = 0  
Set by product to 0  
Set by product to 0  
RFU, bit = 0  
RFU, bit = 0  
RFU, bit = 0  
RFU, bit = 0  
RFU, bit = 0  
Subsequent bytes:  
b8 b7 b6  
b5 b4  
b3 b2 b1  
RFU, bit = 0  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
189  
 
Appendix D – Command Type and Next Action Indicator  
Appendix D – Command Type  
and Next Action Indicator  
This table has been extracted from the GMS Technical Specification 11.14.  
Used for Next  
Action Indicator  
coding  
Used for Type of  
Command coding  
Value Name  
'00'  
-
-
'01'  
'02'  
'03'  
'04'  
'05'  
'10'  
'11'  
'12'  
'13'  
'14'  
'20'  
'21'  
'22'  
'23'  
'24'  
'25'  
'26'  
'27'  
'28'  
'30'  
'31'  
'32'  
'33'  
'34'  
'81'  
REFRESH  
MORE TIME  
POLL INTERVAL  
POLLING OFF  
SET UP EVENT LIST  
SET UP CALL  
SEND SS  
SEND USSD  
SEND SHORT MESSAGE  
SEND DTMF  
PLAY TONE  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DISPLAY TEXT  
GET INKEY  
GET INPUT  
SELECT ITEM  
SET UP MENU  
PROVIDE LOCAL INFORMATION  
TIMER MANAGEMENT  
SET UP IDLE MODEL TEXT  
PERFORM CARD APDU class "a" only  
POWER ON CARD  
POWER OFF CARD  
GET READER STATUS  
RUN AT COMMAND  
End of the proactive session  
X
X
X
X
X
class "a" only  
class "a" only  
class "a" only  
class "b" only  
not applicable  
X
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
190  
 
 
Appendix E – Coding of Alpha Fields in the SIM for UCS2  
Appendix E – Coding of Alpha  
fields in the SIM for UCS2  
The coding can take one of the three following structures. If the ME supports UCS2 coding of alpha fields in the SIM, the  
ME shall support all three coding schemes for character sets containing 128 characters or less; for character sets  
containing more than 128 characters, the ME shall at least support the first coding scheme. If the alpha field record  
contains GSM default alphabet characters only, then none of these schemes shall be used in that record. Within a record,  
only one coding scheme, either GSM default alphabet, or one of the three described below, shall be used.  
1. If the first byte in the alpha string is '0x80', then the other bytes are 16 bit UCS2 characters. The more significant  
byte (MSB) of the UCS2 character is coded in the lower numbered byte of the alpha field, and the less significant byte  
(LSB) of the UCS2 character is coded in the higher numbered alpha field byte. In other words, byte 2 of the alpha  
field contains the more significant byte (MSB) of the first UCS2 character, and byte 3 of the alpha field contains the  
less significant byte (LSB) of the first UCS2 character (as shown below). Unused bytes shall be set to 'FF', and if the  
alpha field has an even number of bytes, then the last (unusable) byte shall be set to 'FF'.  
Example 1  
Byte 1  
'80'  
Byte 2  
Ch1MSB  
Byte 3  
Ch1LSB  
Byte 4  
Ch2MSB  
Byte 5  
Ch2LSB  
Byte 6  
Ch3MSB  
Byte 7  
Ch3LSB  
Byte 8  
'FF'  
Byte 9  
'FF'  
2. If the first byte of the alpha string is set to 0x'81', then the second byte contains a value indicating the number of  
characters in the string. The third byte contains an 8-bit number that defines bits 15 to 8 of a 16-bit base pointer,  
where bit 16 is set to zero, and bits 7 to 1 are also set to zero. These sixteen bits represent a base pointer to a "half-  
page" in the UCS2 code space, to be used with some or all of the remaining bytes in the string. The fourth and  
subsequent bytes in the string contain codings as follows:  
If bit 8 of the byte is set to zero, the remaining bits of the byte contain a GSM Default Alphabet character  
If bit 8 of the byte is set to one, then the remaining bits are an offset value added to the 16-bit base pointer  
defined by byte 3, and the resulting 16-bit value is a UCS2 code point and defines a UCS2 character.  
Example 2  
Byte 1  
'81'  
Byte 2  
'05'  
Byte 3  
'13'  
Byte 4  
'53'  
Byte 5  
'95'  
Byte 6  
'A6'  
Byte 7  
'XX'  
Byte 8  
'FF'  
Byte 9  
'FF'  
In the above example:  
Byte 2 indicates there are 5 characters in the string  
Byte 3 indicates bits 15 to 8 of the base pointer, and indicates a bit pattern of 0hhh hhhh h000 0000 as the 16  
bit base pointer number. Bengali characters for example start at code position 0980 (0000 1001 1000 0000),  
which is indicated by the coding '13' in byte 3 (shown by the italicized digits).  
Byte 4 indicates GSM Default Alphabet character ‘53’; e.g., "S".  
Byte 5 indicates a UCS2 character offset to the base pointer of '15', expressed in binary as follows 001 0101,  
which, when added to the base pointer value results in a sixteen bit value of 0000 1001 1001 0101, e.g.. '0995',  
which is the Bengali letter KA.  
Byte 8 contains the value 'FF', but as the string length is 5, this a valid character in the string, where the bit  
pattern 111 1111 is added to the base pointer, yielding a sixteen bit value of 0000 1001 1111 1111 for the  
UCS2 character (e.g., '09FF').  
Byte 9 contains the padding value 0xFF.  
3. If the first byte of the alpha string is set to '0x82', then the second byte contains the length of the string (number of  
characters). The third and fourth bytes contain a 16-bit number that defines the complete 16-bit base pointer to a  
"half-page" in the UCS2 code space for use with some or all of the remaining bytes in the string. The fifth and  
subsequent bytes in the string contain coding as follows:  
If bit 8 of the byte is set to zero, the remaining 7 bits of the byte contain a GSM Default Alphabet character  
If bit 8 of the byte is set to one, the remaining 7 bits are an offset value added to the base pointer defined in  
bytes three and four, and the resultant 16 bit value is a UCS2 code point, and defines a UCS2 character.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
191  
 
 
Appendix E – Coding of Alpha Fields in the SIM for UCS2  
Example 3  
Byte 1  
'82'  
Byte 2  
'05'  
Byte 3  
'05'  
Byte 4  
'30'  
Byte 5  
'2D'  
Byte 6  
'82'  
Byte 7  
'D3'  
Byte 8  
'2D'  
Byte 9  
'31'  
In the above example  
Byte 2 indicates there are 5 characters in the string  
Bytes 3 and 4 contain a sixteen bit base pointer number of '0530', pointing to the first character of the Armenian  
character set.  
Byte 5 contains a GSM Default Alphabet character of '2D', which is a dash "-".  
Byte 6 contains a value '82', which indicates it is an offset of '02' added to the base pointer, resulting in a UCS2  
character code of '0532', which represents Armenian character Capital BEN.  
Byte 7 contains a value 'D3', an offset of '53', which when added to the base pointer results in a UCS2 code  
point of '0583', representing Armenian Character small PIWR.  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
192  
 
Appendix F – Command Execution and Dependence on SIM  
Appendix F – Command  
Execution and Dependence on  
SIM  
The following table lists AT command execution syntax and the execution condition. The SIM dependency column indicates if  
the command behavior will vary if another card is used. For example, it will vary for phonebook reading commands. The  
Intermediate column indicates if intermediate response can occur.  
General Commands  
AT Commands Conditions  
SIM dependence  
Intermediate  
AT+CGMI  
AT+CGMM  
AT+CGMR  
AT+CGSN  
AT+CSCS  
AT+WPCS  
AT+CIMI  
AT+CCID  
AT+GCAP  
A/  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 1  
+WIND: 3  
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Depends on previous command Depends on prev. command  
AT+CPOF  
+WIND: 3 without SIM,  
+WIND: 1 with SIM  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
Depends of the sequence used  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
N
AT+CFUN  
AT+CPAS  
AT+CMEE  
AT+CKPD  
AT+CCLK  
AT+CALA  
AT+CRMP  
AT+CRSL  
AT+CMUX  
N
N
N
Y/N  
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Call Control Commands  
AT commands  
ATD  
ATH  
ATA  
AT+CEER  
AT+VTD  
AT+VTS  
ATDL  
AT%D  
ATS0  
AT+CICB  
AT+CSNS  
AT+VGR  
AT+VGT  
AT+CMUT  
AT+SPEAKER  
AT+ECHO  
AT+SIDET  
AT+VIP  
Conditions  
Depends of sequence used  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 5  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 5  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
SIM dependence  
Intermediate  
Y/N  
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
193  
 
     
Appendix G – Conditions for Command Execution and SIM Dependence  
Network Service Commands  
AT commands  
AT+CSQ  
Conditions  
+WIND: 3  
SIM dependence  
Intermediate  
N
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
AT+COPS  
AT+CREG  
AT+WOPN  
AT+CPLS  
AT+CPOL  
AT+COPN  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
PIN  
After PIN entered  
After PIN entered  
Security Commands  
AT commands  
AT+CPIN  
Conditions  
+WIND: 1  
SIM dependence Intermediate  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
AT+CPIN2  
AT+CPINC  
AT+CLCK  
after PIN entered  
+WIND: 1  
+WIND: 4  
AT+CPWD  
+WIND: 4  
Phonebook Commands  
AT commands  
AT+CPBS  
AT+CPBR  
AT+CPBF  
AT+CPBW  
AT+CPBP  
AT+CPBN  
AT+CNUM  
AT+WAIP  
Conditions  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
SIM dependence  
Intermediate  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
AT+WDCP  
AT+CSVM  
AT+WCOS  
AT+WPGW  
AT+WPGR  
AT+WPGS  
Short Messages Commands  
AT commands  
AT+CSMS  
AT+CNMA  
AT+CPMS  
AT+CMGF  
AT+CSAS  
AT+CRES  
AT+CSDH  
AT+CNMI  
AT+CMGR  
AT+CMGL  
AT+CMGS  
AT+CMGW  
AT+CMSS  
AT+CSMP  
AT+CMGD  
AT+CSCA  
AT+CSCB  
AT+WCBM  
AT+WMSC  
AT+WMGO  
AT+WUSS  
AT+WMCP  
AT+CMMS  
Conditions  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 3  
SIM dependence Intermediate  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 16  
+WIND: 3  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
194  
 
       
Appendix G – Conditions for Command Execution and SIM Dependence  
Supplementary Services Commands  
AT commands  
AT+CCFC  
AT+CLCK  
AT+CPWD  
AT+CCWA  
AT+CLIR  
Conditions  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
SIM dependence  
Intermediate  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
+WIND: 4  
After PIN entered  
After PIN entered  
After PIN entered  
After PIN entered  
After PIN entered  
After PIN entered  
After PIN entered  
+WIND: 5,2  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 4  
AT+CLIP  
AT+COLP  
AT+CAOC  
AT+CACM  
AT+CAMM  
AT+CPUC  
AT+CHLD  
AT+CLCC  
AT+CSSN  
AT+CUSD  
AT+CCUG  
Data Commands  
AT commands  
AT+CBST  
AT+FCLASS  
AT+CR  
Conditions  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
After PIN entered  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
SIM dependence  
Intermediate  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
AT+CRC  
AT+ILRR  
AT+CRLP  
AT+DOPT  
AT%C  
AT+DS  
AT+DR  
\N  
V24-V25 Commands  
AT commands  
AT+IPR  
AT+ICF  
AT+IFC  
AT&C  
Conditions  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+CLCC:X,0,0,1,X  
(data call)  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
SIM dependence Intermediate  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
AT&D  
AT&S  
ATO  
ATQ  
ATV  
ATZ  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
AT&W  
AT&T  
ATE  
AT&F  
AT&V  
ATI  
AT+WMUX  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
195  
 
     
Appendix G – Conditions for Command Execution and SIM Dependence  
Specific AT Commands  
AT commands Conditions  
SIM dependence  
Intermediate  
AT+CCED  
AT+WIND  
AT+ADC  
AT+CMER  
AT+WLPR  
AT+WLPW  
AT+WIOR  
AT+WIOW  
AT+WIOM  
AT+WAC  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 1  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 1  
+WIND: 1  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 4  
None (PIN for auto CNL)  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
PIN  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
AT+WTONE  
AT+WDTMF  
AT+WDWL  
AT+WVR  
AT+WDR  
AT+WSVG  
AT+WSTR  
AT+WSCAN  
AT+WRIM  
AT+W32K  
AT+WCDM  
AT+WCCS  
AT+WLCK  
AT+CPHS  
AT+WMIR  
AT+WCDP  
AT+WMBN  
AT+WALS  
AT+WOPEN  
AT+WRST  
AT+WSST  
AT+WATH  
AT+WMBS  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N (Y for auto CNL)  
Y
N
N
Y
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
+WIND: 3  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SIM Toolkit Commands  
AT commands Conditions  
SIM dependence  
Intermediate  
AT+STSF  
AT+STIN  
AT+STGI  
AT+STGR  
None  
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
196  
 
   
Appendix G – Conditions for Command Execution and SIM Dependence  
GPRS Commands  
AT commands Conditions  
SIM dependence  
Intermediate  
AT+CGDCONT +WIND: 4  
AT+CGQREQ  
AT+CGQMIN  
AT+CGATT  
AT+CGACT  
AT+CGDATA  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
AT+CGCLASS +WIND: 3  
AT+CGCLASS +WIND: 4  
N
N
AT+CGSMS  
AT+CGREP  
AT+CGREG  
AT+CGAUTO  
AT+CGANS  
AT+CGADDR  
AT+WGPRS  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 4  
+WIND: 3  
None  
N
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
197  
 
 
Index  
Index  
+CMGF Preferred Message Format...............................64  
+CMGL List Message.....................................................69  
+CMGR Read Message.................................................68  
+CMGS Send Message .................................................70  
+CMGW Write Message to Memory ..............................71  
+CMMS More Messages to Send ..................................79  
+CMS ERROR Message Service Failure Result Code .174  
+CMSS Send Message from Storage ............................72  
+CMUT Microphone Mute Control .................................26  
+CNMA New Message Acknowledgement.....................61  
+CNMI New Message Indication....................................66  
+CNUM Subscriber Number ..........................................55  
+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation.......84  
+COPN Read Operator Name ......................................39  
+COPS Operator Selection............................................31  
+CPAS Phone activity status ..........................................17  
+CPBF Find Phonebook Entries ....................................52  
+CPBN Move Action in Phonebook ...............................54  
+CPBP Phonebook Phone Search ................................53  
+CPBR Read Phonebook Entries ..................................47  
+CPBS Select Phonebook Memory Storage..................46  
+CPBW Write Phonebook Entry ....................................49  
+CPHS CPHS Command.............................................126  
+CPIN Enter PIN............................................................40  
+CPIN2 Enter PIN2........................................................42  
+CPINC PIN Remaining Attempt Number......................42  
+CPLS Selection of Preferred PLMN List.......................36  
+CPMS Preferred Message Storage..............................63  
+CPOF Power off............................................................16  
+CPOL Preferred Operator List......................................37  
+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table ...................86  
+CPWD Change Password............................................44  
+CPWD Modify SS Password........................................81  
+CR Service Reporting Control..............................94, 167  
+CRC Cellular Result Codes..................................95, 166  
+CREG Network Registration ........................................33  
+CRLP Radio Link Protocol Parameters........................96  
+CSAS Save Settings ....................................................65  
+CSCA Service Center Address ....................................74  
+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Types..............74  
+CSCS Select TE character set......................................14  
+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters ...........................65  
+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters...............................72  
+CSMS Select Message Service ...................................61  
+CSNS Single Numbering Scheme ...............................24  
+CSQ Signal Quality......................................................31  
+CSSN Supplementary Service Notifications.................89  
+CSVM Set Voice Mail Number.....................................56  
+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data.......90  
+DOPT Others Radio Link Parameters..........................96  
+DR V42bis Data Compression Report..........................98  
+DS V42bis Data Compression .....................................97  
+ECHO Echo Cancellation.............................................27  
+FCLASS Select Mode ..................................................94  
+GCAPCapabilities list....................................................15  
+ICF DTE-DCE Character Framing .............................100  
+IFC DTE-DCE Local FLow Control ............................101  
+ILRR DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting .........................95  
+IPR Fixed DTE Rate.....................................................99  
+SIDET SideTone Modification......................................30  
+SPEAKER Speaker & Microphone Selection...............26  
%
%C Select Data Compression........................................97  
%D Automatic Dialing with DTR.....................................23  
&
&C Set DCD Signal ......................................................101  
&D Set DTR Signal.......................................................102  
&F Restore Factory Settings ........................................104  
&S Set DSR Signal.......................................................102  
&T Auto-Tests ..............................................................104  
&V Display Configuration .............................................105  
&W Save Configuration................................................103  
+
+ADC Analog Digital Converter Measurements ...........111  
+CACM Accumulated Call Meter....................................85  
+CALA Alarm Management.............................................18  
+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum...................86  
+CAOC Advice of Charge ..............................................85  
+CBST Bearer Type Selection .......................................93  
+CCED Cell Environment Description..........................107  
+CCFC Call Forwarding..................................................80  
+CCID Card Identification ...............................................15  
+CCLK Clock Management.............................................18  
+CCUG Closed User Group...........................................91  
+CCWA Call Waiting......................................................82  
+CEER Extended Error Report ..............................21, 167  
+CFUN Set phone functionality.......................................16  
+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate .............156  
+CGANS Manual Response to Network Request for PDP  
Context Activation......................................................165  
+CGATT Attach or Detach ...........................................155  
+CGAUTO Automatic Response to Network Request for  
PDP Context Activation .............................................164  
+CGCLASS GPRS Mobile Station Class .....................158  
+CGDATA Enter Data State.........................................157  
+CGDCONT Define PDP Context................................149  
+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting ..............................160  
+CGMI Manufacturer identification..................................13  
+CGMM Request Model Identification.............................13  
+CGMR Request revision identification...........................13  
+CGPADDR Show PDP Address.................................166  
+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile Minimum Acceptable  
...................................................................................154  
+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile Requested.........151  
+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status..............161  
+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages ........159  
+CHLD Call Related Supplementary Services ...............87  
+CICB Incoming Call Bearer ..........................................24  
+CIMI Request IMSI........................................................15  
+CKPD Keypad control ...................................................17  
+CLCC List Current Ccalls .............................................88  
+CLCK Call Barring........................................................81  
+CLCK Facility Lock.......................................................43  
+CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation ...............83  
+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction ..................83  
+CME Error Result Code ..............................................173  
+CMEE Report Mobile Equipment errors........................17  
+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting ................112  
+CMGD Delete Message ...............................................73  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
198  
 
 
Index  
+STCR Unsolicited Result SIM ToolKit Control Response  
...................................................................................146  
+STGI SIM ToolKit Get Information..............................143  
+STGR SIM ToolKit Give Response ............................146  
+STIN or STRIL SIM ToolKit Indication........................142  
+STSF SIM ToolKit Set Facilities .................................140  
+VGR, +VGT Gain Control.............................................24  
+VIP Initialize Voice Parameters....................................30  
+VTD, +VTS DTMF signals............................................21  
+W32K 32kHz Power Down Mode...............................123  
+WAC Abort Command................................................116  
+WAIP Avoid Phonebook Initialization ...........................56  
+WALS Alternate Line Service......................................132  
+WATH Hang-Up .........................................................136  
+WCBM Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers..................75  
+WCCS Custom Character Set....................................124  
+WCDM Change Default Melody .................................123  
+WCDP Change Default Player ...................................130  
+WCOS Contact Selector...............................................57  
+WCPI CPHS Information............................................129  
+WCSP Customer Service Profile................................130  
+WDCI Unsolicited Result Diverted Call Indicator........128  
+WDCP Delete Calls Phonebook...................................56  
+WDR Data Rate .........................................................120  
+WDTMF Play DTMF Tone..........................................118  
+WDWL Downloading..................................................118  
+WGPRS GPRS Parameters Customization ...............168  
+WIND General Indications..........................................109  
+WIOM Input/Output Management ..............................115  
+WIOR Read GPIO Value............................................114  
+WIOW Write GPIO Value ...........................................114  
+WLCK Lock ................................................................125  
+WLPR Read Language Preference............................113  
+WLPW Write Language Preference ...........................113  
+WMBN CPHS Mail Box Number .................................131  
+WMBS Multi-Band Selection ......................................137  
+WMCP Copy Messages ...............................................78  
+WMIR Customer Storage Mirror.................................130  
+WMSC Message Status Modification...........................75  
+WMUX Multiplexing Mode..........................................106  
+WNON Network Operator Name................................129  
+WOLM Operator List Management ..............................33  
+WOPEN Open AT Control Command ........................133  
+WOPN Read Operator Name.......................................34  
+WPCS Phonebook Character Set .................................14  
+WPGS Settings of a Phonebook Group .......................59  
+WPGW Create and Delete a Phonebook Group ..........57  
+WPGW Read a Phonebook Group...............................58  
+WRIM Ring Indicator Mode ........................................122  
+WRST Reset ..............................................................135  
+WSCAN Scan.............................................................122  
+WSST Set Standard Tone..........................................135  
+WSTR Status Request...............................................121  
+WSVG Select Voice Gain...........................................121  
+WTONE Play Tone.....................................................117  
+WUSS Change or Do Not Change SMS Status ...........77  
+WVMI Unsolicited Result Voice Mail Indicator............128  
+WVR Voice Rate ........................................................119  
Advice of Charge +CAOC ..............................................85  
Alarm Management +CALA ...........................................18  
Alternate Line Service +WALS.....................................132  
Analog Digital Converter Measurements +ADC...........111  
Answer a Call A..............................................................21  
Automatic Answer S0.....................................................23  
Automatic Dialing with DTR %D.....................................23  
Automatic Response to Network Request for PDP Context  
Activation +CGAUTO................................................164  
Auto-Tests &T ..............................................................104  
Avoid Phonebook Initialization +WAIP...........................56  
B
Back to Online Mode O................................................102  
Bearer Type Selection +CBST.......................................93  
C
Call Barring +CLCK........................................................81  
Call Forwarding +CCFC.................................................80  
Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD...............87  
Call Waiting +CCWA......................................................82  
Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP ...............83  
Calling Line Identification Restriction +CLIR ..................83  
Capabilities list +GCAP...................................................15  
Card Identification +CCID ..............................................15  
Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM .................75  
Cell Environment Description +CCED..........................107  
Cellular Result Codes +CRC..................................95, 166  
Change Default Melody +WCDM.................................123  
Change Default Player +WCDP...................................130  
Change or Do Not Change SMS Status +WUSS...........77  
Change Password +CPWD............................................44  
Clock Management +CCLK............................................18  
Closed User Group +CCUG...........................................91  
Command line  
AT................................................................................10  
Command Type and Next Action Indicator....................190  
Commands Short Messages  
New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA.................61  
Commands, Call Control  
Answer a Call A..........................................................21  
Automatic Answer S0 .................................................23  
Automatic Dialing with DTR %D .................................23  
Dial command D.........................................................19  
DTMF Signals +VTD, +VTS........................................21  
Echo Cancellation +ECHO .........................................27  
Extended Error Report +CEER...................................21  
Gain Control +VGR, +VGT.........................................24  
Hang-Up command H.................................................20  
Incoming Call Bearer +CICB ......................................24  
Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP ................................30  
Microphone Mute Control +CMUT..............................26  
Redial Last Telephone Number DL ............................22  
Remote Disconnection A............................................21  
SideTone Modification +SIDET ..................................30  
Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS............................24  
Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER ...........26  
Commands, Data  
Bearer Type Selection +CBST ...................................93  
Cellular Result Codes +CRC......................................95  
DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR......................95  
Others Radio Link Parameters +DOPT ......................96  
Radio Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP ....................96  
Select Data Compression %C ....................................97  
Select Data Error Correcting Mode \N........................98  
Select Mode +FCLASS...............................................94  
Service Reporting Control +CR ..................................94  
V42bis Data Compression +DS..................................97  
V42bis Data Compression Report +DR......................98  
3
32kHz Power Down Mode +W32K...............................123  
A
A Answer a Call..............................................................21  
A Remote Disconnection................................................21  
A/ Repeat last command................................................15  
Abort Command +WAC................................................116  
Accumulated Call Meter +CACM....................................85  
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum +CAMM...................86  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
199  
 
Index  
Commands, General  
Pin Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC...................42  
Commands, Short Messages  
Alarm Management +CALA........................................18  
Capabilities list +GCAP................................................15  
Card Identification +CCID............................................15  
Clock Management +CCLK ........................................18  
Keypad control +CKPD...............................................17  
Manufacturer Identification +CGMI..............................13  
Phone activity status +CPAS......................................17  
Phonebook Character Set +WPCS.............................14  
Power off +CPOF .......................................................16  
Product Serial Number +CGSN..................................14  
Repeat last command A/ ............................................15  
Report Mobile Equipment errors +CMEE....................17  
Request IMSI +CIMI ...................................................15  
Request Model Identification +CGMM.........................13  
Request revision identification +CGMR.......................13  
Select TE character set +CSCS .................................14  
Set phone functionality +CFUN ..................................16  
Commands, GPRS  
Automatic Response to Network Request for PDP  
Context Activation +CGAUTO................................164  
Cellular Result Codes +CRC ....................................166  
Define PDP Context +CGDCONT ............................149  
Enter Data State +CGDATA .....................................157  
Extended Error Report +CEER.................................167  
GPRS Attach or Detach +CGATT.............................155  
GPRS Event Reporting +CGEREP...........................160  
GPRS Mobile Station Class +CGCLASS..................158  
GPRS Network Registration Status +CGREG..........161  
GPRS Parameters Customization +WGPRS............168  
Manual Response to Network Request for PDP Context  
Activation +CGANS................................................165  
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT..........156  
Quality of Service Profile Minimum Acceptable  
+CGQMIN ..............................................................154  
Quality of Service Profile Requested +CGQREQ .....151  
Request GPRS IP Service D ....................................162  
Select Service for MO SMS Messages +CGSMS.....159  
Service Reporting Control +CR ................................167  
Show PDP Address +CGPADDR .............................166  
Commands, Network Service  
Network Registration +CREG.....................................33  
Operator List Management +WOLM...........................33  
Operator Selection +COPS.........................................31  
Preferred Operator List +CPOL ..................................37  
Read Operator Name +COPN....................................39  
Read Operator Name +WOPN ...................................34  
Selection of Preferred PLMN List +CPLS ...................36  
Signal Quality +CSQ...................................................31  
Commands, Phonebook  
Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM..............75  
Change or Do Not Change SMS Status +WUSS ........77  
Copy Messages +WMCP ...........................................78  
Delete Message +CMGD............................................73  
List Message +CMGL.................................................69  
Message Overwriting +WMGO....................................76  
Message Status Modification +WMSC .......................75  
More Messages to Send +CMMS...............................79  
New Message Indication +CNMI ................................66  
Preferred Message Format +CMGF ...........................64  
Preferred Message Storage +CPMS ..........................63  
Read Message +CMGR .............................................68  
Restore Settings +CRES............................................65  
Save Settings +CSAS.................................................65  
Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB..........74  
Select Message Service +CSMS................................61  
Send Message +CMGS..............................................70  
Send Message From Storage +CMSS .......................72  
Service Center Address +CSCA.................................74  
Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP ...........................72  
Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH........................65  
Write Message to Memory +CMGW...........................71  
Commands, SIM ToolKit  
SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI..........................143  
SIM ToolKit Give Response +STGR) .......................146  
SIM ToolKit Indication +STIN or STRIL ....................142  
SIM ToolKit Set Facilities +STSF .............................140  
Unsolicited Result SIM ToolKit Control Response  
+STCR...................................................................146  
Commands, Specific  
32kHz Power Down Mode +W32K ............................123  
Abort Command +WAC............................................116  
Alternate Line Service +WALS .................................132  
Analog Digital Converter Measurements +ADC .......111  
Cell Environment Description +CCED ......................107  
Change Default Melody +WCDM .............................123  
Change Default Player +WCDP ...............................130  
CPHS Command +CPHS.........................................126  
CPHS Information +WCPI ........................................129  
CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN.............................131  
Custom Character Sset +WCCS ...............................124  
Customer Service Profile +WCSP ............................130  
Customer Storage Mirror +WMIR.............................130  
Data Rate +WDR......................................................120  
Downloading +WDWL ..............................................118  
General Indications +WIND......................................109  
Hang-Up +WATH .....................................................136  
Input/Output Management +WIOM...........................115  
Lock +WLCK ............................................................125  
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER.............112  
Multi-Band Selection +WMBS ..................................137  
Network Operator Name +WNON ............................129  
Open AT Control Command +WOPEN.....................133  
Play DTMF Tone +WDTMF......................................118  
Play Tone +WTONE.................................................117  
Read GPIO Value +WIOR........................................114  
Read Language Preference +WLPR ........................113  
Reset +WRST ..........................................................135  
Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM .....................................122  
Scan +WSCAN..........................................................122  
Select Voice Gain +WSVG.......................................121  
Set Standard Tone +WSST......................................135  
Status Request +WSTR ...........................................121  
Unsolicited Result Diverted Call Indicator +WDCI....128  
Unsolicited Result Voice Mail Indicator +WVMI........128  
Voice Rate +WVR ....................................................119  
Write GPIO Value +WIOW .......................................114  
Avoid Phonebook Initialization +WAIP........................56  
Contact Selector +WCOS...........................................57  
Create and Delete a Phonebook Group +WPGW.......57  
Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP ...............................56  
Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF.................................52  
Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN............................54  
Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP.............................53  
Read a Phonebook Group +WPGW...........................58  
Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR...............................47  
Select Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS ..............46  
Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM..................................56  
Settings of a Phonebook Group +WPGS....................59  
Subscriber Number +CNUM.......................................55  
Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW.................................49  
Commands, Security  
Change Password +CPWD ........................................44  
Enter PIN +CPIN ........................................................40  
Enter PIN2 +CPIN2 ....................................................42  
Facility Lock +CLCK ...................................................43  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
200  
 
Index  
Write Language Preference +WLPW........................113  
Commands, Supplementary Services  
E
E Echo .........................................................................104  
Echo E .........................................................................104  
Echo Cancellation +ECHO.............................................27  
Enter Data State +CGDATA.........................................157  
Enter PIN +CPIN............................................................40  
Enter PIN2 +CPIN2........................................................42  
Extended Error Report +CEER ..............................21, 167  
Accumulated Call Meter +CACM................................85  
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum +CAMM ...............86  
Advice of Charge +CAOC...........................................85  
Call Barring +CLCK ....................................................81  
Call Forwarding +CCFC..............................................80  
Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD............87  
Call Waiting +CCWA ..................................................82  
Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP............83  
Calling Line Identification Restriction +CLIR...............83  
Closed User Group +CCUG .......................................91  
Connected Line Identification Presentation +COLP....84  
List Current Calls +CLCC ............................................88  
Modify SS Password +CPWD.....................................81  
Price Per Unit and Currency Table +CPUC................86  
Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN .............89  
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data +CUSD ...90  
Commands, V24-V25  
Auto-Tests &T...........................................................104  
Back to Online Mode O.............................................102  
DCE Response Format V .........................................103  
Default Configuration Z.............................................103  
Display Configuration &V..........................................105  
DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF..........................100  
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control +IFC ..........................101  
Echo E......................................................................104  
Fixed DTE Rate +IPR.................................................99  
Multiplexing Mode +WMUX ......................................106  
Request Identification Information I ..........................105  
Restore Factory Settings &F.....................................104  
Result Code Suppression Q .....................................102  
Save Configuration &W ............................................103  
Set DCD Signal &C...................................................101  
Set DSR Signal &S...................................................102  
Set DTR Signal &D...................................................102  
Connected Line Identification Presentation +COLP .......84  
Contact Selector +WCOS...............................................57  
Copy Messages +WMCP ...............................................78  
CPHS Command +CPHS.............................................126  
CPHS Information +WCPI............................................129  
CPHS Information Field.................................................184  
CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN ................................131  
Create and Delete a Phonebook Group +WPGW ..........57  
CRES Restore Settings..................................................65  
CSP Constants..............................................................185  
Custom Character Set +WCCS....................................124  
Customer Service Profile +WCSP................................130  
Customer Storage Mirror +WMIR.................................130  
F
Facility Lock +CLCK.......................................................43  
Failure Cause................................................................176  
Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF ....................................52  
Fixed DTE Rate +IPR.....................................................99  
G
Gain Control +VGR, +VGT.............................................24  
General Indications +WIND..........................................109  
GPRS AT Command Examples ....................................170  
GPRS Attach or Detach +CGATT................................155  
GPRS Event Reporting +CGEREP..............................160  
GPRS Mobile Station Class +CGCLASS .....................158  
GPRS Network Registration Status +CGREG .............161  
GPRS Parameters Customization +WGPRS ...............168  
GSM Call Forwarding Sequences List ..........................182  
GSM Call Waiting Sequences List ................................183  
GSM Security Sequences List ......................................182  
GSM Sequences List ....................................................182  
H
H Hang-Up command ....................................................20  
Hang-Up +WATH.........................................................136  
Hang-Up command H ....................................................20  
I
I Request Identification Information..............................105  
Incoming Call Bearer +CICB..........................................24  
Information responses, result codes ...............................10  
Initialization .....................................................................11  
Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP....................................30  
Input/Output Management +WIOM ..............................115  
K
Keypad control +CKPD ..................................................17  
L
Line settings....................................................................10  
List Current Calls +CLCC...............................................88  
List Message +CMGL.....................................................69  
Lock +WLCK................................................................125  
D
D Dial command.............................................................19  
D Request GPRS IP Service........................................162  
Data Rate +WDR .........................................................120  
DCE Response Format V.............................................103  
Default Configuration Z ................................................103  
Define PDP Context +CGDCONT................................149  
Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP...................................56  
Delete Message +CMGD ...............................................73  
Dial command D.............................................................19  
Display Configuration &V .............................................105  
DL Redial Last Telephone Number ................................22  
Downloading +WDWL..................................................118  
DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF..............................100  
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control +IFC..............................101  
DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR .........................95  
DTMF Signals +VTD, +VTS ...........................................21  
M
Manual Response to Network Request for PDP Context  
Activation +CGANS ..................................................165  
Manufacturer identification +CGMI..................................13  
ME Mobile Equipment......................................................9  
ME SIM ToolKit Support................................................187  
Message Overwriting +WMGO ......................................76  
Message Status Modification +WMSC...........................75  
Microphone Mute Control +CMUT .................................26  
Mobile Equipment ME......................................................9  
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER ................112  
Mobile Originated Call MOC ............................................9  
Mobile Station MS............................................................9  
Mobile Terminated Call MTC ............................................9  
MOC Mobile Originated Call ............................................9  
Modify SS Password +CPWD........................................81  
More Messages to Send +CMMS ..................................79  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
201  
 
Index  
Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN................................54  
MS Mobile Station ............................................................9  
MTC Mobile Terminated Call............................................9  
Multi-Band Selection +WMBS ......................................137  
Multiplexing Mode +WMUX...........................................106  
Result Codes Intermediate............................................179  
Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM........................................122  
S
S0 Automatic Answer.....................................................23  
Save Configuration &W................................................103  
Save Settings +CSAS ....................................................65  
Scan +WSCAN ............................................................122  
Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB..............74  
Select Data Compression %C........................................97  
Select Data Error Correcting Mode \N............................98  
Select Message Service +CSMS ...................................61  
Select Mode +FCLASS ..................................................94  
Select Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS..................46  
Select Service for MO SMS Messages +CGSMS........159  
Select TE character set +CSCS.....................................14  
Select Voice Gain +WSVG...........................................121  
Selection of Preferred PLMN List +CPLS.......................36  
Send Message +CMGS .................................................70  
Send Message from Storage +CMSS............................72  
Service Center Address +CSCA ....................................74  
Service Reporting Control +CR..............................94, 167  
Set DCD Signal &C......................................................101  
Set DSR Signal &S ......................................................102  
Set DTR Signal &D ......................................................102  
Set phone functionality +CFUN......................................16  
Set Standard Tone +WSST..........................................135  
Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP...............................72  
Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM.....................................56  
Settings of a Phonebook Group +WPGS.......................59  
Short Messages Commands Parameters Definition........60  
Show PDP Address +CGPADDR.................................166  
Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH ...........................65  
SideTone Modification +SIDET......................................30  
Signal Quality +CSQ......................................................31  
SIM Application ToolKit Overview.................................138  
SIM Card Insertion and Removal ....................................11  
SIM Conditions  
N
N Select Data Error Correcting Mode.............................98  
Network Operator Name +WNON................................129  
Network Registration +CREG.........................................33  
Network Requested PDP Context Activation.................163  
New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA.....................61  
New Message Indication +CNMI....................................66  
O
O Back to Online Mode ................................................102  
Open AT Control Command +WOPEN ........................133  
Operator List Management +WOLM ..............................33  
Operator Selection +COPS ............................................31  
Other Radio Link Parameters +DOPT............................96  
P
Parameters Storage Mode ............................................180  
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT ..............156  
Phone activity status +CPAS..........................................17  
Phone number length......................................................11  
Phonebook Character Set +WPCS ................................14  
Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP.................................53  
PIN Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC......................42  
Play DTMF Tone +WDTMF..........................................118  
Play Tone +WTONE.....................................................117  
Power off +CPOF...........................................................16  
Preferred Message Format +CMGF...............................64  
Preferred Message Storage +CPMS..............................63  
Preferred Operator List +CPOL......................................37  
Price Per Unit and Currency Table +CPUC....................86  
Product Serial Number +CGSN......................................14  
Q
Call Control Commands List......................................193  
Data Commands List.................................................195  
General Commands List............................................193  
GPRS Commands List ..............................................197  
Network Service Commands List...............................194  
Phonebook Commands List.......................................194  
Security Commands List............................................194  
Short Messages Commands List...............................194  
SIM Toolkit Commands List.......................................196  
Specific AT Commands List.......................................196  
Supplementary Commands List.................................195  
V24-V25 Commands List...........................................195  
SIM Conditions for Command Execution and Dependence  
..................................................................................193  
SIM for UCS2, Coding of Alpha Fields..........................191  
SIM Toolkit Error Codes................................................140  
SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI .............................143  
SIM ToolKit Give Response +STGR............................146  
SIM ToolKit Indication +STIN or STRIL........................142  
SIM ToolKit Set Facilities +STSF.................................140  
Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS ...............................24  
Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER...............26  
Specific Error Result Codes..........................................174  
Status Request +WSTR...............................................121  
Structure of Terminal Profile .........................................188  
Subscriber Number +CNUM ..........................................55  
Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN.................89  
Q Result Code Suppression.........................................102  
Quality of Service Profile Minimum Acceptable +CGQMIN  
...................................................................................154  
Quality of Service Profile Requested +CGQREQ.........151  
R
Radio Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP........................96  
Read a Phonebook Group +WPGW...............................58  
Read GPIO Value +WIOR............................................114  
Read Language Preference +WLPR............................113  
Read Message +CMGR.................................................68  
Read Operator Name +COPN........................................39  
Read Operator Name +WOPN.......................................34  
Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR ..................................47  
Redial Last Telephone Number DL ................................22  
Remote Disconnection A................................................21  
Repeat last command A/.................................................15  
Report Mobile Equipment errors +CMEE.......................17  
Report Mobile Equipment errors+CMEE.........................17  
Request GPRS IP Service D........................................162  
Request Identification Information I..............................105  
Request IMSI +CIMI........................................................15  
Request Model Identification +CGMM.............................13  
Request revision identification +CGMR...........................13  
Reset +WRST ..............................................................135  
Restore Factory Settings &F ........................................104  
Restore Settings +CRES................................................65  
Result Code Suppression Q.........................................102  
Result Codes Final........................................................179  
T
TE Terminal Equipment ...................................................9  
Terminal Equipment TE ...................................................9  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
202  
 
Index  
V42bis Data Compression +DS .....................................97  
V42bis Data Compression Report +DR..........................98  
Voice Rate +WVR........................................................119  
U
Unsolicited Result Codes ..............................................179  
Unsolicited Result Diverted Call Indicator +WDCI........128  
Unsolicited Result SIM ToolKit Control Response +STCR  
...................................................................................146  
Unsolicited Result Voice Mail Indicator +WVMI............128  
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data +CUSD.......90  
Using Commands During Data Connection.....................92  
W
Write GPIO Value +WIOW...........................................114  
Write Language Preference +WLPW...........................113  
Write Message to Memory +CMGW ..............................71  
Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW ....................................49  
V
Z
V DCE Response Format.............................................103  
Z Default Configuration ................................................103  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Wireless GSM/GPRS AT Commands (Document Number S000293I)  
203  
 

NCT Group Lathe NCT 100T User Manual
Nikon Digital Camera 13293 User Manual
Nokia Corded Headset HS 82 User Manual
Nokia Flat Panel Television AS191WM User Manual
Optimus Cassette Player SCP 98 User Manual
Optimus Katadyn Products Inc VCR MODEL 110 MODEL 60 User Manual
Optimus Speaker STS 600 User Manual
Optoma Technology Home Theater System ES526 User Manual
Panasonic Camcorder AG HPX502 User Manual
Panasonic Oven KX TDA100 User Manual